Dell PowerEdge FN I/O Module Command Line Reference Guide 9.10(0.
Notes, cautions, and warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either potential damage to hardware or loss of data and tells you how to avoid the problem. WARNING: A WARNING indicates a potential for property damage, personal injury, or death. © 2016 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. This product is protected by U.S. and international copyright and intellectual property laws.
Contents 1 About this Guide................................................................................................. 48 Objectives............................................................................................................................................48 Audience..............................................................................................................................................49 Conventions...................................................................
cd......................................................................................................................................................... 66 copy..................................................................................................................................................... 67 copy running-config startup-config..................................................................................................68 delete.......................................................
end.......................................................................................................................................................99 exec-timeout.................................................................................................................................... 100 exit......................................................................................................................................................101 feature unique-name.............................
telnet..................................................................................................................................................142 telnet-peer-stack-unit...................................................................................................................... 143 terminal length.................................................................................................................................. 144 terminal monitor.............................................
ip access-group.................................................................................................................................170 show ip access-lists........................................................................................................................... 171 show ip accounting access-list.........................................................................................................171 Standard IP ACL Commands.....................................................
Route Map Commands.....................................................................................................................225 continue............................................................................................................................................ 225 description.........................................................................................................................................227 match interface.....................................................
permit icmp.......................................................................................................................................302 permit................................................................................................................................................ 305 deny udp (for IPv6 ACLs).................................................................................................................. 306 deny tcp (for IPv6 ACLs)........................................
bgp asnotation.................................................................................................................................. 343 bgp bestpath as-path ignore............................................................................................................344 bgp bestpath as-path multipath-relax.............................................................................................344 bgp bestpath med confed....................................................................
neighbor default-originate............................................................................................................... 373 neighbor description.........................................................................................................................373 neighbor distribute-list..................................................................................................................... 374 neighbor ebgp-multihop.........................................................
show ip bgp paths community........................................................................................................ 420 show ip bgp peer-group...................................................................................................................421 show ip bgp regexp.......................................................................................................................... 423 show ip bgp summary.......................................................................
show ipv6 protocol-queue-mapping.............................................................................................. 452 show mac protocol-queue-mapping..............................................................................................453 14 u-Boot.............................................................................................................. 454 boot change....................................................................................................................
description........................................................................................................................................ 478 fc-map...............................................................................................................................................479 fcoe-map.......................................................................................................................................... 480 fcoe priority-bits......................................
hardware-address....................................................................................................................... 520 host..............................................................................................................................................520 lease............................................................................................................................................. 521 netbios-name-server....................................................
17 Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP)..................................................................... 539 ecmp-group......................................................................................................................................539 hash-algorithm................................................................................................................................. 540 hash-algorithm ecmp............................................................................................
show fip-snooping config................................................................................................................ 575 show fip-snooping enode................................................................................................................ 575 show fip-snooping fcf...................................................................................................................... 576 show fip-snooping sessions.............................................................
ip igmp query-interval...................................................................................................................... 607 ip igmp query-max-resp-time.........................................................................................................608 ip igmp snooping enable................................................................................................................. 608 ip igmp snooping fast-leave...............................................................
show interfaces...........................................................................................................................644 show interfaces configured........................................................................................................648 show interfaces dampening.......................................................................................................648 show interfaces description.............................................................................
speed (for 1000/10000 interfaces)............................................................................................ 687 stack-unit port-group port mode ethernet...............................................................................688 vlan tagged (CMC)...................................................................................................................... 689 vlan untagged (CMC)....................................................................................................
show ip fib stack-unit........................................................................................................................722 show ip interface...............................................................................................................................724 show ip management-route............................................................................................................ 726 show ip multicast-cam stack-unit.................................................
ipv6 name-server.............................................................................................................................. 761 ipv6 nd dad attempts........................................................................................................................ 762 ipv6 nd dns-server............................................................................................................................ 763 ipv6 nd prefix...........................................................
clear ip bgp as-number...............................................................................................................795 clear ip bgp ipv6-address........................................................................................................... 796 clear ip bgp peer-group..............................................................................................................797 clear ip bgp ipv6 dampening..........................................................................
neighbor weight..........................................................................................................................825 network....................................................................................................................................... 826 network backdoor.......................................................................................................................827 redistribute.........................................................................
neighbor default-originate......................................................................................................... 855 neighbor distribute-list............................................................................................................... 856 neighbor filter-list....................................................................................................................... 856 neighbor maximum-prefix.....................................................................
clns host............................................................................................................................................888 debug isis.......................................................................................................................................... 888 debug isis adj-packets......................................................................................................................889 debug isis local-updates......................................
maximum-paths................................................................................................................................ 917 metric-style....................................................................................................................................... 918 multi-topology.................................................................................................................................. 919 net..............................................................
clear mac-address-table dynamic............................................................................................. 954 mac-address-table aging-time.................................................................................................. 955 mac-address-table static............................................................................................................955 mac-address-table station-move refresh-arp..........................................................................
advertise med location-identification........................................................................................986 advertise med power-via-mdi....................................................................................................987 advertise med softphone-voice................................................................................................. 987 advertise med streaming-video............................................................................................
name................................................................................................................................................ 1015 protocol spanning-tree mstp......................................................................................................... 1015 revision............................................................................................................................................ 1016 show config.......................................................
show qos dcb-map.........................................................................................................................1052 show running-config fcoe-map.................................................................................................... 1053 42 Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3).................................... 1054 OSPFv2 Commands........................................................................................................................
redistribute......................................................................................................................................1080 redistribute bgp............................................................................................................................... 1081 redistribute isis................................................................................................................................ 1082 router-id....................................................
ipv6 ospf dead-interval................................................................................................................... 1129 ipv6 ospf encryption....................................................................................................................... 1130 ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject......................................................................................... 1131 ipv6 ospf hello-interval................................................................
ip pim sparse-mode........................................................................................................................ 1163 ip pim sparse-mode sg-expiry-timer............................................................................................. 1163 ip pim spt-threshold........................................................................................................................1164 no ip pim snooping dr-flood...............................................................
46 Private VLAN (PVLAN)..................................................................................1196 ip local-proxy-arp............................................................................................................................1197 private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan........................................................................................... 1198 private-vlan mode..........................................................................................................
match ip access-group............................................................................................................. 1231 match ip vlan............................................................................................................................. 1232 match ip vrf................................................................................................................................1232 description............................................................................
49 Routing Information Protocol (RIP)......................................................... 1265 auto-summary................................................................................................................................ 1265 clear ip rip........................................................................................................................................1265 debug ip rip.....................................................................................................
show rmon statistics.......................................................................................................................1294 51 Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)...................................................... 1297 bridge-priority................................................................................................................................. 1297 debug spanning-tree rstp...............................................................................................
exec-banner.............................................................................................................................. 1326 access-class...............................................................................................................................1327 enable password........................................................................................................................1327 enable restricted....................................................................
ip ssh password-authentication................................................................................................1357 ip ssh rhostsfile.......................................................................................................................... 1357 ip ssh rekey ............................................................................................................................... 1358 ip ssh rsa-authentication (Config)........................................................
debug protocol-tunnel...................................................................................................................1386 protocol-tunnel.............................................................................................................................. 1387 protocol-tunnel destination-mac..................................................................................................1388 protocol-tunnel enable....................................................................
logging on........................................................................................................................................1421 logging source-interface................................................................................................................ 1421 logging synchronous...................................................................................................................... 1422 logging trap................................................................
disable............................................................................................................................................. 1449 forward-delay................................................................................................................................. 1449 hello-time....................................................................................................................................... 1450 max-age....................................................
boot selection................................................................................................................................. 1482 boot show net config retries..........................................................................................................1483 boot write net config retries...........................................................................................................1483 boot zero..........................................................................
show interface dei-mark................................................................................................................ 1508 vlan-stack access............................................................................................................................1508 vlan-stack compatible.................................................................................................................... 1509 vlan-stack dot1p-mapping..........................................................
preempt........................................................................................................................................... 1539 priority............................................................................................................................................. 1539 show config.................................................................................................................................... 1540 show vrrp...............................................
hardware watchdog........................................................................................................................ 1578 online stack-unit............................................................................................................................. 1578 offline stack-unit............................................................................................................................. 1579 show diag...............................................................
1 About this Guide This book provides information about the Dell Networking OS command line interface (CLI) on the Dell PowerEdge FN I/O Module. This book also includes information about the protocols and features found in the Dell Networking OS and on the Dell Networking systems supported by the Dell Networking OS.
Audience This book is intended for system administrators who are responsible for configuring or maintaining networks. This guide assumes that you are knowledgeable in Layer 2 and Layer 3 networking technologies. Conventions This book uses the following conventions to describe command syntax. Keyword Keywords are in Courier font and must be entered in the CLI as listed. parameter Parameters are in italics and require a number or word to be entered in the CLI.
2 Before You Start By following the instructions in the Dell PowerEdge FN I/O Module Getting Started Guide that is shipped with the product, you install the FN I/O Module in a Dell PowerEdge FX2 server chassis. The Aggregator installs with zero-touch configuration. After you power it on, an Aggregator boots up with default settings and auto-configures with software features enabled. This chapter describes the default settings and software features that are automatically configured at startup.
• VLAN (vlan1) and IP address for in-band management (DHCP-assigned) • IP address for out-of-band (OOB) management (DHCP-assigned) • Read-only SNMP community name (public) • Broadcast storm control (enabled) • Unregistered Multicast Packets flooding (enabled) • IGMP snooping in all VLANs except the default VLAN (enabled) • VLAN configuration (all ports belong to all VLANs) You can change any of these default settings using the CLI. Refer to the appropriate chapter for details.
FCoE Connectivity Many data centers use Fibre Channel (FC) in storage area networks (SANs). Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) encapsulates Fibre Channel frames over Ethernet networks. On an Aggregator, the internal ports support FCoE connectivity and connect to the converged network adapter (CNA) in blade servers. FCoE allows Fibre Channel to use 10-Gigabit Ethernet networks while preserving the Fibre Channel protocol. The Aggregator also provides zero-touch configuration for FCoE configuration.
NOTE: If installed servers do not have connectivity to a ToR switch, check the Link Status LED of uplink ports on the Aggregator. If all LEDs are ON, check the LACP configuration on the ToR switch that is connected to the Aggregator to ensure the LACP is correctly configured. VLANs By default, all Aggregator ports belong to all 4094 VLANs and are members of untagged VLAN 1. You can use the CLI or CMC interface to configure only the required VLANs on a port.
Aggregator ports that you manually configured for VLAN membership in stacking mode retain their VLAN configuration in standalone mode. To restore the default auto-VLAN mode of operation (in which all ports are members of all 4094 VLANs) on a port, enter the auto vlan command: Dell(conf)# interface tengigabitethernet 0/2 Dell(conf-if-te-0/2)# auto vlan The auto vlan command is applicable only in Standalone mode. To get the default standalone mode configurations: • Restore to factory default settings.
CLI Basics 3 This chapter describes the command line interface (CLI) structure and command modes. The Dell operating system commands are in a text-based interface that allows you to use the launch commands, change command modes, and configure interfaces and protocols. Accessing the Command Line When the system boots successfully, you are positioned on the command line in EXEC mode and not prompted to log in. You can access the commands through a serial console port or a Telnet session.
User "Irene" on line vty3 ( 123.12.1.321 ) Dell#conf When another user enters CONFIGURATION mode, the Dell Networking OS sends a message similar to the following: % Warning: User "admin" on line vty2 "172.16.1.210" is in configuration In this case, the user is “admin” on vty2. Navigating the CLI The Dell Networking OS displays a CLI prompt comprised of the host name and CLI mode. • Host name is the initial part of the prompt and is “Dell” by default. You can change the host name with the hostname command.
Obtaining Help As soon as you are in a command mode there are several ways to access help. To obtain a list of keywords at any command mode: Type a ? at the prompt or after a keyword. There must always be a space before the ?. To obtain a list of keywords with a brief functional description: Type help at the prompt. To obtain a list of available options: Type a keyword and then type a space and a ?.
Key Combination Action CNTL-N Returns to the more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands with Ctrl-P or the up Arrow key. CNTL-P Recalls commands, beginning with the last command. CNTL-U Deletes the line. CNTL-W Deletes the previous word. CNTL-X Deletes the line. CNTL-Z Comes back to EXEC mode from any CONFIGURATION mode. Esc B Moves the cursor back one word. Esc F Moves the cursor forward one word.
NOTE: The Dell Networking OS accepts a space before or after the pipe, no space before or after the pipe, or any combination. For example: Dell#command | grep TenGig|except regularexpression | find regular-expression. except displays only the text that does not match the pattern (or regular expression) find searches for the first occurrence of a pattern grep displays text that matches a pattern.
EXEC Privilege Mode The enable command accesses EXEC Privilege mode. If an administrator has configured an “Enable” password, you are prompted to enter it. EXEC Privilege mode allows you to access all the commands accessible in EXEC mode, plus other commands, such as to clear address resolution protocol (ARP) entries and IP addresses. In addition, you can access CONFIGURATION mode to configure interfaces, routes and protocols on the switch.
2. Enter the line command. Include the keywords console or vty and their line number available on the switch. The prompt changes to include (config-line-console) or (config-line-vty). You can exit this mode by using the exit command. MONITOR SESSION Mode In CONFIGURATION mode, use the monitor session command to enter MONITOR SESSION mode and configure port monitoring. To enter MONITOR SESSION mode: 1. Verify that you are logged in to CONFIGURATION mode. 2. Use the monitor session command.
Configuring Login Activity Tracking To enable and configure login activity tracking, follow these steps: 1. Enable login activity tracking. CONFIGURATION mode login statistics enable After enabling login statistics, the system stores the login activity details for the last 30 days. 2. (Optional) Configure the number of days for which the system stores the user login statistics. The range is from 1 to 30.
Unsuccessful login attempt(s) since the last successful login: 0 Unsuccessful login attempt(s) in last 7 day(s): 3 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------User: secadm Last login time: Mon Feb 16 04:45:29 2015 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.14.1.
Example of Configuring Concurrent Session Limit The following example limits the permitted number of concurrent login sessions to 4. Dell(config)#login concurrent-session limit 4 Enabling the System to Clear Existing Sessions To enable the system to clear existing login sessions, follow this procedure: • Use the following command.
File Management 4 This chapter contains commands needed to manage the configuration files and includes other file management commands. boot system gateway Specify the IP address of the default next-hop gateway for the management subnet. Syntax Parameters boot system gateway ip-address ip-address Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format. Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.
primary Enter the keyword primary to set the primary image path for the system. secondary Enter the keyword secondary to set the secondary image path for the system. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O aggregator. Usage Information The system first attempts to load the image from the primary path.
copy Copy one file to another location. The Dell Networking OS supports IPv4 addressing for FTP, TFTP, and SCP (in the hostip field). Syntax Parameters copy source-file-url destination-file-url file-url Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter the following location keywords and information: • To copy a file from the internal FLASH, enter flash:// then the filename. • To copy the running configuration, enter the keywords running-config.
configuration changes made because the system was started) to the startup configuration file, Dell Networking OS creates a backup file on the internal flash of the startup configuration. The Dell Networking OS supports copying the running-configuration to a TFTP server or to an FTP server: • copy running-config tftp: • copy running-config ftp: NOTE: Dell Networking OS imposes a length limit on the password you create for accessing the FTP server. Your password can be no longer than 32 characters.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command is useful for quickly making a change configuration on one chassis available on external flash to move it to another chassis. delete Delete a file from the flash. After deletion, files cannot be restored.
Parameters filename | directory name: Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following: • For a file or directory on the internal Flash, enter flash:// then the filename or directory name. • For a file or directory on an external USB drive, enter usbflash:// then the filename or directory name. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information You must include the colon (:) when entering this command. CAUTION: This command deletes all files, including the startup configuration file. So, after executing this command, consider saving the running config as the startup config (use the write memory command or copy run start command).
Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.1) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Example copy http://admin:admin123@10.16.206.77/sample_file flash:// sample_file Related Commands copy ftp:flash Copy files from FTP server to switch logging coredump stack-unit Enable the coredump.
Parameters {ipv4-address } Enter the server IPv4 address (A.B.C.D). name Enter a username to access the target server. type Enter the password type: password • Enter 0 to enter an unencrypted password. • Enter 7 to enter a password that has already been encrypted using a Type 7 hashing algorithm. Enter a password to access the target server. Defaults Crash kernel files are uploaded to flash by default. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Example Dell#pwd flash: Dell# Related Commands cd – changes the directory. rename Rename a file in the local file system. Syntax Parameters rename url url url Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter the following keywords and a filename: • For a file on the internal Flash, enter flash:// then the filename. • For a file on an external USB drive, enter usbflash:// then the filename. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
nvram Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter the keyword nvram to reset the NvRAM only. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information Restoring factory defaults deletes the existing startup configuration and all persistent settings (stacking, fanout, and so forth).
immediately.* *Proceed with caution ! * ************************************************** Proceed with factory settings? Confirm [yes/no]:yes -- Restore status -Unit Nvram Config -----------------------0 Success 1 Success 2 Success 3 Not present 4 Not present 5 Not present Power-cycling the unit(s).
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Dell#show boot system stack-unit all Current system image information in the system: ============================================= Type Boot Type A B --------------------------------------------Stack-unit 0 is not present. Stack-unit 1 DOWNLOAD BOOT 9-1-0-218 9-1-0-202 Stack-unit 2 is not present. Stack-unit 3 is not present.
hostname FTOS --More-Dell# Related Commands format flash — erases all the existing files and reformats the filesystem in the internal flash memory. show file-systems — displays information about the file systems on the system. show file-systems Displays information about the file systems on the system. Syntax show file-systems Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Command Fields Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
Field Description • Prefixes Related Commands w = write access Displays the name of the storage location. format flash – erases all the existing files and reformats the filesystem in the internal flash memory. show file – displays the contents of a text file in the local filesystem. show os-version Displays the release and software image version information of the image file specified.
-------------------------------------------------------------Platform Version Size ReleaseTime IOM-Series: XL 8-3-17-38 31603078 Jul 19 2012 06:02:28 TARGET IMAGE INFORMATION : -------------------------------------------------------------Type Version Target checksum runtime 8-3-17-38 Control Processor passed CPLD IMAGE INFORMATION : -------------------------------------------------------------Card CPLD Name Version Stack-unit 1 IOM SYSTEM CPLD 6 Dell# show running-config Displays the current configuration
configured (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword configured to display line card interfaces with non-default configurations only. status (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword status to display the checksum for the running configuration and the start-up configuration. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Command Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#show startup-config ! Version E8-3-16-29 ! Last configuration change at Thu Apr 26 19:19:02 2012 by default ! Startup-config last updated at Thu Apr 26 19:19:04 2012 by default ! boot system stack-unit 0 primary system: A: boot system stack-unit 0 secondary tftp://10.11.200.241/ dt-m1000e-5-c2 boot system gateway 10.11.209.
Build Time: Thu Jul 19 05:59:59 PDT 2012 Build Path: /sites/sjc/work/swsystems01-2/ravisubramani/ ravis-8317/SW/SRC/ Cp_src/Tacacs FTOS uptime is 4 day(s), 4 hour(s), 3 minute(s) System image file is "dv-m1000e-2-b2" System Type: I/OAggregator Control Processor: MIPS RMI XLP with 2147483648 bytes of memory. 256M bytes of boot flash memory. 1 34-port GE/TE (XL) 56 Ten GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s) Command Fields File Management Lines Beginning With Description Dell Force10 Network...
upgrade boot Upgrade the bootflash image or bootselector image. Syntax Parameters upgrade boot {all | bootflash-image | bootselector-image} stack-unit {0-5 | all} {booted | flash: |ftp: | tftp: | usbflash:} (A: | B:} all Enter the keyword all to change both the bootflash and bootselecter images. bootflash-image Enter the keywords bootflash-image to change the bootflash image. bootselectorimage Enter the keywords bootselector-image to change the bootselector image.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information You must reload the Dell Networking OS after executing this command. Example Dell#upgrade boot ? all Upgrade both boot flash image and selector image bootflash-image Upgrade boot flash image bootselector-image Upgrade boot selector image Dell# upgrade system Upgrade the bootflash image or system image.
usbflash After entering the keyword usbflash you can either follow it with the location of the source file in this form:// filepath, or press Enter to launch a prompt sequence. A: Enter this keyword to upgrade the bootflash partition A. B: Enter this keyword to upgrade the bootflash partition B. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.
sha256 Enter the sha256 keyword to use the SHA256 Secure Hash Algorithm flash:// (Optional). Enter the flash:// keyword. The default is to use the flash drive. You can just enter the image file name. img-file Enter the name the Dell Networking software image file to validate. hash-value (Optional). Enter the relevant hash published on i-Support. Defaults flash drive Command Modes EXEC mode Command History Version Description 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL.
5 Control and Monitoring This chapter describes control and monitoring for the I/O Aggregator. asf-mode Enable alternate store and forward (ASF) mode and forward packets as soon as a threshold is reached. Syntax asf-mode stack-unit {unit-id | all} queue size To return to standard Store and Forward mode, use the no asf-mode stack unit command. Parameters unit-id Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset. The range is from 0 to 5 or all.
To remove the asset tag, use the no stack-unit unit-id Asset-tag ID command. Parameters stack-unit unit-id Enter the keywords stack-unit then the unit-id to assign a tag to the specific member. The range is from 0 to 5. Asset-tag ID Enter a unique asset-tag ID to assign to the stack member. This option accepts a maximum of 10 characters, including all special characters except double quotes. To include a space in the asset-tag, enter a space within double quotes. Defaults No asset-tag is assigned.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Optionally, use the banner exec command to create a text string that displays when you accesses EXEC mode. The exec-banner command toggles that display. Example Dell(conf)#banner exec ? LINE c banner-text(max length 255) c, where 'c' is a delimiting character Dell(conf)#banner exec % Enter TEXT message. End with the character '%'.
Parameters keyboardinteractive Enter the keyword keyboard-interactive to require a carriage return (CR) to get the message banner prompt. acknowledgemen t Enter the acknowledgement keyword to require a positive acknowledgement from the user while logging in to the system. c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner. The delineator is a percent character (%). line Enter a text string for your text banner message ending the message with your delineator.
Related Commands banner motd — sets a Message of the Day banner. exec-banner — enables the display of a text string when you enter EXEC mode. banner motd Set a message of the day (MOTD) banner. Syntax banner motd c line c Parameters c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner. The delineator is a percent character (%). line Enter a text string for your message of the day banner message ending the message with your delineator. The delineator is a percent character (%).
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command clears alarms that are no longer active. If an alarm situation is still active, it is seen in the system output. clear command history Clear the command history log.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. configure Enter CONFIGURATION mode from EXEC Privilege mode. Syntax Parameters configure [terminal] terminal Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword terminal to specify that you are configuring from the terminal. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the IOM. 9.4(0.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command enables (and disables) the collection of CPU traffic statistics from the time this command is executed (not from system boot). However, excessive traffic a CPU receives automatically triggers (turn on) the collection of CPU traffic statics. To view the traffic statistics, use the show cpu-traffic-stats command. If the CPU receives excessive traffic, traffic is rate controlled.
debug ftpserver View transactions during an FTP session when a user is logged into the FTP server. Syntax debug ftpserver Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. disable Return to EXEC mode.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History none • CONFIGURATION • INTERFACE All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information Users entering EXEC Privilege mode or any other configured privilege level can access configuration commands. To protect against unauthorized access, use the enable password command to configure a password for the enable command at a specific privilege level.
To disable optical power information updates, use the no enable opticalinfo-update interval command. Parameters interval seconds Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keyword interval then the polling interval in seconds. The range is from 120 to 6000 seconds. The default is 300 seconds (5 minutes). Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Replaces the enable xfp-power-updates command.
Supported Modes Command History Related Commands • LINE • INTERFACE • MONITOR SESSION • PROTOCOL LLDP All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. exit— returns to the lower command mode. exec-timeout Set a time interval that the system waits for input on a line before disconnecting the session.
Example Dell con0 is now available Press RETURN to get started. Dell> exit Return to the lower command mode. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Related Commands exit • EXEC Privilege • CONFIGURATION • LINE • INTERFACE • PROTOCOL LLDP All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. end — returns to EXEC Privilege mode.
Command History Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator, the FN IOM and MXL. Usage Information If you use the feature unique-name command, the system generates a host name using the platform type and system serial number. It overwrites any existing host name configured on the system using the hostname command. The feature unique-name command is also added to the running configuration.
size date time name -------- ------ ------ -------512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 tgtimg 512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 diagnostic 512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 other 512 Jul-20-2004 18:15:00 tgt 226 Transfer complete 329 bytes received in 0.018 seconds (17.95 Kbytes/s) ftp> Related Commands ftp-server topdir— sets the directory to be used for incoming FTP connections. ftp-server username— sets a username and password for incoming FTP connections.
ftp-server username Create a user name and associated password for incoming FTP server sessions. Syntax Parameters ftp-server username username password [encryption-type] password username Enter a text string up to 40 characters long as the user name. password password Enter the keyword password then a string up to 40 characters long as the password. Without specifying an encryption type, the password is unencrypted.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The host name is used in the prompt. Related Commands feature unique-name ip ftp password Specify a password for outgoing FTP connections. Syntax Parameters ip ftp password [encryption-type] password encryption-type password Defaults Not configured.
ip ftp source-interface Specify an interface’s IP address as the source IP address for FTP connections. Syntax Parameters ip ftp source-interface interface interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For Loopback interfaces, enter the keyword loopback then a number from zero (0) to 16383. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. ip telnet source-interface Set an interface’s IP address as the source address in outgoing packets for Telnet sessions. Syntax Parameters ip telnet source-interface interface interface Enter the following keyword and slot/port or number information: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information.
Parameters username Enter a text string as the user name up to 40 characters long. Defaults No user name is configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Configure a password with the ip ftp password command. Related Commands ip ftp password — sets the password for FTP connections.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information You cannot delete a terminal connection. Related Commands show memory— View current memory usage on the M I/O Aggregator. login concurrent-session Configures the limit of concurrent sessions for all users on console and virtual terminal lines.
If the login concurrent-session clear-line enable command is configured, you are provided with an option to clear any of your existing sessions after a successful login authentication. When you reach the maximum concurrent session limit, you can still login by clearing any of your existing sessions.
login statistics Enable and configure user login statistics on console and virtual terminal lines. Syntax login statistics {enable | time-period days} no login statistics {enable | time-period days} Parameters enable Enables user login statistics. By default, the system displays the login statistics for the last 30 days. time-period days Sets the number of days for which the system stores the user login statistics. The range is from 1 to 30.
There were 3 unsuccessful login attempt(s) for user admin in last 30 day(s). The preceding message shows that the user had previously logged in to the system using the VTY line from 10.14.1.97. It also displays the number of unsuccessful login attempts since the last login and the number of unsuccessful login attempts in the last 30 days. $ telnet 10.11.178.14 Trying 10.11.178.14... Connected to 10.11.178.14. Escape character is '^]'.
show login statistics Displays login statistics of users who have used the console or virtual terminal lines to log in to the system. Syntax Parameters show login statistics [all | [[successful-attempts | unsuccessfulattempts] [user login-id] [time-period days]] | user login-id] all (Optional)Displays the login statistics of all users in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period. time-period days (Optional)Displays the number of failed login attempts by the current user in the specified period.
To view the successful and failed login details of a specific user in the last 30 days or the custom defined time period, use the show login statistics user user-id command. If you have system or security administrator rights, you can view the login statistics of other users. If you do not have system or security administrator rights, you can view your login statistics but not the login statistics of others. NOTE: By default, these commands display the details for the last 30 days.
Unsuccessful login attempt(s) in last 30 day(s): 3 Successful login attempt(s) in last 30 day(s): 2 The following is sample output of the show login statistics user user-id command. Dell# show login statistics user admin -----------------------------------------------------------------User: admin Last login time: 12:52:01 UTC Tue Mar 22 2016 Last login location: Line vty0 ( 10.16.127.
show software ifm Display interface management (IFM) data. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example 116 show software ifm {clients [summary] | ifagt number | ifcb interface | stack-unit unit-ID | trace-flags} clients Enter the keyword clients to display IFM client information. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display brief information about IFM clients.
OSPF 0 0x00000dfa 0x00100338 0x00000000 0x00000000 0 PIM 0 0x000e00f3 0x0000c000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0 IGMP 0 0x000e027f 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0 SNMP 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x8000c2c0 0x00000002 21 EVTTERM 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x800002c0 0x0003c000 20 MRTM 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x81f7103f 0xc0600000 30 DSM 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x80771033 0x00000000 58 Mirror 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x80770003 0x00000000 25 LACP 0 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x8000383f 0x01000000 33 SFL_CP 0 0x00000000 0x0000
Reply Reply Reply :: Reply Reply Reply Dell# to request 1 from 172.31.1.208 0 ms to request 1 from 172.31.1.216 0 ms to request 1 from 172.31.1.205 16 ms to request 5 from 172.31.1.209 0 ms to request 5 from 172.31.1.66 0 ms to request 5 from 172.31.1.87 0 ms reload Reboot the Dell Networking OS. Syntax reload Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.
localtime (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword localtime to include the localtime in the timestamp. msec (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword msec to include milliseconds in the timestamp. show-timezone (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword show-timezone to include the time zone information in the timestamp. uptime (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword uptime to have the timestamp based on time elapsed since system reboot. Defaults Not configured.
Alarm Type Duration -------------------------No minor alarms -- Major Alarms -Alarm Type Duration ------------------------No major alarms Dell# Dell# show alarms threshold -- Temperature Limits (deg C) ----------------------------------------Ingress-Air Off Ingress-Air Major Off Major Shutdown Unit0 58 61 84 86 90 Dell# show command-history Display a buffered log of all commands all users enter along with a time stamp.
[4/20 10:27:24]: CMD-(CLI):[logging 10.1.2.4]by default from console [4/20 10:27:24]: CMD-(CLI):[logging 172.31.1.4]by default from console [4/20 10:27:24]: CMD-(CLI):[logging 133.33.33.4]by default from console [4/20 10:27:24]: CMD-(CLI):[management route 172.16.1.0 /24 10.11.209.
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The type may be auto, manual, or rollback. When set to auto, Dell Networking OS automatically denies access to CONFIGURATION mode to all other users every time the user on the listed VTY line enters CONFIGURATION mode.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information Traffic statistics are sorted on a per-interface basis; the interface receiving the most traffic is displayed first. All CPU and port information is displayed unless a specific port or CPU is specified. Traffic information is displayed for router ports only; not for management interfaces.
DHCP debugging is on Dell# show diag Display the diagnostics information. Syntax Parameters show diag {information | stack-unit number [detail | summary]] | testcase} information Enter the keyword information to view current diagnostics information in the system. stack-unit unit-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords stack-unit then the unitid to display information on a specific stack member. The range is from 0 to 5. detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view detailed diagnostics information.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example (all) stack-unit unit-id Enter the keywords stack-unit then the unit-id to display information on a specific stack member. The range is from 0 to 5. thermal sensor Enter the keywords thermal-sensor to view all components. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
show inventory Display the switch type, components (including media), and Dell Networking OS version including hardware identification numbers and configured protocols. Syntax Parameters show inventory [media slot] media slot Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes All Modes Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword media then the stack ID of the stack member you want to display pluggable media inventory. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
show memory Display current memory usage on the M I/O Aggregator. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show memory [stack-unit 0–5] stack-unit 0–5 • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords stack-unit then the stack unit ID of the stack member to display memory information on the designated stack member. All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.
As an option of the show processes cpu command, this option displays CPU usage for the designated stack member. Or, as an option of memory, this option limits the output of memory statistics to the designated stack member. Refer to Example (stack-unit). summary Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary view CPU utilization of processes related to line card processing. Refer to Example (summary).
0x76381000 658850 0x76299000 80110 0x763c3000 0 --More-Related Commands 65885 8011 0 10000 0.00% 0.17% 0.08% 0 PM 10000 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 diagagt 0 0.00% 0.00% 0.00% 0 evagt show diag — displays the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the designated component of the designated stack member. show hardware system-flow — displays Layer 3 ACL or QoS data for the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe.
Field Description Cur Len Current number of messages enqueued High Mark Highest number of packets in the queue at any time #of to / Timeout Timeout count #of Retr /Retries Number of retransmissions #msg Sent/Msg Sent/ Number of messages sent #msg Ackd/Ack Rcvd Number of messages acknowledged Retr /Available Retra Number of retries left Total/ Max Retra Number of retries allowed Important Points: Example • The SWP provides flow control-based reliable communication between the sending and
show processes memory Display memory usage information based on processes running in the system. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show processes memory {management-unit | stack unit {0–5 | all | summary}} management-unit Enter the keywords management-unit for CPU memory usage of the stack management unit. stack unit 0–5 Enter the keywords stack unit then a stack unit ID of the member unit for which to display memory usage on the forwarding processor.
Field Description Allocs Total dynamic memory allocated Frees Total dynamic memory freed Max Maximum dynamic memory allocated Current Current dynamic memory in use The output for the show process memory command displays the memory usage statistics running on CP part (sysd) of the system. The sysd is an aggregate task that handles all the tasks running on the M I/O Aggregator’s CP.
318 frrp 218 xstp 21858 277 pim 62168 --More-- 7192576 9445376 180224 71086 2740224 21858 66256 0 21394 21858 7585792 1007616 62168 0 62168 4830 show revision Displays the revision numbers of all stack-units. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example (Command) show revision • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Example (brief Command) Dell#show server-interfaces brief ---------------- show server ports brief --------------------Interface OK Status Protocol Description TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 NO up down TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 NO up down TenGigabitEthernet 1/3 NO up down TenGigabitEthernet 1/4 NO up down TenGigabitEthernet 1/5 YES up up TenGigabitEthernet 1/6 NO up down TenGigabitEthernet 1/7 NO up down TenGigabitEthernet 1/8 NO up down TenGigabitEthernet 1/9 NO up down TenGigabitEthernet 1/10 NO up down TenGigabitE
Current address is 00:1e:c9:f1:00:99 Server Port AdminState is N/A Pluggable media not present Interface index is 34411265 Internet address is not set Mode of IP Address Assignment : NONE DHCP Client-ID :tenG131001ec9f10099 --More-- show system Displays the current status of all stack members or a specific stack member.
Next Boot : online Required Type : I/O-Aggregator - 34-port GE/TE (XL) Current Type : I/O-Aggregator - 34-port GE/TE (XL) Master priority : 0 Hardware Rev : 01 Num Ports : 56 Up Time : 4 day, 7 hr, 9 min FTOS Version : 8-3-17-38 Jumbo Capable : yes POE Capable : no Boot Flash : A: 4.0.1.0bt [booted] B: 4.0.1.0bt1 Boot Selector : 4.0.0.
show tech-support Displays a collection of data from other show commands, necessary for Dell Networking technical support to perform troubleshooting on Aggregators. Syntax Parameters show tech-support [stack-unit unit-id | page] stack-unit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword stack-unit to view CPU memory usage for the stack member designated by unit-id. The range is 0 to 5. page (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword page to view 24 lines of text at a time. Press the SPACE BAR to view the next 24 lines.
• show clock • show environment • show file • show interfaces • show inventory • show processes cpu • show processes memory • show running-conf • show version Example (save) Dell#show tech-support ? page Page through output stack-unit Unit Number | Pipe through a command Dell#show tech-support stack-unit 1 ? page Page through output | Pipe through a command Dell#show tech-support stack-unit 1 | ? except S how only text that does not match a pattern find Search for the first occu
Build Time: Thu Jul 19 05:59:59 PDT 2012 Build Path: /sites/sjc/work/swsystems01-2/ravisubramani/ ravis-8317/SW/SRC/Cp_src/ Tacacs FTOS uptime is 4 day(s), 7 hour(s), 14 minute(s) System image file is "dv-m1000e-2-b2" System Type: I/O-Aggregator Control Processor: MIPS RMI XLP with 2147483648 bytes of memory. 256M bytes of boot flash memory. 1 34-port GE/TE (XL) 56 Ten GigabitEthernet/IEEE 802.3 interface(s) ------------------------------------ show clock ------------------------------17:49:37.
Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History brief Enter the keyword brief to display a brief summary of the uplink port information. detail Enter the keyword detail to display uplink port information with description. • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Flowcontrol rx on tx off ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 2d19h53m Queueing strategy: fifo Input Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts --More-- show util-threshold cpu Displays the set CPU utilization threshold values.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command displays all memory utilization thresholds of the management, standby, and stack-units. ssh-peer-stack-unit Open an SSH connection to the peer stack-unit. Syntax Parameters ssh-peer-stack-unit [-| username] -| username (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword -| followed by your username. Default: The username associated with the terminal.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History ip-address Enter the IPv4 address in dotted decimal format of the server. source-interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords /source-interface then the interface information to include the source interface. Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
terminal length Configure the number of lines displayed on the terminal screen. Syntax terminal length screen-length To return to the default values, use the no terminal length command. Parameters screen-length Enter a number of lines. Entering zero will cause the terminal to display without pausing. The range is from 0 to 512. Default: 24 lines Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History 24 lines • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. terminal xml Enable XML mode in Telnet and SSH client sessions. Syntax terminal xml To exit the XML mode, use the no terminal monitor command. Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Disabled • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.
• Supported Modes EXEC Privilege All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
virtual-ip Configure a virtual IP address for the active management interface. You can configure virtual addresses both for IPv4 independently. Syntax Parameters virtual-ip {ipv4-address} ipv4-address Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the IP address of the active management interface in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Supported Modes Command History All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The write memory command saves the running-configuration to the file labeled startup-configuration.
6 802.1X An authentication server must authenticate a client connected to an 802.1X switch port. Until the authentication, only extensible authentication protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic is allowed through the port to which a client is connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic passes through the port. The Dell Networking operating software supports remote authentication dial-in service (RADIUS) and active directory environments using 802.1X Port Authentication.
Parameters all Enable all 802.1X debug messages. auth-pae-fsm Enable authentication PAE FSM debug messages. backend-fsm Enable backend FSM debug messages. eapol-pdu Enable the EAPOL frame trace and related debug messages. interface interface Restricts the debugging information to an interface. Defaults Disabled Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
To disable dot1x on an interface, use the no dot1x authentication command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dot1x authentication (Configuration) — Enable dot1x globally. dot1x auth-fail-vlan Configure an authentication failure VLAN for users and devices that fail 802.1X authentication.
After the authentication VLAN is assigned, the port-state must be toggled to restart authentication. Authentication occurs at the next reauthentication interval (dot1x reauthentication). Related Commands • dot1x port-control — Enables port control on an interface. • dot1x guest-vlan — Configures a guest VLAN for limited access users or for devices that are not 802.1X capable. • show dot1x interface — Displays the 802.1X configuration of an interface.
• Enable 802.1X authentication globally on the switch and on the port (the dot1x authentication command). • Enable MAC authentication bypass on the port (the dot1x mac-auth-bypass command). In MAB-only authentication mode, a port authenticates using the host MAC address even though 802.1xauthentication is enabled. If the MAB-only authentication fails, the host is placed in the guest VLAN (if configured). To disable MAB-only authentication on a port, enter the no dot1x auth-type mab-only command.
NOTE: You can create the Layer 3 portion of a guest VLAN and authentication fail VLANs regardless if the VLAN is assigned to an interface or not. After an interface is assigned a guest VLAN (which has an IP address), routing through the guest VLAN is the same as any other traffic. However, the interface may join/leave a VLAN dynamically. Related Commands • dot1x auth-fail-vlan — Configures an authentication failure VLAN. • dot1x reauthentication — Enables periodic re-authentication of the client.
dot1x mac-auth-bypass Enable MAC authentication bypass. If 802.1X times out because the host did not respond to the Identity Request frame, the system attempts to authenticate the host based on its MAC address. Syntax dot1x mac-auth-bypass To disable MAC authentication bypass on a port, use the no dot1x mac-authbypass command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
dot1x max-supplicants Restrict the number of supplicants that can be authenticated and permitted to access the network through the port. This configuration is only takes effect in Multi-Auth mode. Syntax Parameters dot1x max-supplicants number number Enter the number of supplicants that can be authenticated on a single port in Multi-Auth mode. The range is from 1 to 128. The default is 128. Defaults 128 hosts can be authenticated on a single authenticator port.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The authenticator completes authentication only when port-control is set to auto. dot1x quiet-period Set the number of seconds that the authenticator remains quiet after a failed authentication with a client. Syntax dot1x quiet-period seconds To disable quiet time, use the no dot1x quiet-time command.
Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dot1x reauth-max Configure the maximum number of times a port can reauthenticate before the port becomes unauthorized. Syntax dot1x reauth-max number To return to the default, use the no dot1x reauth-max command.
Defaults 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you configure the dot1x server-timeout value, take into account the communication medium used to communicate with an authentication server and the number of RADIUS servers configured.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dot1x tx-period Configure the intervals at which EAPOL PDUs the Authenticator PAE transmits. Syntax dot1x tx-period seconds To return to the default, use the no dot1x tx-period command. Parameters seconds Defaults 30 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the interval time, in seconds, that EAPOL PDUs are transmitted.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History none • EXEC • EXEC privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To display CoS mapping information only for the specified supplicant, enter a supplicant’s MAC address using the mac-address option. You can display the CoS mapping information applied to traffic from authenticated supplicants on 802.
show dot1x interface Display the 802.1X configuration of an interface. Syntax Parameters show dot1x interface interface [mac-address mac-address] interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • mac-address Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History For a Ten-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. (Optional) MAC address of a supplicant.
Host Mode: Auth PAE State: Backend State: Dell# SINGLE_HOST Authenticated Idle Dell#show dot1x interface tengigabitethernet 0/1 mac-address 00:00:00:00:00:10 Supplicant Mac: 0 0 0 0 0 10 Lookup for Mac: 802.
7 Access Control Lists (ACL) Access control lists (ACLs) are supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS).
Supported Modes Command History • CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-STANDARD • CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. remark Enter a description for an ACL entry. Syntax Parameters remark [remark-number] [description] remark-number Enter the remark number. The range is from 0 to 4294967290. NOTE: You can use the same sequence number for the remark and an ACL rule.
Example Dell(conf-std-nacl)#remark 10 Deny rest of the traffic Dell(conf-std-nacl)#remark 5 Permit traffic from XYZ Inc. Dell(conf-std-nacl)#show config ! ip access-list standard test remark 5 Permit traffic from XYZ Inc. seq 5 permit 1.1.1.0/24 remark 10 Deny rest of the traffic seq 10 Deny any Dell(conf-std-nacl)# Related Commands resequence access-list — Re-assigns sequence numbers to entries of an existing access-list.
resequence prefix-list ipv4 Re-assign sequence numbers to entries of an existing prefix list. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History resequence prefix-list ipv4 {prefix-list-name StartingSeqNum Step-to-increment} prefix-list-name Enter the name of the configured prefix list, up to 140 characters long. StartingSeqNum Enter the starting sequence number to resequence. The range is from 0 to 65535. Step-toIncrement Enter the step to increment the sequence number.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell(config-std-nacl)#show conf ! ip access-list standard test remark 5 Permit traffic from XYZ Inc. seq 5 permit 1.1.1.0/24 count remark 10 Deny traffic from ABC seq 10 deny 2.1.1.0/24 count Dell(config-std-nacl)# Common IP ACL Commands The following commands are available within both IP ACL modes (Standard and Extended) and do not have mode-specific options.
Version Description 9.8(0.0) Added the ipv4 and ipv6 parameters to the command. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you use the access-class access-list-name command without specifying the ipv4 or ipv6 attribute, both IPv4 as well as IPv6 rules that are defined in that ACL are applied to the terminal. This is a generic way of configuring access restrictions.
ip access-group Apply an egress IP ACL to an interface. Syntax Parameters ip access-group access-list-name {in | out} [implicit-permit] [vlan vlan-id] access-list-name Enter the name of a configured access list, up to 140 characters. in Enter the keyword in to apply the ACL to incoming traffic. out Enter the keyword out to apply the ACL to the outgoing traffic.
show ip access-lists Display all of the IP ACLs configured in the system, whether or not they are applied to an interface, and the count of matches/mismatches against each ACL entry displayed. Syntax Parameters show ip access-lists [access-list-name] [interface interface] [in] access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC ACL, up to 140 characters.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Usage Information • EXEC • EXEC Privilege • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip accounting access-lists Description “Extended IP...
ip access-list standard Create a standard IP access list (IP ACL) to filter based on IP address. Syntax Parameters ip access-list standard access-list-name access-list-name Enter a string up to 140 characters long as the ACL name. Defaults All IP access lists contain an implicit deny any, that is, if no match occurs, the packet is dropped. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Parameters 174 source Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the packet was sent. mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address or hostname.
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-STANDARD-ACCESS-LIST Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. 9.3(0.
seq Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an extended IP access list while creating the filter. Syntax Parameters 176 seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address}} [count [byte] [dscp value] [order] [fragments] [threshold-in-msgs [count] sequencenumber Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290. The range is from 0 to 65534. deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this condition.
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-STANDARD Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. 9.3(0.
extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands deny — configures a filter to drop packets. permit — configures a filter to forward packets. seq — assigns a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an IP access list while creating the filter.
Defaults mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
deny icmp To drop all or specific internet control message protocol (ICMP) messages, configure a filter. Syntax deny icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [dscp] [count [byte]] [order] [fragments][threshold-in-msgs] [count]] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command, if you know the filter’s sequence number.
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-EXTENDED Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added the support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.3(0.
deny tcp Configure a filter that drops transmission control protocol (TCP) packets meeting the filter criteria. Syntax deny tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [bit] [operator port [port]] {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [dscp] [bit] [operator port [port]] [count [byte] [order] [fragments] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535. The following list includes some common TCP port numbers: Defaults • 23 = Telnet • 20 and 21 = FTP • 25 = SMTP • 169 = SNMP destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Added the support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added the support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, refer to the Quality of Service chapter of the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0000111111000000 0001000000000000 0001100000000000 0001110000000000 0001111000000000 0001111100000000 0001111101000000 1111111111000000 1111100000000000 1111110000000000 1111111000000000 1111111100000000 1111111111000000 1111111111111111 4032 4096 6144 7168 7680 7936 8000 4095 6143 7167 7679 7935 7999 8000 64 2048 1024 512 256 64 1 Total Ports: 4001 Example An ACL rule with a TCP port lt 1023 uses only one entry in the CAM.
dscp Enter this keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand: • eq = equal to • neq = not equal to • gt = greater than • lt = less than • range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port command) port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Added the support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, refer to the Quality of Service chapter of the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. You can configure either count (packets) or count (bytes).
Total Ports: 1024 Related Commands deny — assigns a filter to deny IP traffic. deny tcp — assigns a filter to deny TCP traffic. ip access-list extended Name (or select) an extended IP access list (IP ACL) based on IP addresses or protocols. Syntax ip access-list extended access-list-name To delete an access list, use the no ip access-list extended accesslist-name command. Parameters access-list-name Enter a string up to 140 characters long as the access list name.
permit (for Extended IP ACLs) To pass IP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter. Syntax permit {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [count [bytes]] [dscp value] [order] [fragments] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters 190 • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands ip access-list extended — creates an extended ACL. permit tcp — assigns a permit filter for TCP packets. permit udp — assigns a permit filter for UDP packets. permit icmp Configure a filter to allow all or specific ICMP messages.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.
ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction.
• psh: push function • rst: reset the connection • syn: synchronize sequence numbers • urg: urgent field dscp Enter the keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand: port port • eq = equal to • neq = not equal to • gt = greater than • lt = less than • range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port parameter) Enter the application layer port number.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated.
When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
permit udp To pass UDP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter. Syntax permit udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [dscp] [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] [order] [fragments] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters 198 • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments.
standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode.
seq Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an extended IP access list while creating the filter. Syntax Parameters seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {ip-protocol-number | icmp | ip | tcp | udp} {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] [dscp value] [order] [fragments] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] sequencenumber Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290. The range is from 1 to 65534.
port port (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535. The following list includes some common TCP port numbers: 202 • 23 = Telnet • 20 and 21 = FTP • 25 = SMTP • 169 = SNMP destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes.
Defaults By default 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which the ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, the flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-EXTENDED Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for the flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.3(0.
particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands deny — Configures a filter to drop packets. permit — Configures a filter to forward packets.
mac access-group Apply a MAC ACL to traffic entering or exiting an interface. Enter into the Interface mode and apply the MAC ACL in the following manner. Syntax mac access-group access-list-name {in [vlan vlan-range] | out} To delete a MAC access-group, use the no mac access-group mac-listname command. Parameters access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC access list, up to 140 characters. vlan vlan-range (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan and then enter a range of VLANs.
Related Commands mac access-list standard — configures a standard MAC ACL. mac access-list extended — configures an extended MAC ACL. show mac access-lists Display all of the Layer 2 ACLs configured in the system, whether or not they are applied to an interface, and the count of matches/mismatches against each ACL entry displayed. Syntax Parameters show mac access-lists [access-list-name] [interface interface] [in | out] access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC ACL, up to 140 characters.
Parameters access-list-name Enter the name of a configured MAC ACL, up to 140 characters. interface interface Enter the keyword interface then the one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: in | out Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel and then enter a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
NOTE: For more information, also refer to the Commands Common to all ACL Types and Common MAC Access List Commands sections. deny To drop packets that match the filter criteria, configure a filter.
• snap - is the IEEE 802.3 SNAP frame format count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-MAC ACCESS LIST-EXTENDED Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywordlog to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-inmsgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter thethreshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated. with the seq, permit, or deny commands.
ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction.
bytes Dell(config-ext-macl)#remark 15 ARP Dell(config-ext-macl)#seq 20 permit any any ev2 eq 806 count bytes Dell(config-ext-macl)#remark 25 IPv6 Dell(config-ext-macl)#seq 30 permit any any ev2 eq 86dd count bytes Dell(config-ext-macl)#seq 40 permit any any count bytes Dell(config-ext-macl)#exit Dell(conf)#do show mac accounting access-list snickers interface g0/47 in Extended mac access-list snickers on TenGigabitEthernet 0/12 seq 10 permit any any ev2 eq 800 count bytes (559851886 packets 191402152148byte
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100.
You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface.
log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated.
this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic.
The number of entries allowed per ACL is hardware-dependent. For detailed specification about entries allowed per ACL, refer to your switch documentation. The switch supports both ingress and egress ACLs. Example Dell(conf)#mac-access-list access-list standard TestMAC Dell(config-std-macl)#permit 00:00:00:00:00:00 00:00:00:00:ff:ff count Dell(config-std-macl)#deny any count permit To pass packets matching the criteria specified, configure a filter.
of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly. ethertype operator (OPTIONAL) To filter based on protocol type, enter one of the following Ethertypes: • ev2 - is the Ethernet II frame format • llc - is the IEEE 802.3 frame format • snap - is the IEEE 802.3 SNAP frame format count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes. Defaults Not configured.
any Enter the keyword any to filter all packets. host mac-address Enter the keyword host and then enter a MAC address to filter packets with that host address. mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask; therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly. mac-sourceaddress-mask Specify which bits in the MAC address must be matched.
IP Prefix List Commands When you create an access-list without any rule and then apply it to an interface, the ACL behavior reflects implicit permit. To configure or enable IP prefix lists, use these commands. clear ip prefix-list Reset the number of times traffic mets the conditions (“hit” counters) of the configured prefix lists.
le max-prefixlength Defaults Not configured. Command Modes PREFIX-LIST Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword le and then enter the maximum prefix length, which is a number from zero (0) to 32. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Sequence numbers for this filter are automatically assigned starting at sequence number 5.
show ip prefix-list summary — displays a summary of the configured prefix lists. permit Configure a filter that passes packets meeting the criteria specified. Syntax Parameters permit ip-prefix [ge min-prefix-length] [le max-prefix-length] ip-prefix Specify an IP prefix in the network/length format. For example, 35.0.0.0/8 means match the first 8 bits of address 35.0.0.0. ge min-prefixlength (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword ge and then enter the minimum prefix length, which is a number from zero (0) to 32.
seq To a deny or permit filter in a prefix list while configuring the filter, assign a sequence number. Syntax Parameters seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {any} | [ip-prefix /nn {ge min-prefix-length} {le max-prefix-length}] | [bitmask number] sequencenumber Enter a number. The range is from 1 to 4294967294. deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this condition.. permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting this condition.
show config Display the current PREFIX-LIST configurations. Syntax show config Command Modes PREFIX-LIST Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell(conf-nprefixl)#show config ! ip prefix-list snickers Dell(conf-nprefixl)# show ip prefix-list detail Display details of the configured prefix lists.
show ip prefix-list summary Display a summary of the configured prefix lists. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show ip prefix-list summary [prefix-name] prefix-name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string as the name of the prefix list, up to 140 characters. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The continue feature allows movement from one route-map entry to a specific route-map entry (the sequence number). If you do not specify the sequence number, the continue feature simply moves to the next sequence number (also known as an implied continue).
description Add a description to this route map. Syntax Parameters description description description Defaults none Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Enter a description to identify the route map (80 characters maximum). Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. route-map — Enables a route map.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. match ip address — redistributes routes that match an IP address. match ip next-hop — redistributes routes that match the next-hop IP address. match ip route-source — redistributes routes that match routes advertised by other routers. match metric — redistributes routes that match a specific metric.
match route-type — redistributes routes that match a route type. match tag — redistributes routes that match a specific tag. match ip next-hop To match based on the next-hop IP addresses specified in an IP access list or IP prefix list, configure a filter. Syntax Parameters match ip next-hop {access-list | prefix-list prefix-list-name} access-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP access list, up to 140 characters.
match ip route-source To match based on the routes advertised by routes specified in IP access lists or IP prefix lists, configure a filter. Syntax Parameters match ip route-source {access-list | prefix-list prefix-listname} access-list-name Enter the name of a configured IP access list, up to 140 characters. prefix-list prefixlist-name Enter the keywords prefix-list and then enter the name of configured prefix list, up to 140 characters. Defaults Not configured.
Supported Modes Command History Related Commands Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. match interface — redistributes routes that match the next-hop interface. match ip address — redistributes routes that match an IP address. match ip next-hop — redistributes routes that match the next-hop IP address. match ip route-source — redistributes routes that match routes advertised by other routers.
Related Commands match interface — redistributes routes that match the next-hop interface. match ip address — redistributes routes that match an IP address. match ip next-hop — redistributes routes that match the next-hop IP address. match ip route-source — redistributes routes that match routes advertised by other routers. match metric — redistributes routes that match a specific metric. match tag — redistributes routes that match a specific tag.
route-map Enable a route map statement and configure its action and sequence number. This command also places you in ROUTE-MAP mode. Syntax Parameters Defaults route-map map-name [permit | deny] [sequence-number] map-name Enter a text string of up to 140 characters to name the route map for easy identification. permit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword permit to set the route map default as permit. If you do not specify a keyword, the default is permit.
set automatic-tag To automatically compute the tag value of the route, configure a filter. Syntax set automatic-tag To return to the default, use the no set automatic-tag command. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. set metric — specify the metric value assigned to redistributed routes.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. set automatic-tag — computes the tag value of the route. set metric-type — specifies the route type assigned to redistributed routes. set tag — specifies the tag assigned to redistributed routes. set metric-type To assign a new route type for routes redistributed to OSPF, configure a filter.
set tag To specify a tag for redistributed routes, configure a filter. Syntax Parameters set tag tag-value tag-value Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTE-MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Enter a number as the tag. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. set automatic-tag — computes the tag value of the route.
show route-map Display the current route map configurations. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show route-map [map-name] map-name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a configured route map, up to 140 characters. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. dscp Enter this keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
Parameters Defaults • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. • Use the no deny {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address mac-source-address-mask}{any | host mac-address | macdestination-address mac-destination-address-mask}command. command. source Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the packet was sent. mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added the support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.3(0.0) Added the support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only.
seq Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an extended IP access list while creating the filter. Syntax Parameters 242 seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {source [mask] | any | host ip-address}} [count [byte] [dscp value] [order] [fragments] [threshold-in-msgs [count] sequencenumber Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290. The range is from 0 to 65534. deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this condition.
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-STANDARD Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. 9.3(0.
extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands deny — configures a filter to drop packets. permit — configures a filter to forward packets. seq — assigns a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an IP access list while creating the filter.
operator port port • syn: synchronize sequence numbers • urg: urgent field (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand: • eq = equal to • neq = not equal to • gt = greater than • lt = less than • range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port command) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535.
generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-EXTENDED Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists.
• Parameters 248 Use the no deny udp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} command. source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. threshold-inmsgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword then a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs are terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. Defaults By default 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly.
Example An ACL rule with a TCP port range of 4000–8000 uses eight entries in the CAM.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask; therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly. any Enter the keyword any to match and drop any ARP traffic on the interface. vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan and then enter the VLAN ID to filter traffic associated with a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094 and 1 to 2094 for ExaScale ( you can use IDs 1 to 4094). To filter all VLAN traffic, specify VLAN 1.
in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, refer to the Quality of Service chapter of the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. The monitor option is relevant in the context of flow-based monitoring only. For more information, refer to the Port Monitoring.
destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. dscp Enter this keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry.
When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must match. The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask; therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly. any Enter the keyword any to match and drop specific Ethernet traffic on the interface. vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan and then enter the VLAN ID to filter traffic associated with a specific VLAN.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled.
deny To drop packets with a the MAC address specified, configure a filter. Syntax deny {any | mac-source-address [mac-source-address-mask]} [count [byte]] [log [interval minutes] [threshold—in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. • Use the no deny {any | mac-source-address mac-source-addressmask} command.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
deny To drop packets with a certain IP address, configure a filter. Syntax deny {any | host mac-address | mac-source-address mac-sourceaddress-mask}{any | host mac-address | mac-destination-address mac-destination-address-mask}[ethertype-operator] [count [byte]][log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] To remove this filter, you have two choices: Parameters 260 • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated, if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-STANDARD Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands ip access-list standard— configures a standard ACL. permit — configures a MAC address filter to pass packets. seq — configures a MAC address filter with a specified sequence number.
order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry. The range is from 0 to 254 (where 0 is the highest priority and 254 is the lowest; lower-order numbers have a higher priority). If you do not use the keyword order, the ACLs have the lowest order by default (255). fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode.
byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100.
You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface.
any Enter the keyword any to match and drop specific Ethernet traffic on the interface. vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan and then enter the VLAN ID to filter traffic associated with a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094 and 1 to 2094 for ExaScale (you can use IDs 1 to 4094). To filter all VLAN traffic specify VLAN 1. source-macaddress macaddress-mask Enter a MAC address and mask in the nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. For the MAC address mask, specify which bits in the MAC address must match.
NOTE: For more information, refer to the Flow-based Monitoring section in the Port Monitoring chapter of the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval. If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs.
destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. dscp Enter the keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is 0 to 63. message-type (OPTIONAL) Enter an ICMP message type, either with the type (and code, if necessary) numbers or with the name of the message type. The range is 0 to 255 for ICMP type and 0 to 255 for ICMP code. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes.
Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, refer to the Quality of Service chapter of the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host and then enter the IP address to specify a host IP address. dscp Enter the keyword dscp to deny a packet based on the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63.
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-EXTENDED Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example An ACL rule with a TCP port range of 4000–8000 uses eight entries in the CAM.
any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address or hostname. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. bytes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bytes to count bytes processed by the filter. dscp (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dcsp to match to the IP DCSCP values.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platforms. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. • Use the no permit {any | mac-source-address mac-sourceaddress-mask} command. any Enter the keyword any to forward all packets received with a MAC address. mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. mac-sourceaddress-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs are stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero. If ACL logging was stopped previously because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is re-enabled for this new interval.
deny Enter the keyword deny to configure a filter to drop packets meeting this condition. permit Enter the keyword permit to configure a filter to forward packets meeting this criteria. any Enter the keyword any to filter all packets. mac-sourceaddress Enter a MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. mac-sourceaddress-mask (OPTIONAL) Specify which bits in the MAC address must match.
Version Description 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
• Parameters Use the no permit tcp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} command. source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes. order (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword order to specify the QoS priority for the ACL entry.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. For more information, refer to the “Quality of Service” chapter of the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. The switch cannot count both packets and bytes, so when you enter the count byte options, only bytes are incremented. Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM.
Total Ports: 4001 Example An ACL rule with a TCP port lt 1023 uses only one entry in the CAM. Dell# Data Mask From To 1 0000000000000000 1111110000000000 0 #Covered 1023 1024 Total Ports: 1024 Related Commands ip access-list extended — creates an extended ACL. permit — assigns a permit filter for IP packets. permit udp — assigns a permit filter for UDP packets. seq arp Configure an egress filter with a sequence number that filters ARP packets meeting this criteria.
any Enter the keyword any to match and drop any ARP traffic on the interface. vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan followed by the VLAN ID to filter traffic associated with a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094 and 1 to 2094 for ExaScale (you can use IDs 1 to 4094). To filter all VLAN traffic specify VLAN 1. ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) as the target IP address of the ARP. opcode codenumber Enter the keyword opcode and then enter the number of the ARP opcode.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-EXTENDED-ACCESS-LIST Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. 8.2.1.0 Allows ACL control of fragmented packets for IP (Layer 3) ACLs. 8.1.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. 7.4.1.0 Added the monitor option. 6.5.
ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces. You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction.
The MAC ACL supports an inverse mask; therefore, a mask of ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff allows entries that do not match and a mask of 00:00:00:00:00:00 only allows entries that match exactly. any Enter the keyword any to match and drop specific Ethernet traffic on the interface. vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan and then enter the VLAN ID to filter traffic associated with a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094 and 1 to 2094 for ExaScale (you can use IDs 1 to 4094). To filter all VLAN traffic specify VLAN 1.
in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. NOTE: For more information, refer to the Flow-based Monitoring section in the Port Monitoring chapter of the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled.
You cannot include IP, TCP, or UDP (Layer 3) filters in an ACL configured with ARP or Ether-type (Layer 2) filters. Apply Layer 2 ACLs to interfaces in Layer 2 mode. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped. When the interval at which ACL logs are configured to be recorded expires, the subsequent, fresh interval timer is started and the packet count for that new interval commences from zero.
source Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format of the network from which the packet was received. mask (OPTIONAL) Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes.
Usage Information The order option is relevant in the context of the Policy QoS feature only. The following applies: • The seq sequence-number command is applicable only in an ACL group. • The order option works across ACL groups that have been applied on an interface via the QoS policy framework. • The order option takes precedence over seq sequence-number. • If sequence-number is not configured, the rules with the same order value are ordered according to their configuration order.
seq Assign a sequence number to a deny or permit filter in an extended IP access list while creating the filter. Syntax Parameters seq sequence-number {deny | permit} {ipv6-protocol-number | icmp | ip | tcp | udp} {source mask | any | host ipv6-address} {destination mask | any | host ipv6-address} [operator port [port]] [count [byte]] [dscp value] [order] [fragments] [log [interval minutes] [threshold-in-msgs [count]] [monitor] sequencenumber Enter a number from 0 to 4294967290.
port port (OPTIONAL) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535. The following list includes some common TCP port numbers: 294 • 23 = Telnet • 20 and 21 = FTP • 25 = SMTP • 169 = SNMP destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes.
Defaults By default 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which the ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, the flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes ACCESS-LIST Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for the flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.3(0.
particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic. You may specify traffic using standard or extended access-lists. This mechanism copies all incoming or outgoing packets on one port and forwards (mirrors) them to another port. The source port is the monitored port (MD) and the destination port is the monitoring port (MG). Related Commands deny — Configures a filter to drop packets. permit — Configures a filter to forward packets.
• range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port parameter) port port Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand. The range is 0 to 65535. destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter.
Most ACL rules require one entry in the CAM. However, rules with TCP and UDP port operators (for example, gt, lt, or range) may require more than one entry. The range of ports is configured in the CAM based on bit mask boundaries; the space required depends on exactly what ports are included in the range. When the configured maximum threshold is exceeded, generation of logs is stopped.
Related Commands ip access-list extended — creates an extended ACL. permit — assigns a permit filter for IP packets. permit tcp — assigns a permit filter for TCP packets. permit tcp To pass TCP packets meeting the filter criteria, configure a filter.
port port • eq = equal to • neq = not equal to • gt = greater than • lt = less than • range = inclusive range of ports (you must specify two ports for the port parameter) Enter the application layer port number. Enter two port numbers if you are using the range logical operand. The range is from 0 to 65535.
monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled.
You can activate flow-based monitoring for a monitoring session by entering the flow-based enable command in the Monitor Session mode. When you enable this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress direction. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface.
Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number. • Use the no permit icmp {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} command. source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or noncontiguous.
Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION-IP ACCESS-LIST-STANDARD Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for flow-based monitoring on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. 9.3(0.
permit To configure a filter that matches the filter criteria, select an IPv6 protocol number, ICMP, IPv6, TCP, or UDP.
generation of ACL logs is terminated with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100. interval minutes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval followed by the time period in minutes at which ACL logs must be generated. The interval range is from 1 to 10 minutes. monitor (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword monitor when the rule is describing the traffic that you want to monitor and the ACL in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface.
mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x) or A.B.C.D. The mask, when specified in A.B.C.D format, may be either contiguous or non-contiguous. any Enter the keyword any to specify that all routes are subject to the filter. host ipv6–address Enter the keyword host then the IPv6 address to specify a host IP address. operator (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following logical operand.
in which you are creating the rule is applied to the monitored interface. Defaults By default, 10 ACL logs are generated if you do not specify the threshold explicitly. The default frequency at which ACL logs are generated is five minutes. By default, flow-based monitoring is not enabled. Command Modes ACCESS-LIST Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
deny tcp (for IPv6 ACLs) Configure a filter that drops TCP packets that match the filter criteria.
Defaults destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. bit (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bit to count the bits that filter the processes. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count the packets that filter the processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count the bytes that filter the processes. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces.
Defaults host ipv6–address Enter the keyword host then the IPv6 address to specify a host IP address. destination Enter the IPv6 address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets processed by the filter. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes processed by the filter. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces.
fragments Enter the keyword fragments to use ACLs to control packet fragments. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages. threshold-in msgs count (OPTIONAL) Enter the threshold-in-msgs keyword followed by a value to indicate the maximum number of ACL logs that can be generated, exceeding which the generation of ACL logs is terminated. with the seq, permit, or deny commands. The threshold range is from 1 to 100.
this capability, traffic with particular flows that are traversing through the ingress and egress interfaces are examined and, appropriate ACLs can be applied in both the ingress and egress directions. Flow-based monitoring conserves bandwidth by monitoring only specified traffic instead all traffic on the interface. This feature is particularly useful when looking for malicious traffic. It is available for Layer 2 and Layer 3 ingress and egress traffic.
8 Access Control List (ACL) VLAN Groups and Content Addressable Memory (CAM) This section describes the access control list (ACL) virtual local area network (VLAN) group, and content addressable memory (CAM) enhancements. member vlan Add VLAN members to an ACL VLAN group. Syntax Parameters member vlan {VLAN-range} VLAN-range Enter the member VLANs using comma-separated VLAN IDs, a range of VLAN IDs, a single VLAN ID, or a combination.
Attaching an ACL individually to VLAN interfaces is similar to the behavior of ACLVLAN mapping storage in CAM prior to the implementation of the ACL VLAN group functionality. ip access-group Apply an egress IP ACL to the ACL VLAN group. Syntax Parameters ip access-group {group name} out implicit-permit group-name Enter the name of the ACL VLAN group where you want the egress IP ACLs applied, up to 140 characters. out Enter the keyword out to apply the ACL to outgoing traffic.
detail Display information in a line-by-line format to display the names in their entirety. Without the detail option, the output displays in a table style and information may be truncated. Default No default behavior or values Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform.
The following sample output shows the line-by-line style display when using the show acl-vlan-group detail option. NOTE: No group or access list names are truncated Dell#show acl-vlan-group detail Group Name : Test Egress IP Acl : Ingress IP Acl : test Ingress IPV6 Acl : Vlan Members : 1-100 show cam-acl-vlan Display the number of flow processor (FP) blocks that is allocated for the different VLAN services.
Example Field Description VlanOpenFlow Number of FP blocks for VLAN open flow operations. VlanIscsi Number of FP blocks for VLAN internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) counters. VlanHp Number of FP blocks for VLAN high performance processes. VlanFcoe Number of FP blocks for VLAN Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) operations. VlanAclOpt Number of FP blocks for ACL VLAN optimzation feature.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL platform. Usage Information The VLAN ContentAware Processor (VCAP) application is a pre-ingress CAP that modifies the VLAN settings before packets are forwarded. To support the ACL CAM optimization functionality, the CAM carving feature is enhanced. A total of four VACP groups are present, of which two are for fixed groups and the other two are for dynamic groups.
• L2AclCam • V6AclCam The following describes the output fields of this show command: Example: Field Description LineCard Number of the line card that contains information on ACL VLAN groups Portpipe The hardware path that packets follow through a system for ACL optimization CAM-Region Type of area in the CAM block that is used for ACL VLAN groups Total CAM space Total amount of space in the CAM block Used CAM Amount of CAM space that is currently in use Available CAM Amount of CAM space
Default None Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Command History Examples Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. The following sample output shows the line-by-line style display when using the show running-config acl-vlan-group option.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Usage Information You can have up to eight different ACL VLAN groups at any given time. When you configure an ACL VLAN group, you enter the ACL VLAN Group Configuration mode. To avoid the problem of excessive consumption of CAM area, you can configure ACL VLAN groups that combines all the VLANs that are applied with the same ACL in a single group.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform. Usage Information The output for this command displays in a line-by-line format. This allows the ACLVLAN-Group names (or the Access List Group Names) to display in their entirety. Examples The following sample output shows the line-by-line style display when using the show acl-vlan-group detail option.
9 Bidirectional Forwarding Detection (BFD) Bidirectional forwarding detection (BFD) is a detection protocol that provides fast forwarding path failure detection. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) implementation is based on the standards specified in the IETF Draft draft-ietf-bfd-base-03 and supports BFD on all Layer 3 physical interfaces including virtual local area network (VLAN) interfaces and port-channels.
The default is active. Defaults Refer to Parameters. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF ROUTER OSPFv3 ROUTER BGP ROUTER ISIS INTERFACE (BFD for VRRP only) Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
bfd disable Disable BFD on an interface. Syntax bfd disable Re-enable BFD using the no bfd disable command. Defaults BFD is disabled by default. Command Modes INTERFACE VRRP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. bfd enable (Configuration) Enable BFD on all interfaces. Syntax bfd enable Disable BFD using the no bfd enable command. Defaults BFD is disabled by default.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. bfd interval Specify non-default BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval. Syntax Parameters bfd interval interval min_rx min_rx multiplier value role {active | passive} interval milliseconds Enter the keywords interval to specify non-default BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval.
Example Dell(conf-if-gi-0/3)#bfd interval 250 min_rx 300 multiplier 4 role passive Dell(conf-if-gi-0/3)# bfd neighbor Establish a BFD session with a neighbor. Syntax Parameters bfd neighbor ip-address ip-address Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Down control packet and are placed in the Down state. Peer routers might take corrective action by choosing alternative paths for the routes that originally pointed to this router. ip route bfd Enable BFD for all neighbors configured through static routes.
Related Commands show bfd neighbors — displays the BFD neighbor information on all interfaces or a specified interface. ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors Establish BFD sessions with all OSPFv3 neighbors on a single interface or use non-default BFD session parameters.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. isis bfd all-neighbors Enable BFD on all IS-IS neighbors discovered on an interface.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command provides the flexibility to fine-tune the timer values based on individual interface needs when ISIS BFD is configured in CONFIGURATION mode. Any timer values specified with this command overrides timers set using the bfd all-neighbors command. Using the no form of this command does not disable BFD if BFD is configured in CONFIGURATION mode.
Related Commands • The neighbor does not inherit the global BFD enable values configured with the bfd neighbor command or configured for the peer group to which the neighbor belongs. • The neighbor only inherits the global timer values configured with the bfd neighbor command: interval, min_rx, and multiplier. bfd neighbor — enables BFD sessions with all neighbors the Layer 3 protocols discover. neighbor bfd disable — explicitly disables a BFD session with a BGP neighbor or a BGP peer group.
When you remove the Disabled state of a BFD for a BGP session with a specified neighbor by entering the no neighbor bfd disable command, the BGP link with the neighbor returns to normal operation and uses the BFD session parameters globally configured with the bfd all-neighbor command or configured for the peer group to which the neighbor belongs. Related Commands bfd all-neighbors — enables BFD sessions with all neighbors discovered by Layer 3 protocols.
Example Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show bfd neighbors * - Active session role Ad Dn - Admin Down B - BGP C - CLI I - ISIS O - OSPF R - Static Route (RTM) LocalAddr Clients * 10.1.3.2 Example (Detail) RemoteAddr Interface State Rx-int Tx-int Mult 10.1.3.1 Gi 1/3 Up 300 250 3 C Dell#show bfd neighbors detail Session Discriminator: 1 Neighbor Discriminator: 1 Local Addr: 10.1.3.2 Local MAC Addr: 00:01:e8:02:15:0e Remote Addr: 10.1.3.
vrrp bfd neighbor Establish a BFD for VRRP session with a neighbor. Syntax Parameters vrrp bfd neighbor ip-address neighbor ipaddress Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History 338 Enter the IP address of the BFD neighbor. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
10 Border Gateway Protocol IPv4 (BGPv4) For detailed information about configuring BGP, refer to the BGP chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
Parameters ipv4 multicast Enter BGPv4 multicast mode. ipv6 unicast Enter BGPv6 mode. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. aggregate-address To minimize the number of entries in the routing table, summarize a range of prefixes.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Not configured. • ROUTER BGP ADDRESS FAMILY • ROUTER BGP ADDRESS FAMILY IPv6 Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information At least one of the routes included in the aggregate address must be in the BGP routing table for the configured aggregate to become active.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Related Commands both Enter the keyword both to indicate that the system sends and accepts multiple paths from peers. path-count Enter the number paths supported. The range is from 2 to 64. Disabled • ROUTER BGP • ROUTER BGP-address-family Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
bgp asnotation Allows you to implement a method for AS number representation in the command line interface (CLI). Syntax bgp asnotation [asplain | asdot+ | asdot] To disable a dot or dot+ representation and return to ASPLAIN, enter the no bgp asnotation command. Defaults asplain Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands bgp four-octet-as-support — enables 4-byte support for the BGP process. bgp bestpath as-path ignore Ignore the AS PATH in BGP best path calculations. Syntax bgp bestpath as-path ignore To return to the default, enter the no bgp bestpath as-path ignore command. Defaults Disabled (that is, the software considers the AS_PATH when choosing a route as best). Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM.
Usage Information The bestpath router bgp configuration mode command changes the default bestpath selection algorithm. The multipath-relax option allows loadsharing across providers with different (but equal-length) autonomous system paths. Without this option, ECMP expects the AS paths to be identical for loadsharing. bgp bestpath med confed Enable MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attribute comparison on paths learned from BGP confederations.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The MED is a 4-byte unsigned integer value and the default behavior is to assume a missing MED as 4294967295. This command causes a missing MED to be treated as 0. During path selection, paths with a lower MED are preferred over paths with a higher MED.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Route reflection to clients is not necessary if all client routers are fully meshed. Related Commands bgp cluster-id — assigns an ID to a BGP cluster with two or more route reflectors. neighbor route-reflector-client — configures a route reflector and clients. bgp cluster-id Assign a cluster ID to a BGP cluster with more than one route reflector.
Related Commands bgp client-to-client reflection — enables route reflection between the route reflector and clients. neighbor route-reflector-client — configures a route reflector and clients. show ip bgp cluster-list — views paths with a cluster ID. bgp confederation identifier Configure an identifier for a BGP confederation. Syntax bgp confederation identifier as-number To delete a BGP confederation identifier, use the no bgp confederation identifier as-number command.
bgp confederation peers Specify the autonomous systems (ASs) that belong to the BGP confederation. Syntax bgp confederation peers as-number [...as-number] To return to the default, use the no bgp confederation peers command. Parameters as-number Enter the AS number. The range is from 0 to 65535 (2 byte), from 1 to 4294967295 (4 byte), or from 0.1 to 65535.65535 (dotted format). ...as-number (OPTIONAL) Enter up to 16 confederation numbers.
To disable route dampening, use the no bgp dampening [half-life reuse suppress max-suppress-time] [route-map map-name] command. Parameters half-life (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes after which the Penalty is decreased. After the router assigns a Penalty of 1024 to a route, the Penalty is decreased by half after the half-life period expires. The range is from 1 to 45. The default is 15 minutes.
Related Commands show ip bgp dampened-paths — views the BGP paths. bgp default local-preference Change the default local preference value for routes exchanged between internal BGP peers. Syntax bgp default local-preference value To return to the default value, use the no bgp default local-preference command. Parameters value Defaults 100 Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter a number to assign to routes as the degree of preference for those routes.
Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command is enabled by default, that is for all updates received from EBGP peers, BGP ensures that the first AS of the first AS segment is always the AS of the peer. If not, the update is dropped and a counter is increments.
bgp four-octet-as-support Enable 4-byte support for the BGP process. Syntax bgp four-octet-as-support To disable fast external failover, use the no bgp four-octet-as-support command. Defaults Disabled (supports 2–byte format) Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
stale-path-time seconds Enter the keyword stale-path-time then the maximum number of seconds to wait before restarting a peer’s stale paths. The default is 360 seconds. role receiver-only Enter the keyword role receiver-only to designate the local router to support graceful restart as a receiver only. Defaults as above Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
paths, depending on the order in which they are received from the neighbors because MED may or may not get compared between adjacent paths. In Deterministic mode (no bgp non-deterministic-med), the system compares MED between adjacent paths within an AS group because all paths in the AS group are from the same AS.
bgp regex-eval-optz-disable Disables the Regex Performance engine that optimizes complex regular expression with BGP. Syntax bgp regex-eval-optz-disable To re-enable optimization engine, use the no bgp regex-eval-optz-disable command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes ROUTER BGP (conf-router_bgp) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands show ip protocols — views information on all routing protocols enabled and active. bgp router-id Assign a user-given ID to a BGP router. Syntax bgp router-id ip-address To delete a user-assigned IP address, use the no bgp router-id command. Parameters ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format to reset only that BGP neighbor.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you enable soft-reconfiguration for a neighbor and you execute the clear ip bgp soft in command, the update database stored in the router is replayed and updates are re-evaluated. With this command, the replay and update process is triggered only if route-refresh request is not negotiated with the peer.
capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size Set the size of the BGP packet capture buffer. This buffer size pertains to both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses. Syntax Parameters capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size 100-102400000 100-102400000 Defaults 40960000 bytes. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Enter a size for the capture buffer. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
NOTE: If you enter the clear ip bgp ip-address soft command, both inbound and outbound policies are reset. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to activate only inbound policies. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to activate only outbound policies. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
clear ip bgp flap-statistics Clear BGP flap statistics, which includes number of flaps and the time of the last flap. Syntax Parameters clear ip bgp flap-statistics [ip-address mask | filter-list aspath-name | regexp regular-expression] ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format and the prefix mask in slash format (/x) to reset only that prefix. filter-list as-pathname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords filter-list then the name of a configured AS-PATH list.
show ip bgp flap-statistics — views the BGP flap statistics. undebug all — disables all debugging operations. clear ip bgp peer-group Reset a peer-group’s BGP sessions. Syntax Parameters clear ip bgp peer-group peer-group-name peer-group-name Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the peer group name to reset the BGP sessions within that peer group. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To view information on both incoming and outgoing routes, do not include the in and out parameters in the debugging command. The in and out parameters cancel each other; for example, if you enter the debug ip bgp in command and then enter the debug ip bgp out command, you do not see information on the incoming routes.
Related Commands show debugging — view enabled debugging operations. show ip bgp dampened-paths — view BGP dampened routes. debug ip bgp events Display information on local BGP state changes and other BGP events. Syntax debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] events [in | out] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] events command. Parameters ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] keepalives [in | out] command. Parameters ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group peergroup-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peer-group then the name of the peer group. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only inbound keepalive messages. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only outbound keepalive messages.
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To remove all configured debug commands for BGP, enter the no debug ip bgp command. debug ip bgp soft-reconfiguration Enable soft-reconfiguration debug.
debug ip bgp updates Allows you to view information about BGP updates. Syntax debug ip bgp updates [in | out | prefix-list prefix-list-name] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ip-address | peer-group peer-group-name] updates [in | out] command. Parameters in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only BGP updates received from neighbors. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only BGP updates sent to neighbors.
Defaults 0 Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The default-metric command in BGP sets the value of the BGP MULTI_EXIT_DISC (MED) attribute for redistributed routes only. Related Commands bgp always-compare-med — enables comparison of all BGP MED attributes. redistribute — redistributes routes from other routing protocols into BGP.
max-paths Configure the maximum number of parallel routes (multipath support) BGP supports. Syntax max-paths {ebgp | ibgp} number To return to the default values, enter the no maximum-paths command. Parameters ebgp Enter the keyword ebgp to enable multipath support for External BGP routes. ibgp Enter the keyword ibgp to enable multipath support for Internal BGP routes. number Enter a number as the maximum number of parallel paths. The range is from 2 to 64.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-BGP-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information By default, when you create a neighbor/peer group configuration in the Router BGP context, this enables IPv4/Unicast AFI/SAFI. When you use activate in the new context, the neighbor/peer group enables for AFI/SAFI.
neighbor advertisement-interval Set the advertisement interval between BGP neighbors or within a BGP peer group. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} advertisement-interval seconds To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peergroup-name} advertisement-interval command. Parameters Defaults ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format.
seconds Defaults none Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter a number as the time interval, in seconds, before BGP route updates are sent. The range is from 0 to 3600 seconds. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor allowas-in Set the number of times an AS number can occur in the AS path.
neighbor default-originate Inject the default route to a BGP peer or neighbor. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} default-originate [route-map map-name] To remove a default route, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peergroup-name} default-originate command. Parameters ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the default route of all routers in that peer group.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor distribute-list Distribute BGP information via an established prefix list.
Usage Information Other BGP filtering commands include: neighbor filter-list, ip as-path access-list, and neighbor route-map. Related Commands neighbor route-map — assigns a route map to a neighbor or peer group. neighbor ebgp-multihop Attempt and accept BGP connections to external peers on networks that are not directly connected.
Parameters ipv4-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you enable failover, BGP keeps track of IP or IPv6 ability to reach the peer remote address and the peer local address.
role receiver-only Defaults as above Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keyword role receiver-only to designate the local router to support graceful restart as a receiver only. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This feature advertises to BGP neighbors through a capability advertisement.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. bgp four-octet-as-support — enables 4-byte support for the BGP process. neighbor maximum-prefix Control the number of network prefixes received. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} maximum-prefix maximum [threshold] [warning-only] To return to the default values, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peergroup-name} maximum-prefix maximum command.
Usage Information If you configure the neighbor maximum-prefix command and the neighbor receives more prefixes than the neighbor maximum-prefix command configuration allows, the neighbor goes down and the show ip bgp summary command displays (prfxd) in the State/PfxRcd column for that neighbor. The neighbor remains down until you enter the clear ip bgp command for the neighbor or the peer group to which the neighbor belongs or you enter the neighbor shutdown and neighbor no shutdown commands.
of the TCP connection between them is verified and the MD5 digest is checked on every segment sent on the TCP connection. Configuring a password for a neighbor causes an existing session to be torn down and a new one established. If you specify a BGP peer group by using the peer-group-name parameter, all the members of the peer group inherit the characteristic configured with this command.
When you add a peer to a peer group, it inherits all the peer group’s configured parameters.
Usage Information When you create a peer group, it is disabled (Shut mode). Related Commands neighbor peer-group (assigning peers) — assigns routers to a peer group. neighbor remote-as — assigns a indirectly connected AS to a neighbor or peer group. neighbor shutdown — disables a peer or peer group. neighbor peer-group passive Enable passive peering on a BGP peer group, that is, the peer group does not send an OPEN message, but responds to one.
neighbor remote-as — assigns an indirectly connected AS to a neighbor or peer group. neighbor remote-as Create and specify the remote peer to the BGP neighbor. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} remote-as number To delete a remote AS entry, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peergroup-name} remote-as number command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor to enter the remote AS in its routing table.
neighbor remove-private-as Remove private AS numbers from the AS-PATH of outgoing updates. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} remove-private-as To return to the default, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peer-groupname} remove-private-as command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor to remove the private AS numbers. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to remove the private AS numbers. Defaults Disabled (that is, private AS number are not removed).
To remove the route map, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peergroup-name} route-map map-name {in | out} command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group. map-name Enter the name of an established route map. If the Route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). in Enter the keyword in to filter inbound routes. out Enter the keyword out to filter outbound routes.
Parameters ip-address peer-group-name Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. Enter the name of the peer group. All routers in the peer group receive routes from a route reflector. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Parameters ip-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor in dotted decimal format. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable or enable all routers within the peer group. Defaults Enabled (that is, BGP neighbors and peer groups are disabled.) Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command enables soft-reconfiguration for the BGP neighbor specified. BGP stores all the updates the neighbor receives but does not reset the peer-session. CAUTION: Inbound update storage is a memory-intensive operation.
Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Timer values configured with the neighbor timers command override the timer values configured with any other command.
Usage Information Loopback interfaces are up constantly and the BGP session may need one interface constantly up to stabilize the session. The neighbor update-source command is not necessary for directly connected internal BGP sessions. neighbor weight Assign a weight to the neighbor connection, which is used to determine the best path. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} weight weight To remove a weight value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peergroup-name} weight command.
network Specify the networks for the BGP process and enter them in the BGP routing table. Syntax network ip-address mask [route-map map-name] To remove a network, use the no network ip-address mask [route-map map-name] command. Parameters ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format of the network. mask Enter the mask of the IP address in the slash prefix length format (for example, /24). The mask appears in command outputs in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D).
network backdoor Specify this IGP route as the preferred route. Syntax network ip-address mask backdoor To remove a network, use the no network ip-address mask backdoor command. Parameters ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format of the network. mask Enter the mask of the IP address in the slash prefix length format (for example, /24). The mask appears in command outputs in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Defaults Not configured.
These routes are treated as incomplete routes. route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword route-map then the name of an established route map. Only the following ROUTE-MAP mode commands are supported: • match ip address • set metric • set tag If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
redistribute ospf Redistribute OSPF routes into BGP. Syntax redistribute ospf process-id [[match external {1 | 2}] [match internal]] [route-map map-name] To stop redistribution of OSPF routes, use the no redistribute ospf process-id command. Parameters process-id Enter the number of the OSPF process. The range is from 1 to 65535. match external {1 | 2} (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords match external to redistribute OSPF external routes. You can specify 1 or 2 to redistribute those routes only.
To disable BGP, use the no router bgp as-number command. Parameters as-number Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the AS number. The range is from 1 to 65535 (2 byte), from 1 to 4294967295 (4 byte), or from 0.1 to 65535.65535 (dotted format). Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
PDU[1] : len 101, captured 00:34:51 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00650100 00000013 00000000 00000000 419ef06c 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0181a1e4 0181a25c 41af92c0 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000001 0181a1e4 0181a25c 41af9400 00000000 PDU[2] : len 19, captured 00:34:51 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 PDU[3] : len 19, captured 00:34:51 ago ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff ffffffff 00130400 [. . .] Outgoing packet capture enabled for BGP neighbor 20.20.20.
neighbor 123.34.55.123 peer-group suzanne neighbor 123.34.55.123 shutdown Dell(conf-router_bgp)# Related Commands capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size — specifies a size for the capture buffer. show ip bgp View the current BGP IPv4 routing table for the system. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] [network [network-mask] [longerprefixes]] ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes.
Example Field Description Metric Displays the BGP route’s metric, if assigned. LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route. Weight Displays the route’s weight. Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network. Dell>show ip bgp BGP table version is 847562, local router ID is 63.114.8.
show ip bgp cluster-list View BGP neighbors in a specific cluster. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] cluster-list [cluster-id] ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes. cluster-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the cluster id in dotted decimal format. The range is 1 — 4294967295. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
*>I * I * I * I * I 10.19.75.5/32 * I *>I * I * I * I * I 10.30.1.0/24 * I *>I * I * I * I 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.1 192.68.16.
no-export Enter the keywords no-export to view all routes containing the well-known community attribute of NO_EXPORT. All routes with the NO_EXPORT (0xFFFFFF01) community attribute must not be advertised outside a BGP confederation boundary. Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
r - redistributed, n - network Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network * i 3.0.0.0/8 *>i 4.2.49.12/30 * i 4.21.132.0/23 16422 i *>i 4.24.118.16/3 *>i 4.24.145.0/30 *>i 4.24.187.12/30 *>i 4.24.202.0/30 *>i 4.25.88.0/30 i *>i 6.1.0.0/16 i *>i 6.2.0.0/22 i *>i 6.3.0.0/18 i *>i 6.4.0.0/16 i *>i 6.5.0.0/19 i *>i 6.8.0.0/20 i *>i 6.9.0.0/20 i *>i 6.10.0.0/15 i *>i 6.14.0.0/15 i *>i 6.133.0.0/21 i *>i 6.151.0.0/1 i --More-- Next Hop Metric LocPrf Weight Path 205.171.0.16 100 0 209 701 80 i 205.171.
• Supported Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The show ip bgp community-list command without any parameters lists BGP routes matching the Community List and the output is the same as for the show ip bgp command output. The following describes the show ip bgp community-list pass command shown in the following example.
• Supported Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip bgp damp command shown in the following example. Example Field Description Network Displays the network ID to which the route is dampened. From Displays the IP address of the neighbor advertising the dampened route.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
IgnrBestPthASP 0 RstOn 1 : RstMod 1 : RstRole 2 : AFFalgs 7 : RstInt 120 : MaxeorExtInt 361 FixedPartCrt 1 : VarParCrt 1 Packet Capture max allowed length 40960000 : current length 0 Peer Grp List Nbr List Confed Peer List Address Family specific Information AFIndex 0 NdSpFlag 0x41a190b0 : AFRttP 0x41a0d200 : NdRTMMkrP 0x41a19d28 : NdRTMAFTblVer 0 : NdRibCtxAddr 1101110688 NdRibCtxAddrLen 255 : NdAFPrefix 0 : NdAfNLRIP 0 : NdAFNLRILen 0 : NdAFWPtrP 0 NdAFWLen 0 : NdAfNH : NdAFRedRttP 0x41a0d400 : NdRecCtxAd
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To view the total number of COMMUNITY attributes found, use the show ip bgp summary command. The text line above the route table states the number of COMMUNITY attributes found.
Field Example • c = external confederation route entry • n = network route entry • r = redistributed route entry Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router. If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing table. Metric Displays the BGP route’s metric, if assigned. LocPrf Displays the BGP LOCAL_PREF attribute for the route. Weight Displays the route’s weight. Path Lists all the ASs the route passed through to reach the destination network.
show ip bgp flap-statistics View flap statistics on BGP routes. Syntax Parameters show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] flap-statistics [ip-address [mask]] [filter-list as-path-name] [regexp regular-expression] ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes. ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP network to view information only on that network.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip bgp flap command shown in the following example. Example Field Description Network Displays the network ID to which the route is flapping. From Displays the IP address of the neighbor advertising the flapping route. Flaps Displays the number of times the route flapped.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip bgp inconsistent-as command shown in the following example. Example Field Description Network Displays the destination network prefix of each BGP route. Next Hop Displays the next hop address of the BGP router. If 0.0.0.0 is listed in this column, then local routes exist in the routing table.
show ip bgp neighbors Allows you to view the information BGP neighbors exchange. Syntax Parameters show ip bgp [ipv4 unicast] neighbors [ip-address [advertisedroutes | dampened-routes | detail | flap-statistics | routes | {received-routes [network [network-mask]]} | {denied-routes [network [network-mask]]}] ipv4 unicast (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords ipv4 unicast to view information only related to ipv4 unicast routes.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information After a peer reset, the contents of the notification log messages is displayed in hex values for debugging. The following describes the show ip bgp neighbors command shown in the following examples. The Lines Beginning with: Description BGP neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address and its AS number.
The Lines Beginning with: Description (list of inbound and outbound policies) Displays the policy commands configured and the names of the Route map, AS-PATH ACL, or Prefix list configured for the policy. For address family: Displays the IPv4 Unicast as the address family. BGP table version Displays which version of the primary BGP routing table the router and the neighbor are using.
Sent 48 messages, 0 in queue 3 opens, 2 notifications, 0 updates 43 keepalives, 0 route refresh requests Minimum time between advertisement runs is 30 seconds Minimum time before advertisements start is 0 seconds Capabilities received from neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Capabilities advertised to neighbor for IPv4 Unicast : MULTIPROTO_EXT(1) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) ROUTE_REFRESH(2) GRACEFUL_RESTART(64) CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) Route map for incoming advertis
D 70.70.22.0/24 D 70.70.23.0/24 D 70.70.24.0/24 *> 70.70.25.0/24 *> 70.70.26.0/24 *> 70.70.27.0/24 *> 70.70.28.0/24 *> 70.70.29.0/24 Dell# Example (deniedroutes) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 ? ? ? ? ? ? ? ? Dell#show ip bgp neighbors 100.10.10.2 denied-routes 4 denied paths using 205 bytes of memory BGP table version is 34, local router ID is 100.10.10.
Example Field Description Next-hop Displays the next-hop IP address. Via Displays the IP address and interface used to reach the next hop. RefCount Displays the number of BGP routes using this next hop. Cost Displays the cost associated with using this next hop. Flaps Displays the number of times the next hop has flapped. Time Elapsed Displays the time elapsed since the next hop was learned. If the route is down, this field displays time elapsed since the route went down.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege • ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If you use the caret at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters specified. • $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
0x1efe7b9c Dell# 1003 6 0 i show ip bgp paths as-path View all unique AS-PATHs in the BGP database. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp paths as-path • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip bgp paths as-path command shown in the following example.
0x1ea3c02c Dell# 1021 4 show ip bgp paths community View all unique COMMUNITY numbers in the BGP database. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp paths community • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip bgp paths community command shown in the following example.
12955:5606 0x1c9f8e24 50 6 209:209 209:4069 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300 0x1c9f88e4 53 4 209:209 209:3193 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300 0x1f58a944 57 6 209:209 209:2073 209:21362 3908:900 19092:300 0x1ce6be44 80 2 209:209 209:999 209:40832 0x1c6e2374 80 2 209:777 209:41528 0x1f58ad6c 82 46 209:209 209:41528 0x1c6e2064 83 2 209:777 209:40832 0x1f588ecc 85 570 209:209 209:40832 0x1f57cc0c 98 2 209:209 209:21226 286:3031 13646:1044 13646:1124 13646:1154 13646:1164 13646:1184 13646:1194 13646:1204 13646:1214 136
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip bgp peer-group command shown in the following example. Example ( ) Line beginning with: Description Peer-group Displays the peer group’s name. Administratively shut Displays the peer group’s status if the peer group is not enabled. If you enable the peer group, this line is not displayed. BGP version Displays the BGP version supported.
12.1.1.2* 12.1.1.3* 12.1.1.4* 12.1.1.5* 12.1.1.6* 12.2.1.2* 12.2.1.3* 12.2.1.4* 12.2.1.5* 12.2.1.6* 12.3.1.2* 12.3.1.3* 12.3.1.4* 12.3.1.5* 12.3.1.6* 12.4.1.2* 12.4.1.3* 12.4.1.4* 12.4.1.5* 12.4.1.6* Related Commands neighbor peer-group (assigning peers) — assigns a peer to a peer-group. neighbor peer-group (creating group) — creates a peer group. show ip bgp regexp Display the subset of the BGP routing table matching the regular expressions specified.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege • ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If you use the caret at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters specified. • $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
6167 6167 6167 i *>I 4.19.16.0/23 6167 6167 6167 i *>I 4.21.80.0/22 4200 16559 i *>I 4.21.82.0/24 4200 16559 i *>I 4.21.252.0/23 6389 8063 19198 i *>I 4.23.180.0/24 6128 30576 i *>I 4.36.200.0/21 11854 14135 i *>I 4.67.64.0/22 19281 i *>I 4.78.32.0/21 29748 i *>I 6.1.0.0/16 i *>I 6.2.0.0/22 i *>I 6.3.0.0/18 i 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 174 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 174 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 701 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 3561 1.1.1.2 0 100 0 2914 14742 1.1.1.
Field Description network entries Displays the number of network entries, route paths, and the amount of memory used to process those entries. paths Displays the number of paths and the amount of memory used. denied paths Displays the number of denied paths and the amount of memory used. BGP path attribute entries Displays the number of BGP path attributes and the amount of memory used to process them.
Field State/Pfxrcd Description Time Established Display Example > 1 week 11w2d (WeeksDays) If the neighbor is in Established stage, the number of network prefixes received. If a maximum limit was configured with the neighbor maximum-prefix command, (prfxd) appears in this column. If the neighbor is not in Established stage, the current stage is displayed (Idle, Connect, Active, OpenSent, OpenConfirm).
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. timers bgp Adjust the BGP Keep Alive and Hold Time timers. Syntax timers bgp keepalive holdtime To return to the default, use the no timers bgp command. Parameters keepalive Enter a number for the time interval, in seconds, between keepalive messages sent to the neighbor routers. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 60 seconds.
debug ip bgp dampening View information on routes being dampened. Syntax debug ip bgp ipv4 multicast dampening To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp ipv4 multicast dampening command. Parameters dampening Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keyword dampening to clear route flap dampening information. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information CAUTION: Dell Networking OS recommends that you do not change the administrative distance of internal routes. Changing the administrative distances may cause routing table inconsistencies. The higher the administrative distance assigned to a route means that your confidence in that route is low.
Example Dell>show ip bgp dampened-paths BGP table version is 210708, local router ID is 63.114.8.2 Status codes: s suppressed, d damped, h history, * valid, > best Path source: I - internal, a - aggregate, c - confed-external, r - redistributed, n - network Origin codes: i - IGP, e - EGP, ? - incomplete Network From Reuse Path Dell> BGP Extended Communities (RFC 4360) BGP Extended Communities, as defined in RFC 4360, is an optional transitive BGP attribute.
Defaults none Command Modes ROUTE MAP (config-route-map) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If the set community rt and soo are in the same route-map entry, the behavior defines as: Related Commands • If the rt option comes before soo, with or without the additive option, soo overrides the communities rt sets.
Defaults none Command Modes ROUTE MAP (config-route-map) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If the set community rt and soo are in the same route-map entry, the behavior defines as: Related Commands • If the rt option comes before soo, with or without the additive option, soo overrides the communities rt sets.
Example Field Description Hash Displays the hash bucket where the path attribute is stored. Refcount Displays the number of BGP routes using these extended communities. Community Displays the extended community attributes in this BGP path. Dell#show ip bgp paths extcommunity Total 1 Extended Communities Address 0x41d57024 Hash Refcount Extended Community 12272 1 RT:7:200 SoO:5:300 SoO:0.0.0.
IPv6 BGP Commands IPv6 Border Gateway Protocol (IPv6 BGP) is supported on the switch. Border gateway protocol (BGP) is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing and the aggregation of routes and AS paths. Basically, two routers (called neighbors or peers) exchange information including full routing tables and periodically send messages to update those routing tables.
clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast soft Clear and reapply policies for IPv6 unicast routes without resetting the TCP connection; that is, perform BGP soft reconfiguration. Syntax Parameters clear ip bgp {* | as-number | ipv4-neighbor-addr | ipv6neighbor-addr | peer-group name} ipv6 unicast soft [in | out] * Clear and reapply an asterisk ( * ) for all BGP sessions. as-number Clear and reapply policies for all neighbors belonging to the AS.
To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6address | peer-group-name] ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration command. Parameters ipv4-address | ipv6-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor on which you want to enable soft-reconfiguration debugging. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group on which you want to enable soft-reconfiguration debugging. ipv6 unicast Debug soft reconfiguration for IPv6 unicast routes. Defaults Disabled.
Related Commands show ipv6 prefix-list — View the selected IPv6 prefix-list. show ipv6 prefix-list Displays the specified IPv6 prefix list. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 prefix-list detail {prefix-list name} | summary detail Display a detailed description of the selected IPv6 prefix list. prefix-list name Enter the name of the prefix list. NOTE: There is a 140-character limit for prefix list names.
Parameters ipv6-address prefix-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. summary Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Display a summary of RPF routes. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
11 Configuration Cloning Configuration Cloning enables you to clone the configuration from one aggregator to the other. It identifies a source aggregator where running configuration is check-pointed, extracted and downloaded to the target aggregator for further use. The target aggregator checks the compatibility of the cloning file regarding the mode, port types and optional modules.
file-name filename Enter the keywords file-name to specify the user-defined cloning configuration file name in flash. By default, the file name is cloning-config. output xml Enter the keywords output xml to enable the command output status to be displayed in the XML format. Defaults cloning-config Command Modes EXEC Command History Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM and M I/O Aggregator. clone-config create Create the cloning configuration.
Content Addressable Memory (CAM) 12 Content addressable memory (CAM) commands are supported on the Dell Networking operating software on the platform. WARNING: If you are using these features for the first time, contact Dell Networking Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for guidance. CAM Profile Commands The CAM profiling feature allows you to partition the CAM to best suit your application.
validation for DHCP, Ethernet Connectivity Fault Management (CFM) ACLs, and Policy-based Routing (PBR).
NOTE: When you reconfigure CAM allocation, use the nlbclusteracl number command to change the number of NLB ARP entries. The range is from 0 to 2. The default value is 0. At the default value of 0, eight NLB ARP entries are available for use. This platform supports upto 256 CAM entries. Select 1 to configure 128 entries. Select 2 to configure 256 entries.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Added the keyword nlbcluster ACL. 9.4.(0.0) Added support for PBR. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Save the new CAM settings to the startup-config (write-mem or copy run start) then reload the system for the new settings to take effect. The total amount of space allowed is 16 FP Blocks. System flow requires three blocks; these blocks cannot be reallocated.
on the same port pipe, only a single copy of the policy is written (only one FP entry is used). NOTE: An ACL itself may still require more that a single FP entry, regardless of the number of interfaces. For more information, refer to the IP Access Control Lists, Prefix Lists, and Route-mapsections in the Dell Networking Operating System Configuration Guide. show cam-acl Display the details of the CAM profiles on the chassis and all stack units.
Ipv6Acl : Ipv4Qos : L2Qos : L2PT : IpMacAcl : VmanQos : VmanDualQos : EcfmAcl : FcoeAcl : iscsiOptAcl : ipv4pbr : vrfv4Acl : Openflow : fedgovacl : nlbclusteracl: 0 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -- stack-unit 1 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 6 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 0 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 nlbclusteracl: 0 show cam-acl-egress Display t
Example Dell#show cam-acl-egress -- Chassis Egress Current L2Acl : Ipv4Acl : Ipv6Acl : Cam ACL -Settings(in block sizes) 1 1 2 -- Stack unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) L2Acl : 1 Ipv4Acl : 1 Ipv6Acl : 2 Dell# 448 Content Addressable Memory (CAM)
Control Plane Policing (CoPP) 13 The Dell Networking OS supports the following CoPP commands. control-plane-cpuqos To manage control-plane traffic, enter control-plane mode and configure the switch. Syntax control-plane-cpuqos Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information Create a policy-map by associating a queue number with the qos-policy. Create QoS policies prior to enabling this command. For CoPP, do not use the keywords cpu-qos when creating qos-policy-input. Related Commands qos-policy-input — creates a QoS input policy map. policy-map-input — creates an input policy map. service-policy rate-limit-protocols Apply a policy for the system to rate limit control protocols on a per-protocol basis.
show cpu-queue rate cp Display the rates for each queue. Syntax show cpu-queue rate cp Defaults Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command applies the service-policy based on the type of protocol defined in the ACL rules. Create ACL and QoS policies prior to enabling this command.
Example Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Dell#show ipv6 protocol-queue-mapping Protocol Src-Port Dst-Port TcpFlag Queue EgPort Rate(kbps) -------- -------- -------- ------- ----- ---------------TCP (BGP) any/179 179/any _ Q9 _ _ ICMPV6 NA any any _ Q6 _ _ ICMPV6 RA any any _ Q6 _ _ ICMPV6 NS any any _ Q5 _ _ ICMPV6 RS any any _ Q5 _ _ ICMPV6 any any _ Q6 _ _ VRRPV6 any any _ Q10 _ _ OSPFV3 any any _ Q9 _ _ Dell# show mac protocol-queue-mapping Display the queue mapping for the MAC protocols.
14 u-Boot All commands in this chapter are in u-Boot mode. These commands are supported on the Dell Networking Aggregator only. To access this mode, hit any key when the following line appears on the console during a system boot: Hit any key to stop autoboot: You enter u-Boot immediately, as indicated by the BOOT_USER# prompt. NOTE: Only the most frequently used commands available in uBoot mode are described in this chapter. In uBoot mode, you cannot use the Tab key for command completion.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. BOOT_USER# boot show net config retries Number of Network Boot Config Retries is : 0 BOOT_USER # boot write net config retries Set the number of retries for network boot configuration failure.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. default gateway Set the default gateway IP address. Syntax default-gateway Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. enable Change the access privilege level.
Supported Modes Command History Example All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. BOOT_USER # help ***** Dell Force10 Boot Interface Help Information ***** Current access level: USER LEVEL Use "syntax help" for more information on syntax.
ignore startup-config Ignore the system startup configuration. Syntax ignore startup-config Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. interface management ethernet ip address Set the management port IP address and mask.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. no interface management ethernet ip address Clear the management port IP address and mask. Syntax no interface management ethernet ip address Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. reload Reload the switch.
Supported Modes Command History Example All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. BOOT_USER # show boot blc ? Total 1 possible command found. Possible command list: show boot blc show the boot loop counter value BOOT_USER # show boot blc Boot Loop Counter : 10 BOOT_USER # show boot selection Displays the ROM bootstrap bootflash partition.
show bootflash Show the summary of boot flash information. Syntax show bootflash Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. BOOT_USER # show bootflash GENERAL BOOTFLASH INFO ====================== Bootflash Partition A: Dell Force10 Networks System Boot Official IOM_LP_IMG_BOOT_LOADER, BSP Release 4.0.1.
Example Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. BOOT_USER # show bootvar PRIMARY OPERATING SYSTEM BOOT PARAMETERS: ======================================== boot device : tftp file name : premnath Management Etherenet IP address : 10.16.130.134/16 Server IP address : 10.16.127.35 Default Gateway IP address : 15.0.0.
show interface management ethernet Show the management port IP address and mask. Syntax show interface management ethernet Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. BOOT_USER # show interface management ethernet Management ethernet IP address: 10.16.130.
syntax help Show the syntax information. Syntax help Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes All Modes Command History 464 Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Data Center Bridging (DCB) 15 Data center bridging (DCB) refers to a set of IEEE Ethernet enhancements that provide data centers with a single, robust, converged network to support multiple traffic types, including local area network (LAN), server, and storage traffic. DCB features are auto-configured in standalone mode. The Dell Networking OS commands for DCB features include 802.1Qbb priority-based flow control (PFC), 802.
To remove the application priority TLVs, use the no advertise dcbx-applntlv {fcoe | iscsi} command. Parameters {fcoe | iscsi} Enter the application priority TLVs, where: • fcoe: enables the advertisement of FCoE in application priority TLVs. • iscsi: enables the advertisement of iSCSI in application priority TLVs. Defaults Application priority TLVs are enabled to advertise FCoE and iSCSI.
Defaults All PFC and ETS TLVs are advertised. Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You can configure the transmission of more than one TLV type at a time; for example: advertise dcbx-tlv ets-conf ets-reco.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The unit of bandwidth percentage is 1%. A bandwidth percentage of 0 is allowed and disables the scheduling of that class. If the sum of the bandwidth percentages given to all eight classes exceeds 100%, the bandwidth percentage automatically scales down to 100%.
dcb-policy buffer-threshold (Global Configuration) Assign the dcb buffer threshold policy on the stack ports. To apply the dcb buffer threshold policy on the stack-units, use the configuration mode. To apply on front-end ports, use the interface mode. Syntax Parameters dcb-policy buffer-threshold stack-unit all stack-ports all profile-name dcb-bufferthreshold Configure the profile name for the DCB buffer threshold.
dcb-policy buffer-threshold (Interface Configuration) Assign the DCB policy to the DCB buffer threshold profile on interfaces. This setting takes precedence over the global buffer-threshold setting. Syntax Parameters dcb-policy buffer-threshold profile-name buffer-threshold Configure the profile name for the DCB buffer threshold profile-name Enter the name of the profile, which can be a string of up to 32 characters in length.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. clear ets counters Clear ETS TLV counters. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History clear ets counters [tengigabitethernet slot/port] slot/port • Enter the slot/port number. EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Usage information • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. If you do not use the statistics parameter, both hardware and DCBx counters clear. dcb enable pfc-queues Configure the number of PFC queues. Syntax Parameters dcb enable pfc-queues value value Enter the number of PFC queues. The range is from 1 to 4.
thresholds for the buffer. This method of configuration enables you to effectively manage and administer the behavior of lossless queues. Example Dell(conf)#dcb pfc-queues 4 dcb enable auto-detect on-next-reload Enables or disables global DCB on a subsequent reload. Also internally configures PFC buffers based on DCB enable or disable. You must save and reload for the configurations to take effect. You can use the auto-detect keyword to re-enable IOA with the port-wise DCB auto detect feature.
syncing disks... done unmounting file systems... unmounting /f10/flash (/dev/ld0e)... unmounting /usr (mfs:35)... unmounting /lib (mfs:24)... unmounting /f10 (mfs:21)... unmounting /tmp (mfs:15)... unmounting /kern (kernfs)... unmounting / (/dev/md0a)... done rebooting...
unmounting / (/dev/md0a)... done rebooting... Dell#show dcb stack-unit 0 port-set 0 stack-unit 0 port-set 0 DCB Status: Enabled, PFC Queue Count: 4 stack-unit Total Buffer PFC Total Buffer PFC Shared Buffer PFC Available Buffer PP (KB) (KB) (KB) (KB) ---------------------------------------------------------------0 0 3822 1912 832 450 Dell(conf)# dcb-map stack-unit all stack-ports all Apply the specified DCB map on all ports of the switch stack.
Parameters config-source | auto-downstream | auto-upstream | manual Enter the DCBX port role, where: • config-source: configures the port to serve as the configuration source on the switch. • auto-upstream: configures the port to receive a peer configuration. The configuration source is elected from auto-upstream ports. • auto-downstream: configures the port to accept the internally propagated DCB configuration from a configuration source.
Parameters auto | cee | cin | ieee-v2.5 Enter the DCBX version type used on the interface, where: • auto: configures the port to operate using the DCBX version received from a peer. • cee: configures the port to use CEE (Intel 1.01). • cin: configures the port to use Cisco-Intel-Nuova (DCBX 1.0). • ieee-v2.5: configures the port to use IEEE 802.1az (Draft 2.5). Defaults Auto Command Modes INTERFACE PROTOCOL LLDP Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
• fail: enables traces for DCBX failures. • mgmt: enables traces for DCBX management frames. • resource: enables traces for DCBX system resource frames. • sem: enables traces for the DCBX state machine. • tlv: enables traces for DCBX TLVs. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. fc-map In an FCoE map, configure the FCoE mapped address prefix (FC-MAP) value which is used to identify FCoE traffic transmitted on the FCoE VLAN for the specified fabric. Syntax Parameters fc—map fc-map-value fc-map-value Enter the unique MAC address prefix used by a SAN fabric. The range of FC-MAP values is from 0EFC00 to 0EFCFF.
fcoe-map Create an FCoE map which contains the parameters used to configure the links between server CNAs and a SAN fabric. Apply the FCoE map on a server-facing Ethernet port. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes fcoe-map map-name map-name Maximum: 32 alphanumeric characters.
An FCoE map consists of the following parameters: the dedicated FCoE VLAN used for storage traffic, the destination SAN fabric (FC-MAP value), FCF priority used by a server, and the FIP keepalive (FKA) advertisement timeout. In each FCoE map, the fabric ID, FC-MAP value, and FCoE VLAN parameters must be unique. Use one FCoE map to access one SAN fabric. You cannot use the same FCoE map to access different fabrics.
To remove the configured iSCSI priority, use the no iscsi priority-bits command. Parameters priority-bitmap Enter the priority-bitmap range. The range is from 1 to FF. Defaults 0x10 Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the M I/O Aggregator.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information When you configure keepalive, the system sends a self-addressed packet out of the configured interface to verify that the far end of a WAN link is up. When you configure no keepalive, the system does not send keepalive packets and so the local end of a WAN link remains up even if the remote end is down.
For more information about VLANs and the commands to configure them, refer to the Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands section. Example (Single Range) Dell(conf)#interface vlan 10 Dell(conf-if-vl-3)# pfc mode on Enable the PFC configuration on the port so that the priorities are included in DCBX negotiation with peer PFC devices. Syntax pfc mode on To disable the PFC configuration, use the no pfc mode on command. Defaults PFC mode is on.
pfc no-drop queues Configure the port queues that still function as no-drop queues for lossless traffic. Syntax pfc no-drop queues queue-range To remove the no-drop port queues, use the no pfc no-drop queues command. Parameters queue-range Enter the queue range. Separate the queue values with a comma; specify a priority range with a dash; for example, pfc no-drop queues 1,3 or pfc no-drop queues 2-3. The range is from 0 to 3. Defaults No lossless queues are configured.
priority Configure the priority for the PFC threshold to be allocated to the buffer space parameters.
You can use thepriority command to set up both the administrative and peerrelated PFC priorities. For example, you can configure the intended buffer configuration for all 8 priorities. If you configure the number of lossless queues as 4 and if the administrator-configured priorities configured within the DCB input policy is applied, then the configuration for those priorities are pre-designed.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the FC Flex IO module installed in the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information Use the dcb-map command to configure priority groups with PFC and/or ETS settings and apply them to Ethernet interfaces. Use the priority-pgid command to map 802.1p priorities to a priority group. You can assign each 802.1p priority to only one priority group. A priority group consists of 802.
Parameters dot1p0_groupnum Enter the priority group number for each 802.1p class of traffic in a DCB map. dot1p1_groupnum dot1p2_groupnum dot1p3_groupnum dot1p4_groupnum dot1p5_groupnum dot1p6_groupnum dot1p7_groupnum Defaults None Command Modes DCB MAP Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.
• Priority group 2 contains traffic with dot1p priority 4. • Priority group 4 contains traffic with dot1p priority 5, 6, and 7. To remove a priority-pgid configuration from a DCB map, enter the no priority-pgid command. Related Commands priority-group bandwidth pfc— Configures the ETS bandwidth allocation and the PFC setting used to manage the port traffic in an 802.1p priority group.
• bandwidth-percentage — bandwidth percentage allocated to the priority traffic in port queues. qos-policy-buffer Create a QoS policy buffer and enter the configuration mode to configure the no-drop queues, ingress buffer size, buffer limit for pausing, and buffer offset limit for resuming.
size Weightage of the priorities on the shared buffer size in the system. Enter a number in the range from 0 to 9. The default shared threshold weight is 10. Default The default size of the ingress buffer is 45 KB. The default buffer limit at which the port sends the pause to peer and recommences the sending of packets to the peer is 10 KB. The default threshold weight of the shared buffer space is 10.
priority-list Configure the 802.1p priorities for the traffic on which you want to apply an ETS output policy. Syntax priority-list value To remove the priority list, use the no priority-list command. Parameters value Enter the priority list value. Separate priority values with a comma; specify a priority range with a dash; for example, priority-list 3,5-7. The range is from 0 to 7. Defaults none Command Modes PRIORITY-GROUP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.
• werr: weighted elastic round robin (werr) provides lowlatency scheduling for priority traffic on port queues. Defaults Weighted elastic round robin (WERR) scheduling is used to queue priority traffic. Command Modes POLICY-MAP-OUT-ETS Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Specify a stack-unit number on the Master switch in a stack.
Usage Information To clear DCBX frame counters, use the clear dcbx counters interface stack-unit/port command. The following describes the show interface dcbx detail command shown in the following example. 496 Field Description Interface Interface type with chassis slot and port number. Port-Role Configured the DCBX port role: auto-upstream, autodownstream, config-source, or manual.
Example Field Description Local DCBX Status: Protocol State Current operational state of the DCBX protocol: ACK or INSYNC. Peer DCBX Status: DCBX Operational Version DCBX version advertised in Control TLVs received from the peer device. Peer DCBX Status: DCBX Max Version Supported Highest DCBX version supported in Control TLVs received from the peer device. Peer DCBX Status: Sequence Number Sequence number transmitted in Control TLVs received from the peer device.
Peer Operating version is CEE Local DCBX TLVs Transmitted: ErPfi Local DCBX Status ----------------DCBX Operational Version is 0 DCBX Max Version Supported is 0 Sequence Number: 2 Acknowledgment Number: 2 Protocol State: In-Sync Peer DCBX Status: ---------------DCBX Operational Version is 0 DCBX Max Version Supported is 255 Sequence Number: 2 Acknowledgment Number: 2 Total DCBX Frames transmitted 27 Total DCBX Frames received 6 Total DCBX Frame errors 0 Total DCBX Frames unrecognized 0 show interface ets D
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To clear ETS TLV counters, use the clear ets counters interface porttype slot/port command. The following describes the show interface summary command shown in the following example. Field Description Interface Interface type with stack-unit and port number. Max Supported TC Group Maximum number of priority groups supported. Number of Traffic Classes Number of 802.1p priorities currently configured.
Example (Summary) 500 Field Description State Machine Type Type of state machine used for DCBX exchanges of ETS parameters: Feature — for legacy DCBX versions; Asymmetric — for an IEEE version. Conf TLV Tx Status Status of ETS Configuration TLV advertisements: enabled or disabled. ETS TLV Statistic: Input Conf TLV pkts Number of ETS Configuration TLVs received. ETS TLV Statistic: Output Conf TLV pkts Number of ETS Configuration TLVs transmitted.
6 0% ETS 7 0% ETS Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 13% ETS 1 13% ETS 2 13% ETS 3 13% ETS 4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Oper status is init Conf TLV Tx Status is disabled Traffic Class TLV Tx Status is disabled Example (Detail) Dell(conf)# show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/1 ets detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 8 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters : -----------------Admin is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA 0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ET
3 13% ETS 4 12% ETS 5 12% ETS 6 12% ETS 7 12% ETS Oper status is init ETS DCBX Oper status is Down Reason: Port Shutdown State Machine Type is Asymmetric Conf TLV Tx Status is enabled Reco TLV Tx Status is enabled 0 Input Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Output Conf TLV Pkts, 0 Error Conf TLV Pkts 0 Input Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Output Traffic Class TLV Pkts, 0 Error Traffic Class TLV Pkts show interface pfc Displays the PFC configuration applied to ingress traffic on an interface, including priorities and link delay.
Usage Information To clear the PFC TLV counters, use the clear pfc counters interface port-type slot/port command. The following describes the show interface pfc summary command shown in the following example. Field Description Interface Interface type with stack-unit and port number. Admin mode is on Admin is enabled PFC admin mode is on or off with a list of the configured PFC priorities.
Example (Summary) 504 Field Description Application Priority TLV: SCSI TLV Tx Status Status of ISCSI advertisements in application priority TLVs from the local DCBX port: enabled or disabled. Application Priority TLV: Local FCOE Priority Map Priority bitmap the local DCBX port uses in FCoE advertisements in application priority TLVs. Application Priority TLV: Local ISCSI Priority Map Priority bitmap the local DCBX port uses in ISCSI advertisements in application priority TLVs.
Dell# show interfaces tengigabitethernet 0/4 pfc detail Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/4 Admin mode is on Admin is enabled Remote is enabled Remote Willing Status is enabled Local is enabled Oper status is recommended PFC DCBX Oper status is Up State Machine Type is Feature TLV Tx Status is enabled PFC Link Delay 45556 pause quanta Application Priority TLV Parameters : -------------------------------------FCOE TLV Tx Status is disabled ISCSI TLV Tx Status is disabled Local FCOE PriorityMap is 0x8 Local ISCS
Example (Summary) Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show interfaces te 0/3 pfc statistics Interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/3 Priority Rx XOFF Frames Rx Total Frames Tx Total Frames -------------------------------------------------------0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 show qos priority-groups Displays the ETS priority groups configured on the switch, including the 802.1p priority classes and ID of each group.
show qos dcb-map Display the DCB parameters configured in a specified DCB map. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show qos dcb-map map-name map-name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Displays the PFC and ETS parameters configured in the specified map. All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
Priorities:0 1 2 4 5 6 7 PG:1 TSA:ETS Priorities:3 BW:50 PFC:ON show stack-unit stack-ports ets details Displays the ETS configuration applied to egress traffic on stacked ports, including ETS Operational mode on each unit and the configurated priority groups with dot1p priorities, bandwidth allocation, and scheduler type. Syntax Parameters show stack-unit {all | stack-unit} stack-ports {all | portnumber} ets details stack-unit Enter the stack unit identification. port-number Enter the port number.
Stack unit 1 stack port all Max Supported TC Groups is 4 Number of Traffic Classes is 1 Admin mode is on Admin Parameters: -------------------Admin is enabled TC-grp Priority# Bandwidth TSA -----------------------------------------------0 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7 100% ETS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 - dcb pfc-shared-buffer-size Configure the maximum amount of shared buffer size for PFC packets in kilobytes. Syntax Parameters dcb pfc-shared—buffer—size KB KB Enter a number in the range of 0 to 7787. Default None.
%ERROR: pfc shared buffer size configured cannot accommodate existing buffer requirement in the system. Enter a smaller value for the shared buffer size or increase the total buffer size appropriately by using the dcb pfc-total- buffer-size command. Example Dell(conf)#dcb pfc-shared-buffer-size 5000 dcb pfc-total-buffer-size Configure the total buffer size for PFC in kilobytes. Syntax Parameters dcb pfc-total—buffer—size KB KB Enter a number in the range of 0 to 7787. Default The default is 6592KB.
Example Dell(conf)#dcb pfc-total-buffer-size 5000 Dell(conf)#dcb pfc-total-buffer-size 4000 %ERROR: Total pfc buffer size configured cannot accommodate existing buffer requirement in the system. dcb-buffer-threshold Configure the profile name for the DCB buffer threshold. Syntax Parameters dcb buffer—threshold profile-name profile-name Enter the name of the profile, which can be a string of up to 32 characters in length.
dcb enable pfc-queues Configure the number of PFC queues. Syntax Parameters dcb enable pfc-queues value value Enter the number of PFC queues. The range is from 1 to 4. The number of ports supported based on lossless queues configured will depend on the buffer. Command Modes CONFIGURATION mode Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL platform.
Version Description 9.3 (0.1) Introduced on S6000, S4810, and S4820T. Usage Information PFC and ETS are enabled by default on the interfaces when DCB is globally enabled (refer to dcb enable). In some network topology, you may want to disable PFC on an interface and apply link level flow control; Similarly you may want to disable ETS on an interface and apply QoS bandwidth configurations. Limitations • “dcb-map” CLI on interface is mutually exclusive to “no dcb ets enable” and “no dcb pfc enable”.
buffer on the queue. It also shows the percentage of the available shared buffer used by the queues for each of the corresponding threshold weights of the shared buffer: Command History Example sharedthresholdweight on the queue % of available shared buffer that can be consumed by the queue. 0 No dynamic sharing; shared buffer = 0. 1 0.77% 2 1.54% 3 3.03% 4 5.88% 5 11.11% 6 20% 7 33.33% 8 50% 9 66.67% 10 80% 11 88.89% Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the MXL.
Supported Modes Command History Example All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 16 Dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) is an application layer protocol that dynamically assigns IP addresses and other configuration parameters to network end-stations (hosts) based on configuration policies determined by network administrators. An Aggregator can operate as a DHCP client. As a DHCP client, the Aggregator requests an IP address from a DHCP server.
address Enter the IP address to clear the binding entry for a single IP address. conflicts Enter the keyword conflicts to delete all of the log entries created for IP address conflicts. server statistics Enter the keywords server statistics to clear all the server counter information. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
To disable the debug logs for DHCPv6 relay agent transactions, use the debug ipv6 dhcp command. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. default-router Assign a default gateway to clients based on the address pool. Syntax Parameters default-router address [address2...
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dns-server Assign a DNS server to clients based on address pool. Syntax Parameters dns-server address [address2...address8] address Defaults none Command Modes DHCP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter a list of DNS servers that may service clients on the subnet. You may list up to eight servers, in order of preference. Version Description 9.
excluded-address Prevent the server from leasing an address or range of addresses in the pool. Syntax Parameters excluded-address [address | low-address high-address] address Enter a single address to be excluded from the pool. low-address Enter the lowest address in a range of addresses to be excluded from the pool. high-address Enter the highest address in a range of addresses to be excluded from the pool.
Parameters address/mask Defaults none Command Modes DHCP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the host IP address and subnet mask. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. lease Specify a lease time for the addresses in a pool. Syntax Parameters lease {days [hours] [minutes] | infinite} days Enter the number of days of the lease. The range is from 0 to 31.
Defaults none Command Modes DHCP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. netbios-node-type Specify the NetBIOS node type for a Microsoft DHCP client. Dell Networking Operating System (OS) recommends specifying clients as hybrid.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip dhcp binding Display the DHCP binding table. Syntax show ip dhcp binding Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip dhcp configuration Display the DHCP configuration.
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip dhcp server Display the DHCP server statistics. Syntax show ip dhcp server statistics Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information In the I/O Aggregator, the DHCP client is enabled only on the default VLAN and management interface 0/0. Use the ip address command to assign a static IP address that overwrites the dynamically assigned IP address. Other Commands Supported by the DHCP Client The following commands are supported by the DHCP client.
• Release of an IP address Syntax Parameters debug ip dhcp client events [interface type slot/port] interface type slot/port Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Default None Command History Display log messages for DHCP packets sent and received on the specified interface. • For the management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword managementethernet followed by slot/ port information.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. release dhcp interface Release the dynamically-acquired IP address on an Ethernet interface while retaining the DHCP client configuration on the interface.
• Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Default None. Command History Usage information For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. The renew dhcp command is used to renew the lease of IP address obtained through dhcp.
show ip dhcp lease Displays lease information about the dynamic IP address currently assigned to a DHCP client-enabled interface. Syntax Parameters show ip dhcp lease[interface type slot/port] interface type slot/port Display DHCP client statistics on the specified interface. • For the management interface on the stack-unit, enter the keyword managementethernet followed by slot/ port information. The slot and port range is 0. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. arp inspection-trust — specifies a port as trusted so that ARP frames are not validated against the binding table. arp inspection-trust Specify a port as trusted so that ARP frames are not validated against the binding table.
clear ipv6 dhcp snooping binding Clear all the DHCPv6 snooping binding database entries. Syntax clear ipv6 dhcp snooping binding Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM Dell# clear ipv6 dhcp snooping? binding Clear the snooping binding database ip dhcp snooping Enable DHCP snooping globally.
ipv6 dhcp snooping Enable DHCPv6 snooping globally for ipv6. Syntax [no] ipv6 dhcp snooping To disable the snooping globally, use the no ipv6 dhcp snooping command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL. ip dhcp snooping database Delay writing the binding table for a specified time.
Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL. ip dhcp snooping binding Create a static entry in the DHCP binding table. Syntax Parameters [no] ip dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan-id vlan-id ip ip-address interface type slot/port lease number mac address Enter the keyword mac then the MAC address of the host to which the server is leasing the IP address.
Related Commands show ip dhcp snooping — displays the contents of the DHCP binding table. ip dhcp snooping database renew Renew the binding table. Syntax ip dhcp snooping database renew Defaults none Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip dhcp snooping trust Configure an interface as trusted.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL. ip dhcp source-address-validation Enable the IP Source Guard. Syntax Parameters [no] ip dhcp source-address-validation [ipmac] ipmac Defaults Disabled Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enable IP+MAC Source Address Validation. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When enabled, the system begins creating entries in the binding table for the specified VLANs. NOTE: Learning only happens if there is a trusted port in the VLAN. Related Commands ip dhcp snooping trust — configures an interface as trusted. ipv6 dhcp snooping vlan Enable ipv6 DHCP Snooping on VLAN or range of VLANs.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip dhcp snooping Display the contents of the DHCP binding table or display the interfaces configured with IP Source Guard. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Related Commands show ip dhcp snooping [binding | source-address-validation] binding Display the interfaces configured with IP Source Guard.
IPv6 DHCP Snooping Mac Verification : Disabled. Database write-delay (In minutes) : 5 DHCP packets information Snooping packets Snooping packets processed on L2 vlans : 0 : 0 DHCP Binding File Details Invalid File Invalid Binding Entry Binding Entry lease expired : 0 : 0 : 0 Dell# ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address Validate a DHCP packet’s source hardware address against the client hardware address field (CHADDR) in the payload.
Equal Cost Multi-Path (ECMP) 17 Equal cost multi-path (ECMP) is supported on the Dell Networking OS. ecmp-group Provides a mechanism to monitor traffic distribution on an ECMP link bundle. A system log is generated when the standard deviation of traffic distribution on a member link exceeds a defined threshold. Syntax ecmp-group {ecmp-group-id interface interface | link-bundlemonitor} To remove the selected interface, use the ecmp-group no interface command.
hash-algorithm Changes the hash algorithm used to distribute traffic flows across a Port Channel.
• xor8: Use CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR8 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor8 • xor16: Use CR16 — 16 bit XOR lag hash algorithm value Enter the keyword lag then the LAG hash algorithm value. The range is from 0 to 47. nh-ecmp hash algorithm value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword nh-ecmp then the ECMP hash algorithm value. linecard number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword linecard then the linecard slot number.
crc32MSB | crc32LSB | xor1 | xor2 | xor4 | xor8 | xor16} lag {crc16 | crc16cc | crc32MSB | crc32LSB | xor1 | xor2 | xor4 | xor8 | xor16} 542 • crc16: Use CRC16_BISYNC — 16 bit CRC16-bisync polynomial (default) • crc16cc: Use CRC16_CCITT — 16 bit CRC16 using CRC16-CCITT polynomial • crc32MSB: Use CRC32_UPPER — MSB 16 bits of computed CRC32 • crc32LSB: Use CRC32_LOWER — LSB 16 bits of computed CRC32 • xor1: Use CRC16_BISYNC_AND_XOR1 — Upper 8 bits of CRC16-BISYNC and lower 8 bits of xor1 • xor2:
port-set number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword port-set then the port-set slot number. Defaults 0 for hash-algorithm value on TeraScale and ExaScale IPSA and IPDA mask value is FF for a line card. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. Added flow-based-hashing support for hashing on ECMP. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
results in various test scenarios, but if the default algorithm does not provide a satisfactory distribution of traffic, use the hash-algorithm command to designate another algorithm. When a Port Channel member leaves or is added to the Port Channel, the hash algorithm is recalculated to balance traffic across the members. On TeraScale, if you do not enter the keyword ECMP or LAG, the Dell Networking OS assumes it to be common for both.
takes the lower 32 bits of the hash key to compute the egress port and is the “fallback” configuration if you have not configured anything else. The different hash algorithms are based on the number of ECMP group members and packet values. The default hash algorithm yields the most balanced results in various test scenarios, but if the default algorithm does not provide satisfactory distribution of traffic, use this command to designate another algorithm.
NOTE: While the seed is stored separately on each port-pipe, the same seed is used across all CAMs. You cannot separate LAG and ECMP but you can use different algorithms across the chassis with the same seed. If LAG member ports span multiple port-pipes and line cards, set the seed to the same value on each port-pipe to achieve deterministic behavior. If the hash algorithm configuration is removed, the hash seed does not go to the original factory default setting.
link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold Provides a mechanism to set the threshold to trigger when traffic distribution begins being monitored on an ECMP link bundle. Syntax Parameters link-bundle-distribution trigger-threshold [percent] percent Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Indicate the threshold value when traffic distribution starts being monitored on an ECMP link bundle. The range is from 1 to 90%. The default is 60%. Version Description 9.9(0.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION-ECMP-GROUP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show link-bundle distribution Display the link-bundle distribution for the interfaces in the bundle, type of bundle (LAG or ECMP), and the most recently calculated interface utilization (either bytes per second rate or maximum rate) for each interface.
FC FLEXIO FPORT 18 The switch is a blade switch which is plugged into the Dell M1000 Blade server chassis.The blade module contains two slots for pluggable flexible module. With single FC Flex IO module, 4 ports are supported, whereas 8 ports are supported with both FC Flex IO modules. Each port can operate in 2G, 4G or 8G Fiber Channel speed. The topology-wise, FC Flex IOM is directly connected to a FC Storage.
feature fc Enable feature fc with FPort functionality. Syntax Parameters feature fc fport domain-id range Range Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the range from 1 to 239. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Enable remote-fault-signaling rx off command in FCF FPort mode on interfaces connected to the Compellent and MDF storage devices.
Example with member Dell(conf)#fc zone test Dell(conf-fc-zone-test)#member ? WORD WWN(00:00:00:00:00:00:00:00), portID(000000), or Alias name(word) Dell(conf-fc-zone-test)#member Related Commands show fc zone — displays the configured zone. show fcoe-map — displays the fabric parameters. fc alias Create a zone alias name. Syntax fc alias ZoneAliasNamemember name To delete a zone alias name, use the no fc zone ZoneAliasName command.
Related Commands show fc alias — displays the configured alias. fc zoneset Create a zoneset. Syntax fc zoneset zoneset_name [member] To delete a zoneset, use the no fc zoneset zoneset_name [member] command. Parameters zoneset_nameme mber Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the zoneset name. Enter the WWPN, FC-ID, or Alias name. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.1(1.
Parameters map-name Defaults None Command Modes CONFIGURATION Maximum: 32 alphanumeric characters. INTERFACE Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.0(1.3) Introduced on the S5000. Usage Information An FCoE map is a template to map FCoE and FC parameters in a converged fabric.
fabric Apply an FCoE map on a fabric-facing Fibre Channel (FC) port. Syntax Parameters fabric map-name map-name Maximum: 32 alphanumeric characters. Defaults None Command Modes INTERFACE FIBRE_CHANNEL Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.0(1.3) Introduced on the S5000. Usage Information An FCoE map is a template used to map FCoE and FC parameters in a converged fabric.
active-zoneset Activate the zoneset. Syntax active-zoneset zoneset_name To change to the default zone behavior, use the no active-zoneset zoneset_name command. Parameters zoneset_name Enter the zoneset name. Command Modes FC FABRIC CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.1(1.0) Introduced on the S5000.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.1(1.0) Introduced on the S5000. Dell#show fc ns switch Total number of devices = 1 Switch Name 10:00:5c:f9:dd:ef:0a:00 Domain Id 1 Switch Port 53 Port Id 01:35:00 Port Name 10:00:8c:7c:ff:17:f8:01 Node Name 20:00:8c:7c:ff:17:f8:01 Class of Service 8 IP Address Symbolic Port Name Brocade-1860 | 3.0.3.
Port Type Registered with NameServer Registered for SCN Switch Name Domain Id Switch Port Port Id Port Name Node Name Class of Service IP Address Symbolic Port Name SERVER2 | | Symbolic Node Name Port Type Registered with NameServer Registered for SCN Dell# Node port No No 10:00:5c:f9:dd:ef:0a:00 1 53 01:35:00 10:00:8c:7c:ff:17:f8:01 20:00:8c:7c:ff:17:f8:01 8 Brocade-1860 | 3.0.3.
Example Switch Mode Fibre Channel mode of operation of an FN IOM switch. Switch WWN Factory-assigned worldwide node (WWN) name of the MXL. The MXL WWN name is not user-configurable. Dell(conf)#do show fc switch Switch Mode : FPORT Switch WWN : 10:00:aa:00:00:00:00:ac Dell(conf)# show fc zoneset Display the configured and active zoneset.
brcd_sanb 10:00:8c:7c:ff:21:5f:8d 20:02:00:11:0d:03:00:00 Dell# Dell#show fc zoneset active Active Zoneset: fcoe_srv_fc_tgt ZoneName ZoneMember ======================================================= brcd_sanb 10:00:8c:7c:ff:21:5f:8d 20:02:00:11:0d:03:00:00 Dell# Related Commands fc zone — creates a zone. fc zoneset — creates a zoneset. active-zoneset — activates the zoneset. show fc zone Display the configured zone.
sanb_p2tgt1_wwpn Dell# Related Commands fc zone — creates a zone. show fc alias Display the configured alias. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show fc alias [ZoneAliasName ] ZoneAliasName • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Enter the zone alias name to display the details. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.1(1.0) Introduced on the S5000.
• Supported Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.1.1.0 Introduced on the S5000. Usage Information Use the show fcoe-map command to display the FC and FCoE parameters used to configure server-facing Ethernet (FCoE) and fabric-facing FC ports in all FCoE maps on the switch.
19 FIPS Cryptography To configure federal information processing standards (FIPS) cryptography, use the following commands on the switch. fips mode enable Enable the FIPS cryptography mode on the platform. Syntax fips mode enable To disable the FIPS cryptography mode, use the no fips mode enable command. Default Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Password Authentication : enabled. Hostbased Authentication : disabled. RSA Authentication : disabled. Vty Encryption HMAC Remote IP 0 aes128-cbc hmac-sha1 10.11.8.13 1 aes128-cbc hmac-sha1 10.1.20.48 ssh Open an SSH connection specifying the hostname, username, port number, and version of the SSH client.
• hmac-shal-96: Force ssh to use the hmac-sha1–96 HMAC algorithm. • hmac-md5: Force ssh to use the hmac-md5 HMAC algorithm. • hmac-md5–96: Force ssh to use the hmac-md5–96 HMAC algorithm. With the FIPS mode enabled: -p port-number • hmac-sha1: Force ssh to use the hmac-sha1 HMAC algorithm. • hmac-sha1–96: Force ssh to use the hmac-sha1–96 HMAC algorithm. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword —p then the port number.
With FIPS mode enabled: Dell#ssh 10.11.8.12 ? -c Encryption cipher to use (for v2 client -l User name option -m HMAC algorithm to use (for v2 clients only) -p SSH server port option (default 22) Dell#ssh 10.11.8.12 -c ? aes128-cbc Force ssh to use aes128-cbc encryption cipher aes256-cbc Force ssh to use aes256-cbc encryption cipher Dell#ssh 10.11.8.
20 FIP Snooping In a converged Ethernet network, an Aggregator can operate as an intermediate Ethernet bridge to snoop on Fibre Channel over Ethernet Initialization Protocol (FIP) packets during the login process on Fibre Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) forwarders (FCFs). Acting as a transit FIP snooping bridge, the switch uses dynamically-created ACLs to permit only authorized FCoE traffic to be transmitted between an FCoE end-device and an FCF. This chapter describes the FIP snooping commands.
clear fip-snooping statistics Clear the statistics on the FIP packets snooped on all VLANs, a specified VLAN, or a specified port interface. Syntax Parameters clear fip-snooping statistics [interface vlanVlan-id| interfaceport-type port/slot|interface port-channel portchannel-number] vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID of the FIP packet statistics to be cleared. port type port/slot Enter the port-type and slot number of the FIP packet statistics to be cleared.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. fip-snooping enable Enable FIP snooping on all VLANs or on a specified VLAN. Syntax fip-snooping enable To disable the FIP snooping feature on all or a specified VLAN, use the no fipsnooping enable command. Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes FIP snooping is disabled on all VLANs. • CONFIGURATION • VLAN INTERFACE Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
• Supported Modes VLAN INTERFACE Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. fip-snooping port-mode fcf Configure the port for bridge-to-FCF links. Syntax fip-snooping port-mode fcf To disable the bridge-to-FCF link on a port, use the no fip-snooping portmode fcf command.
Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID of the FIP packet statistics to be displayed. port-type port/ slot Enter the port-type and slot number of the FIP packet statistics to be displayed. port-channelnumber Enter the port channel number of the FIP packet statistics to be displayed. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.
Example 572 Field Description Number of ENode Keep Alives Number of FIP-snooped ENode keep-alive frames received on the interface Number of VN Port Keep Alives Number of FIP-snooped VN port keep-alive frames received on the interface Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisements Number of FIP-snooped multicast discovery advertisements received on the interface Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisements Number of FIP-snooped unicast discovery advertisements received on the interface Number of FLOG
Number of Multicast Discovery Solicits Number of Unicast Discovery Solicits Number of FLOGI Number of FDISC Number of FLOGO Number of Enode Keep Alive Number of VN Port Keep Alive Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisement Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisement Number of FLOGI Accepts Number of FLOGI Rejects Number of FDISC Accepts Number of FDISC Rejects Number of FLOGO Accepts Number of FLOGO Rejects Number of CVL Number of FCF Discovery Timeouts Number of VN Port Session Timeouts Number of Session fa
Number Number Number Number of of of of CVL FCF Discovery Timeouts VN Port Session Timeouts Session failures due to Hardware Config :0 :0 :0 :0 debug fip-snooping Enable the debug FIP protocol specific messages. Syntax Parameters 574 debug fip-snooping [all | acl | error | ifm | info | ipc | rx { packet-type { all | discovery | virtual-link-instantiation | virtual-link-maintenance | vlan-discovery } { port-channel | tengigabitethernet } } | tx ] all Enable all the debug options.
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. show fip-snooping config Displays the FIP snooping status and configured FC-MAP values. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show fip-snooping config • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The following table describes the show fip-snooping enode command. Example Field Description ENode MAC MAC address of the ENode ENode Interface Slot/ port number of the interface connected to the ENode.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The following table describes the show fip-snooping fcf command. Example Field Description FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF FCF Interface Slot/ port number of the interface to which the FCF is connected. VLAN VLAN ID number used by the session FC-MAP FC-MAP value advertised by the FCF. FKA_ADV_PERIO D Period of time (in milliseconds) during which FIP keep-alive advertisements are transmitted.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The following table describes the show fip-snooping sessions command. Example Field Description ENode MAC MAC address of the ENode. ENode Interface Slot/ port number of the interface connected to the ENode. FCF MAC MAC address of the FCF. FC Interface Slot/ port number of the interface to which the FCF is connected. VLAN VLAN ID number used by the session.
port-channelnumber Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Enter the port channel number of the FIP packet statistics to be displayed. All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The following table describes the show fip-snooping statistics command.
Example 580 Field Description Number of VN Port Keep Alives Number of FIP-snooped VN port keep-alive frames received on the interface Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisements Number of FIP-snooped multicast discovery advertisements received on the interface Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisements Number of FIP-snooped unicast discovery advertisements received on the interface Number of FLOGI Accepts Number of FIP FLOGI accept frames received on the interface Number of FLOGI Rejects Numbe
Number of Enode Keep Alive Number of VN Port Keep Alive Number of Multicast Discovery Advertisement Number of Unicast Discovery Advertisement Number of FLOGI Accepts Number of FLOGI Rejects Number of FDISC Accepts Number of FDISC Rejects Number of FLOGO Accepts Number of FLOGO Rejects Number of CVL Number of FCF Discovery Timeouts Number of VN Port Session Timeouts Number of Session failures due to Hardware Config Dell(conf)# :9021 :3349 :4437 :2 :2 :0 :16 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 Dell# show fip-snooping stat
show fip-snooping system Displays information on the status of FIP snooping on the switch (enabled or disabled), including the number of FCoE VLANs, FCFs, ENodes, and currently active sessions. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show fip-snooping system • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
*1 1002 FIP Snooping 0X0EFC00 1 1 1 583
Force10 Resilient Ring Protocol (FRRP) 21 FRRP is a proprietary protocol for that offers fast convergence in a Layer 2 network without having to run the spanning tree protocol (STP). The resilient ring protocol is an efficient protocol that transmits a highspeed token across a ring to verify the link status. All the intelligence is contained in the master node with practically no intelligence required of the transit mode. Important Points to Remember • FRRP is media- and speed-independent.
9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Executing this command without the optional ring-id command clears the statistics counters on all the available rings. The system requires a command line confirmation before the command executes.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Because the resilient ring protocol can potentially transmit 20 packets per interface, restrict debug information. description Enter an identifying description of the ring. Syntax description Word To remove the ring description, use the no description [Word] command. Parameters Word Enter a description of the ring.
9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. interface Configure the primary, secondary, and control-vlan interfaces. Syntax interface {primary interface secondary interface control-vlan vlan-id} To return to the default, use the no interface {primary interface secondary interface control-vlan vlan-id} command.
9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command causes the Ring Manager to take ownership of the two ports after IFM validates the configuration. Ownership is relinquished for a port only when the interface does not play a part in any control VLAN, that is, the interface does not belong to any ring. Related Commands show frrp — displays the resilient ring protocol configuration information.
Parameters master Enter the keyword master to set the Ring node to Master mode. transit Enter the keywordtransit to set the Ring node to Transit mode. Defaults Mode None Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-frrp) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol frrp Enter the Resilient Ring Protocol and designate a ring identification.
show frrp Display the resilient ring protocol configuration. Syntax Parameters show frrp [ring-id [summary]] | [summary] ring-id Enter the ring identification number. The range is from 1 to 255 summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view just a summarized version of the Ring configuration. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example (2 Summary) Dell#show frrp 2 summary Ring-ID State Mode Ctrl_Vlan Member_Vlans ----------------------------------------------2 Up Master 2 11-20, 25, 27-30 Dell# Related Commands protocol frrp — enters the resilient ring protocol and designate a ring identification. timer Set the hello interval or dead interval for the Ring control packets.
Usage Information The hello interval command is the interval at which ring frames are generated from the primary interface of the master node. The dead interval command is the time that elapses before a time-out occurs.
GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP) 22 The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports the basic GVRP commands. The generic attribute registration protocol (GARP) mechanism allows the configuration of a GARP participant to propagate through a network quickly. A GARP participant registers or de-registers its attributes with other participants by making or withdrawing declarations of attributes. At the same time, based on received declarations or withdrawals, GARP handles attributes of other participants.
• VLANs created dynamically with GVRP exist only as long as a GVRP-enabled device is sending updates. If the devices no longer send updates, or GVRP is disabled, or the system is rebooted, all dynamic VLANs are removed. • GVRP manages the active topology, not non-topological data such as VLAN protocols. If a local bridge must classify and analyze packets by VLAN protocols, manually configure protocol-based VLANs, and simply rely on GVRP for VLAN updates.
To disable debugging, use the no debug gvrp {config | events | pdu} command. Parameters config Enter the keyword config to enable debugging on the GVRP configuration. event Enter the keyword event to enable debugging on the JOIN/LEAVE events. pdu Enter the keyword pdu then one of the following Interface keywords and slot/port or number information: Defaults Disabled.
protocol gvrp — access GVRP protocol. garp timers Set the intervals (in milliseconds) for sending GARP messages. Syntax garp timers {join | leave | leave-all} To return to the previous setting, use the no garp timers {join | leave | leave-all} command. Parameters join Enter the keyword join then the number of milliseconds to configure the join time. The range is from 100 to 147483647 milliseconds. The default is 200 milliseconds. NOTE: Designate the milliseconds in multiples of 100.
a Join message is not received before the Leave time expires, the GARP application entity removes the attribute information as requested. • Related Commands Leave All Timer — The Leave All timer starts when a GARP application entity starts. When this timer expires, the entity sends a Leave-all message so that other entities can reregister their attribute information. Then the Leave-all time begins again. show garp timers — displays the current GARP times.
forbidden Enter the keyword forbidden then the VLAN range in a comma-separated VLAN ID set. Defaults normal Command Modes CONFIGURATION-INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show config Display the global GVRP configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes CONFIGURATION-GVRP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. gvrp enable — enables GVRP on physical interfaces and LAGs. protocol gvrp — accesses the GVRP protocol. show garp timers Display the GARP timer settings for sending GARP messages.
show gvrp Display the GVRP configuration. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show gvrp [brief | interface] brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display a brief summary of the GVRP configuration. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
clear gvrp statistics Clear GVRP statistics on an interface. Syntax Parameters clear gvrp statistics {interface interface | summary} interface interface summary Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
LeaveIn Received: 0 Leave Empty Received: 0 Leave All Received: 40 Join Empty Transmitted: 156 Join In Transmitted: 0 Empty Transmitted: 0 Leave In Transmitted: 0 Leave Empty Transmitted: 0 Leave All Transmitted: 41 Invalid Messages/Attributes skipped: 0 Failed Registrations: 0 Dell# Related Commands show gvrp — displays the GVRP configuration. show vlan Display the global VLAN configuration.
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) 23 The Dell Networking OS supports IGMP snooping version 2 and 3 on all Dell Networking systems.
• Reports and Leaves are flooded by default to the uplink LAG irrespective of whether it is an mrouter port or not. IGMP Snooping Commands Dell Networking OS supports IGMP Snooping version 2 and 3 on all Dell Networking systems. Important Points to Remember for IGMP Snooping • Dell Networking OS supports version 1, version 2, and version 3 hosts.
debug ip igmp Enable debugging of IGMP packets. Syntax debug ip igmp [group address | interface] To disable IGMP debugging, enter the no ip igmp command. To disable all debugging, enter the undebug all command. Defaults Parameters Disabled group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP multicast group address in dotted decimal format. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and slot/port information: For a VLAN interface enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The access list accepted is an extended ACL. To block IGMP reports from hosts, on a per-interface basis based on the group address and source address that you specify in the access list, use this feature. ip igmp group-join-limit To limit the number of IGMP groups that can be joined in a second, use this feature.
Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds the router must wait to become the new querier. The range is from 60 to 300. The default is 125 seconds. Defaults 125 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator.
ip igmp query-max-resp-time Set the maximum query response time advertised in general queries. Syntax ip igmp query-max-resp-time seconds To return to the default values, use the no ip igmp query-max-resp-time command. Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds for the maximum response time. The range is from 1 to 25. The default is 10 seconds. Defaults 10 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information To enable IGMP snooping, enter this command. When you enable this command from CONFIGURATION mode, IGMP snooping enables on all VLAN interfaces (except the default VLAN). NOTE: Execute the no shutdown command on the VLAN interface for IGMP Snooping to function. ip igmp snooping fast-leave Enable IGMP snooping fast-leave for this VLAN.
ip igmp snooping flood This command controls the flooding behavior of unregistered multicast data packets. When flooding is disabled, unregistered multicast data traffic is forwarded to only multicast router ports in a VLAN. If there is no multicast router port in a VLAN, unregistered multicast data traffic is dropped. Syntax ip igmp snooping flood To disable the flooding, use the no ip igmp snooping flood command.
Usage Information This last-member-query-interval is also the interval between successive GroupSpecific Query messages. To change the last-member-query interval, use this command. ip igmp snooping mrouter Statically configure a VLAN member port as a multicast router interface. Syntax ip igmp snooping mrouter interface interface To delete a specific multicast router interface, use the no igmp snooping mrouter interface interface command.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN — (conf-if-vl-n) Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command enables the IGMP switch to send General Queries periodically.
show ip igmp groups View the IGMP groups. Syntax Parameters show ip igmp groups [group-address [detail] | detail | interface [group-address [detail]]] group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format to view information on that group only. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the interface type and slot/port information: For a VLAN interface enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094.
Field Description Mode Displays the IGMP version used. Uptime Displays the amount of time the group has been operational. Expires Displays the amount of time until the entry expires. Last Reporter Displays the IP address of the last host to be a member of the IGMP group. Member Ports Indicates the member ports of the port channel. If the port channel is VLT, an asterisk (*) after the port channel number indicates the port channel is locally down and that a remote VLT port is up.
Example Dell#show ip igmp interface Vlan 2 is up, line protocol is down Inbound IGMP access group is not set Interface IGMP group join rate limit is not set IGMP snooping is enabled on interface IGMP Snooping query interval is 60 seconds IGMP Snooping querier timeout is 125 seconds IGMP Snooping last member query response interval is 1000 ms IGMP snooping fast-leave is disabled on this interface IGMP snooping querier is disabled on this interface Vlan 3 is up, line protocol is down Inbound IGMP access grou
24 Interfaces This chapter defines the interface commands on the Aggregator switch. Basic Interface Commands The following commands are for Physical, Loopback, and Null interfaces. clear counters Clear the counters used in the show interfaces commands for VLANs, and physical interfaces, or selected ones. Syntax clear counters interface Defaults Without a specific interface specified, the command clears all interface counters.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM and added support to clear the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Dell#clear counters Clear counters on all interfaces [confirm] clear dampening Clear the dampening counters on all the interfaces or just the specified interface.
cx4-cable-length Configure the length of the cable to be connected to the selected CX4 port. Syntax Parameters [no] cx4-cable-length {long | medium | short} long | medium | short Defaults medium Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keyword that matches the cable length to be used at the selected port: • short = For 1-meter and 3-meter cable lengths. • medium = For 5-meter cable length. • long = For 10-meter and 15-meter cable lengths.
Dell(conf-if-0/5)#exit Dell(config)# Related Commands show config – displays the configuration of the selected interface. dampening Configure dampening on an interface. Syntax dampening [[[[half-life] [reuse-threshold]] [suppressthreshold]] [max-suppress-time]] To disable dampening, use the no dampening [[[[half-life] [reusethreshold]] [suppress-threshold]] [max-suppress-time]] command. Parameters half-life Enter the number of seconds after which the penalty is decreased.
• suppress-threshold should be greater than reuse-threshold • max-suppress-time should be at least 4 times half-life NOTE: You cannot apply dampening on an interface that is monitoring traffic for other interfaces. Example Dell(conf-if-te-3/2)#dampening 20 800 4500 120 Dell(conf-if-te-3/2)# Related Commands clear dampening — clears the dampening counters on all the interfaces or just the specified interface. show interfaces dampening — displays interface dampening information.
duplex (1000/10000 Interfaces) Configure duplex mode on any physical interfaces where the speed is set to 1000/10000. Syntax duplex {half | full} To return to the default setting, use the no duplex command. Parameters half Enter the keyword half to set the physical interface to transmit only in one direction. full Enter the keyword full to set the physical interface to transmit in both directions. Defaults Not configured.
Defaults tx on Enter the keywords tx on to send control frames from this port to the connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received. This is the default value on the send side. tx off Enter the keywords tx off so that flow control frames are not sent from this port to the connected device when a higher rate of traffic is received. • rx off • tx off Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Can’t configure Asymmetric flowcontrol when speed <1G, config ignored • The only configuration applicable to half duplex ports is rx off tx off. The following error is returned: Cannot configure Asymmetric flowcontrol when speed <1G, config ignored> • You cannot configure half duplex when the flow control configuration is on (default is rx on tx on).
Related Commands off on on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off on on on off off on on show running-config — displays the flow configuration parameters (non-default values only). interface Configure a physical interface on the switch. Syntax Parameters interface interface interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • Defaults Not configured.
Example Dell(conf)#interface tengig 0/1 Dell(conf-if-te-0/1)#exit# Related Commands interface port-channel — configures a port channel. interface vlan — configures a VLAN. interface loopback Configure a Loopback interface. Syntax interface loopback number To remove a loopback interface, use the no interface loopback number command. Parameters number Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter a number as the interface number.
Parameters slot/port Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter the keyword ManagementEthernet, then the slot number (0) and port number zero (0). Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4.(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator and M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information You cannot delete a Management port. The Management port is enabled by default (no shutdown).
Related Commands interface — configures a physical interface. interface loopback — configures a Loopback interface. interface port-channel — configures a port channel. interface vlan — configures a VLAN. ip unreachables — enables generation of internet control message protocol (ICMP) unreachable messages. interface range This command permits configuration of a range of interfaces to which subsequent commands are applied (bulk configuration).
Usage Information When creating an interface range, interfaces appear in the order they are entered; they are not sorted. The command verifies that interfaces are present (physical) or configured (logical). Important things to remember: Example-Bulk Configuration Warning Message • Bulk configuration is created if at least one interface is valid. • Non-existing interfaces are excluded from the bulk configuration with a warning message.
Dell(conf-if-range-te-0/1-5,vl-2-10,po-1-25)# no shutdown Dell(conf-if-range-te-0/1-5,vl-2-10,po-1-25)# Related commands show config (from INTERFACE RANGE mode) — Shows the bulk configuration interfaces. show interfaces status — Displays a summary of interface information. interface range macro (define) Defines a macro for an interface range and then saves the macro in the running configuration. Syntax Parameters define interface range macro name interface , interface , ...
Example (Single Range) This example shows how to define an interface range macro named test. Execute the show running-config command to display the macro definition.
interface vlan Configure a VLAN. Configure the default VLAN to enable Static or DCHP IP configuration. You can configure up to 4094 VLANs. Syntax interface vlan vlan-id To delete a VLAN, use the no interface vlan vlan-id command. Parameters vlan-id Enter 1 for the default VLAN. Enter a number as the VLAN identifier. The range is from 1 to 4096. Defaults Not configured, except for the default VLAN, which is configured as VLAN 1.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information If you configure interface type as CR4 with auto-negotiation enabled, also configure CR4 with auto-negotiation. Many DAC cable link issues are resolved by setting the interface type as CR4. Related Commands interface — configures a physical interface.
load-balance By default, Dell Networking OS uses an IP 4-tuple (IP SA, IP DA, Source Port, and Destination Port) to distribute IP traffic over members of a Port Channel as well as equal-cost paths. To designate another method to balance traffic over Port Channel members, use the load-balance command.
into consideration when doing hash computations. This option is disabled by default. Defaults IP 4-tuple (IP SA, IP DA, Source Port, Destination Port) Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
mac [source-mac | source-port-id | source-module-id | dest-mac | destport-id | destmodule-id | vlan | ethertype | source-destmac ] tunnel [ipv4-overipv4 | ipv4-overgre-ipv4 | macin-mac] • dest-port-id — Use dest-port-id field in hash calculation. • dest-module-id — Use dest-module-id field in hash calculation. • protocol — Use IPv4 protocol field in hash calculation. • vlan — Use vlan field in hash calculation. • L4-source-port — Use IPv4 L4-source-port field in hash calculation.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. monitor interface Monitor counters on a single interface or all interfaces on a line card. The screen is refreshed every five seconds and the CLI prompt disappears. Syntax monitor interface [interface] To disable monitoring and return to the CLI prompt, press the q key.
Example (Single Interface) Key Description b Change the counters displayed from Packets on the interface to Bytes. r Change the [delta] column from change in the number of packets/bytes in the last interval to rate per second. l Change the view to the next interface on the line card, or if in line card mode, the next line card in the chassis. a Change the view to the previous interface on the line card, or if in line card mode, the previous line card in the chassis.
Parameters value Enter a maximum frame size in bytes. The range is from 594 to 9252. The default is 1554. Defaults 1554 Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Layer 2 Overhead Link MTU and IP MTU Delta Ethernet (untagged) 18 bytes VLAN Tag 22 bytes Untagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 22 bytes Tagged Packet with VLAN-Stack Header 26 bytes negotiation auto Enable auto-negotiation on an interface. Syntax negotiation auto To disable auto-negotiation, enter no negotiation auto command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
User Information Both sides of the link must have auto-negotiation enabled or disabled for the link to come up. The following details the possible speed and auto-negotiation combinations for a line between two 10/100/1000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the interface command shown in the following example. This example sets a port as hybrid, makes the port a tagged member of VLAN 20, and an untagged member of VLAN 10, which becomes the native VLAN of the port.
i - Internal untagged, I - Internal tagged, v - VLT untagged, V - VLT tagged Name: TenGigabitEthernet 3/2 802.1QTagged: Hybrid Vlan membership: Q Vlans U 20 T 10 Native VlanId: 20.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The output of the show interfaces command displays the configured rate interval, along with the collected traffic data. Related Commands show interfaces — displays information on physical and virtual interfaces. remote-fault-signaling rx Brings the interface up or down when a Remote Fault Indication (RFI) error is detected.
Example Dell(conf-if)#show conf ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 1/7 no ip address switchport no shutdown Dell(conf-if)# show config (from INTERFACE RANGE mode) Display the bulk configured interfaces (group). Syntax show config Command Modes CONFIGURATION INTERFACE (conf-if-range) Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information Use this show interfaces command for details on a specific interface. Use the show interfaces stack-unit command for details on all interfaces on the designated stack unit. On the I/O Aggregator, the show interface output displays incorrect rate information details over time for link monitoring when the rate-interval is configured for 5 seconds.
Line Description • Number of packets and bytes into the interface • Number of packets with IP headers and VLAN tagged headers. NOTE: The sum of the number of packets may not be as expected since a VLAN tagged IP packet counts as both a VLAN packet and an IP packet. • Packet size and the number of those packets inbound to the interface • Number of symbol errors, runts, giants, and throttles packets: – symbol errors = number packets containing bad data.
Line Description displayed in bits, packets per second, and percent of line rate. Time since... Elapsed time since the last interface status change (hh:mm:ss format). Usage Information The interface counter “over 1023-byte pkts” does not increment for packets in the range 9216 > x <1023. The Management port is enabled by default (no shutdown). If necessary, use the ip address command to assign an IP address to the Management port.
show interfaces configured Displays any interface with a non-default configuration. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show interfaces configured • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Example (ManagementEther net) show interfaces dampening Display interface dampening information.
NOTE: This command also enables you to view information corresponding to a range of ports. However, for Open Networking (ON) platforms the notation for specifying port range in the command is different from how you specify in non-ON platforms. For non-ON platforms, you can specify multiple ports as slot/port-range. For example, if you want to display information corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces interface-type 1/1 - 4.
show interfaces description Display the descriptions configured on the interface. Syntax Parameters show interfaces [interface] description interface Enter one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For the management interface on the stack unit enter the keyword ManagementEthernet followed by the slot/port information. The slot range is 0-0 and the port range is 0.
Example Field Description Status States whether the interface is enabled (up) or disabled (administratively down). Protocol States whether IP is enabled (up) or disabled (down) on the interface. Description Displays the description (if any) manually configured for the interface.
Flowcontrol rx off tx off ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 5d5h24m Queueing strategy: fifo Input Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over 511-byte pkts, 0 over 1023-byte pkts 0 Multicasts, 0 Broadcasts 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles 0 CRC, 0 overrun, 0 discarded Output Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes, 0 underruns 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte
Supported Modes Command History Example All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM and added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
NOTE: This command also enables you to view information corresponding to a range of ports. stack-unit unit-id Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege • For physical interfaces, you can specify multiple ports as slot/port-range. For example, if you want to display information corresponding to all ports between 1 and 4, specify the port range as show interfaces interface-type 1/1 - 4. • For port–channel interfaces, you can specify multiple ports as port-range.
802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Q Vlans T 1001 Name: TenGigabitEthernet 2/11 802.1QTagged: True Vlan membership: Q Vlans T 1001 Dell# Related Commands show ip interface — displays Layer 3 information about the interfaces. show interfaces transceiver Display the physical status and operational status of an installed transceiver. The output also displays the transceiver’s serial number.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM and added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show interfaces transceiver command shown in the following example. 656 Line Description Rx Power measurement type Output depends on the vendor, typically either “Average” or “OMA” (Receiver optical modulation amplitude).
Interfaces Line Description RX Power High Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Temp Low Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Voltage Low Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. Bias Low Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+. TX Power Low Warning threshold Factory-defined setting. Value can differ between SFP and SFP+.
Line Description Rate Select state This is the digital state of the SFP rate_select input pin. RS state This is the reserved digital state of the pin AS(1) per SFF-8079 and RS(1) per SFF-8431. Tx Disable state If the admin status of the port is down then this flag is set to true. Temperature High Alarm Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current voltage value displayed above.
Example Line Description Tx Bias Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the present Tx bias current value displayed above. Tx Power Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Tx power value displayed above. Rx Power Low Warning Flag This can be either true or false, depending on the Current Rx power value displayed above. Dell#show interfaces tengigabitethernet 1/1 transceiver SFP is present.
SFP 1 RX Power Low Warning threshold = 0.016mW =================================== SFP 1 Temperature = 39.930C SFP 1 Voltage = 3.293V SFP 1 Tx Bias Current = 6.894mA SFP 1 Tx Power = 0.328mW SFP 1 Rx Power = 0.
Example Dell(conf-if-range-te-0/6)#show range interface tengigabitethernet 0/6 Dell(conf-if-range-te-0/6)# Related Commands interface — configures a physical interface on the switch. show ip interface — displays Layer 3 information about the interfaces. show interfaces — displays information on a specific physical interface or virtual interface. shutdown Disable an interface. Syntax shutdown To activate an interface, use the no shutdown command. Defaults The interface is disabled.
show ip interface — Displays the interface routing status. Add the keyword brief to display a table of interfaces and their status. speed (for 1000/10000/auto interfaces) Set the speed for 1000/10000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces. Set both sides of a link to the same speed (1000/10000) or to auto or the link may not come up. Syntax speed {1000 | 10000 | auto} To return to the default setting, use the no speed {1000 | 10000 | auto} command.
negotiation auto — enables or disables auto-negotiation on an interface. If you use an active optical cable (AOC), you can convert the QSFP+ port to a 10 Gigabit SFP+ port or 1 Gigabit SFP port. You can use the speed command to enable the required speed. stack-unit portmode Split a single 40G port into 4-10G ports on the switch. Syntax Parameters stack-unit stack-unit-number port number portmode quad stack-unit Enter the stack member unit identifier of the stack member to reset. The range is 0 to 5.
The system must be reloaded after issuing the CLI for the change to take effect. wavelength Set the wavelength for tunable 10–Gigabit SFP+ optics. Syntax wavelength To retain the existing wavelength, use the no wavelength command. Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.
Because each port can be assigned to only one Port Channel, and each Port Channel must have at least one port, some of those nominally available Port Channels might have no function because they could have no members if there are not enough ports installed. NOTE: For information about Dell Networking OS link aggregation control protocol (LACP) for dynamic LAGs, refer to the Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) chapter.
When an interface is removed from a Port Channel with the no channel-member command, the interface reverts to its configuration prior to joining the Port Channel. An interface can belong to only one Port Channel. You can add up to 16 interfaces to a Port Channel on the switch. The interfaces can be located on different line cards but must be the same physical type and speed (for example, all 10-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces).
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Example Dell(conf)#port-channel failover-group Dell(conf-po-failover-grp)#group 1 port-channel 1 port-channel 2 Dell(conf-po-failover-grp)# Related Commands port-channel failover-group — accesses PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP mode to configure a LAG failover group. show interfaces port-channel — displays information on configured Port Channel groups.
A Port Channel can contain both 100/1000 interfaces and GE interfaces. Based on the first interface configured in the Port Channel and enabled, the Dell Networking OS determines if the Port Channel uses 100 Mb/s or 1000 Mb/s as the common speed. For more information, refer to . If the line card is in a Jumbo mode chassis, you can also configure the mtu and ip mtu commands.
links before it can be declared as up. For example, if the required minimum is four, and only three are up, the LAG is considered down. port-channel failover-group To configure a LAG failover group, access PORT-CHANNEL FAILOVER-GROUP mode. Syntax port-channel failover-group To remove all LAG failover groups, use the no port-channel failover-group command. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM.
Example Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell(conf-if-po-1)#show config ! interface Port-channel 1 no ip address shutdown Dell(conf-if-po-1)# show interfaces port-channel Display information on configured Port Channel groups. Syntax Parameters show interfaces port-channel [channel-number] [brief| description] channel-number For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword portchannel followed by a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
Example (EtherScale) Interfaces Field Description Port-Channel 1... Displays the status of LAG. In the Example, the status of the LAG, LAG fate-sharing group (“Failover-group”) is listed. Hardware is... Displays the interface’s hardware information and its assigned MAC address. Port-channel is part... Indicates whether the LAG is part of a LAG fate-sharing group (“Failover-group”). Internet address... States whether an IP address is assigned to the interface.
00:1e:c9:f1:00:05 Interface index is 1107755009 Minimum number of links to bring Port-channel up is 1 Internet address is not set Mode of IP Address Assignment : NONE DHCP Client-ID :lag1001ec9f10005 MTU 12000 bytes, IP MTU 1500 bytes LineSpeed auto Members in this channel: ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00 Last clearing of "show interface" counters 03:28:00 Queueing strategy: fifo Input Statistics: 0 packets, 0 bytes 0 64-byte pkts, 0 over 64-byte pkts, 0 over 127-byte pkts 0 over 255-byte pkts, 0 over
Example Dell#show int po bri Codes: L - LACP Port-channel O - OpenFlow Controller Port-channel A - Auto Port-channel I - Internally Lagged LAG Mode Status Uptime Ports L 128 L3 down 00:00:00 Dell# To indicate the LACP fallback, Internally lagged is added to the list. When the LAG auto-configures itself, the LAG status describes as ‘I’. Related Commands show lacp — displays the LACP matrix.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The interface must be enabled to run the test or an error message is generated: Related Commands show tdr — Displays the results of the TDR test. show tdr Displays the TDR test results.
Status Definition Status: Impedance Mismatch There is an impedance mismatch in the cables. Example Related Commands tdr-cable-test — Runs the TDR test. Enhanced Validation of Interface Ranges You can avoid specifying spaces between the range of interfaces, separated by commas, that you configure by using the interface range command. For example, if you enter a list of interface ranges, such as interface range fo 2/0-1,te 10/0,fa 0/0, this configuration is considered valid.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#debug ip udp-helper UDP helper debugging is on 01:20:22: Pkt rcvd on Te 4/1 with IP DA (0xffffffff) will be sent on Te 4/2 Te 4/3 Vlan 3 01:44:54: Pkt rcvd on Te 5/1 is handed over for DHCP processing. Related Commands ip udp-broadcast-address — configures a UDP IP address for broadcast.
Related Commands debug ip udp-helper — enables debug and displays the debug information on a console. show ip udp-helper — displays the configured UDP helpers on all interfaces. ip udp-helper udp-port Enable the UDP broadcast feature on an interface either for all UDP ports or a specified list of UDP ports. Syntax ip udp-helper udp-port [udp-port-list] To disable the UDP broadcast on a port, use the no ip udp-helper udp-port [udp-port-list] command.
show ip udp-helper Display the configured UDP helpers on all interfaces. Syntax show ip udp-helper Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
• show interfaces stack-unit • show interfaces port-channel • show interfaces status • show interfaces switchport • show vlan • shutdown • speed (for 1000/10000 interfaces) Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands The following commands configure and monitor virtual local area networks (VLANs). VLANs are a virtual interface and use many of the same commands as physical interfaces. You can configure an IP address only on the default VLAN. FTP, TFTP, ACLs, and SNMP are not supported on a VLAN.
Command History Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. clear mac-address-table dynamic Clear the MAC address table of all MAC addresses learned dynamically. Syntax Parameters clear mac-address-table dynamic {interface tengigabitethernet slot/port-id} interface Enter the keyword interface range and one of the interfaces — slot/port, port-channel or VLAN number. Select the range of interfaces for bulk configuration.
Command History Related commands Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. show vlan — Displays VLAN configuration. feature fc Enables the Fibre channel communication via the NPG functionality. Syntax feature fc Command Modes CONFIGURATION Default Enabled Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Command History Version Description 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN 2210S Aggregator and M I/O Aggregator.
Supported Modes Command History All Modes Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The delta column displays changes since the last screen refresh. The following are the monitor command menu options. Example (Single Interface) Key Description systest-3 Displays the host name assigned to the system. monitor time Displays the amount of time since the monitor interface command was entered.
Over 1023B packets: Error statistics: Input underruns: Input giants: Input throttles: Input CRC: Input IP checksum: Input overrun: Output underruns: Output throttles: m l T q Example (All Interfaces) - 2781 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Change mode Page up Increase refresh interval Quit 0 pps 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 pps pps pps pps pps pps pps pps c - Clear screen a - Page down t - Decrease refresh interval systest-3 Monitor time: 00:01:31 Refresh Intvl.
Parameters vlan-name Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter up to 32 characters as the name of the VLAN. Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This CLI applies only to the Default VLAN. To display information about a named VLAN, enter the show vlan command with the name parameter or the show interfaces description command.
Command History Example Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Dell(conf-if-vl-1)#show config ! interface Vlan 1 description a no ip address mtu 2500 shutdown Dell(conf-if-vl-1)# show config (from PROTOCOL LLDP mode) Displays the LLDP configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes PROTOCOL LLDP Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History id vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword id followed by a number from 1 to 4094. Only information on the VLAN specified is displayed name vlan-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword name followed by the name configured for the VLAN. Only information on the VLAN named is displayed. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
1 Inactive a Dell# Example (Brief) Dell#show vlan brief VLAN Name STG MAC Aging Address ---- -------------------------------- ---- -------------------------1 0 0 unassigned 2 0 0 unassigned 20 0 0 unassigned 1002 0 0 unassigned Dell# Example (Using a VLAN Name) Dellconf)#interface vlan 222 Dell(conf-if-vl-222)#name test Dell(conf-if-vl-222)#do show vlan name test Codes: * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs Q: U - Untagged, T - Tagged x - Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged G - GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-stack NUM St
Supported Modes Command History All Modes Version Description 9.10(0.0) Added support for fanned–out 1 Gigabit SFP port. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command is found on the 1000/10000 Base-T Ethernet interfaces. When you enable auto, the system performs and automatic discovery to determine the optics installed and configure the appropriate speed.
vlan tagged (CMC) Add a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as a tagged interface. Syntax vlan tagged [vlan-id] To remove a tagged interface from a VLAN, use the no vlan tagged vlan-id command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. Defaults All interfaces in Layer 2 mode are untagged. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Related Commands interface vlan — Configures a VLAN. vlan untagged — Specifies which interfaces in a VLAN are untagged. vlan untagged (CMC) Add a Layer 2 interface to a VLAN as an untagged interface. Syntax vlan untagged [vlan-id] To remove a untagged interface from a VLAN, use the no vlan untagged [vlan-id] command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. Defaults All interfaces in Layer 2 mode are untagged.
vlan untagged 4094 ! port-channel-protocol LACP port-channel 1 mode active ! protocol lldp advertise management-tlv system-name dcbx port-role auto-downstream no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-0/2)# Related Commands interface vlan — Configures a VLAN. vlan tagged — Specifies which interfaces in a VLAN are tagged.
25 IPv4 Routing The aggregator supports both IPv4 and IPv6 routing and these are used only for the management purpose. This chapter describes the IPv4 related commands.
output} interface option with the mac-addresstable static command. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Added the support for association of an IP address with multicast MAC address on the MXL platform. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
arp retries Set the number of ARP retries in case the system does not receive an ARP reply in response to an ARP request. Syntax arp retries number Parameters number Defaults 5 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the number of retries. The range is from 5 to 20. The default is 5. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Retries are 20 seconds apart.
clear arp-cache Clear the dynamic ARP entries from a specific interface or optionally delete (no-refresh) ARP entries from the content addressable memory (CAM). Syntax Parameters clear arp-cache [interface | ip ip-address] [no-refresh] interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. The slot range is from 0 to 1 and the port range is 0.
Parameters name Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the name of the host to delete. Enter * to delete all host table entries. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ip fib stack-unit Clear all forwarding information base (FIB) entries in the specified stack unit (use this command with caution, refer to Usage Information.
clear ip route Clear one or all routes in the routing table. Syntax Parameters clear ip route {* | ip-address mask} * Enter an asterisk (*) to clear all learned IP routes. ip-address mask Enter a specific IP address and mask in dotted decimal format to clear that IP address from the routing table. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
debug arp View information on ARP transactions. Syntax debug arp [interface] [count value] To stop debugging ARP transactions, use the no debug arp command. Parameters interface count value Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information.
Supported Modes Command History Example All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. FTOS#debug ip dhcp 00:12:21 : %RELAY-I-PACKET: BOOTP REQUEST (Unicast) received at interface 113.3.3.17 BOOTP Request, hops = 0, XID = 0xbf05140f, secs = 0, hwaddr = 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C, giaddr = 0.0.0.0 00:12:21 : %RELAY-I-BOOTREQUEST: Forwarded BOOTREQUEST for 00:60:CF:20:7B:8C to 14.4.4.
Parameters interface count value Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For the management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet then the slot/port information. The slot range is 0 and the port range is 0. • For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
Parameters access-group name Enter the keywords access-group then the access list name (maximum 16 characters) to limit the debug output based on the defined rules in the ACL. count value (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count then the count value. The range is from 1 to 65534. The default is Infinity.
Example Field Description UDP src= Displays the source and destination ports for the UDP packets. ICMP type= Displays the ICMP type and code. IP Fragment States that it is a fragment and displays the unique number identifying the fragment (Ident) and the offset (in 8-byte units) of this fragment (fragment offset) from the beginning of the original datagram. IP: s=10.1.2.62 (local), d=10.1.2.
• Transmission Control Protocol (tcp) but not on the rst, syn, or urg bits • User Datagram Protocol (udp) In the case of ambiguous access control list rules, the debug ip packet access-control command is disabled. A message appears identifying the error (refer to the Example below).
ip directed-broadcast Enables the interface to receive directed broadcast packets. Syntax ip directed-broadcast To disable the interface from receiving directed broadcast packets, use the no ip directed-broadcast command. Defaults Disabled (that is, the interface does not receive directed broadcast packets) Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
the name is not resolved, the software goes through the list of names configured with the ip domain-list command to find a match. To enable dynamic resolution of hosts, use the following steps: • specify a domain name server with the ip name-server command • enable DNS with the ip domain-lookup command To view current bindings, use the show hosts command. To view a DNS-related configuration, use the show running-config resolve command. Related Commands ip domain-name — specifies a DNS server.
ip domain-name Configure one domain name for the switch. Syntax ip domain-name name To remove the domain name, use the no ip domain-name command. Parameters name Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter one domain name to be used to complete unqualified names (that is, incomplete domain names that cannot be resolved). Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You can add multiple DHCP servers by entering the ip helper-address command multiple times. If multiple servers are defined, an incoming request is sent simultaneously to all configured servers and the reply is forwarded to the DHCP client.
Related Commands ip helper-address — specifies the destination broadcast or host address for DHCP server requests. show running-config — displays the current configuration and changes from the default values. ip host Assign a name and IP address to be used by the host-to-IP address mapping table. Syntax ip host name ip-address To remove an IP host, use the no ip host name [ip-address] command. Parameters name Enter a text string to associate with one IP address.
NOTE: When you configure the capability to enable the loopback IP address to be sent for easy debugging and diagnosis (IP addresses of the devices for which the ICMP source interface is configured), the source IP address of the outgoing ICMP error message is modified, although the packets are not sent out using the configured interface.
ipv6 icmp source-interface Enable the ICMP error and unreachable messages to be sent with the source interface IP address, such as the loopback address, instead of the hops of the preceding devices along the network path to be used for easy debugging and diagnosis of network disconnections and reachability problems with IPv6 packets.
(ECMP) links, you cannot effectively and optimally use the traceroute and ping applications to examine the network reachability and identify any broken links for diagnostic purposes. In such cases, if the reply that is obtained from each hop on the network path contains the IP address of the adjacent, neighboring interface from which the packet is received, it is difficult to employ the ping and traceroute utilities.
ip name-server Enter up to six IPv4 addresses of name servers. The order you enter the addresses determines the order of their use. Syntax ip name-server ipv4-address [ipv4-address2...ipv4-address6] To remove a name server, use the no ip name-server ip-address command. Parameters ipv4-address Enter the IPv4 address, in dotted decimal format, of the name server to be used. ipv4-address2... ipv4-address6 (OPTIONAL) Enter up five more IPv4 addresses, in dotted decimal format, of name servers to be used.
Related Commands show ip interface — displays the interface routing status and configuration. ip route Assign a static route to the switch. Syntax ip route destination mask {ip-address | interface [ip-address]} [distance] To delete a specific static route, use the no ip route destination mask {address | interface [ip-address]} command. To delete all routes matching a certain route, use the no ip route destination mask command.
Related Commands • When the interface comes up, Dell Networking OS re-installs the route. • When recursive resolution is “broken,” Dell Networking OS withdraws the route. • When recursive resolution is satisfied, Dell Networking OS re-installs the route. show ip route — views the switch routing table. ip source-route Enable the system to forward IP packets with source route information in the header.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL platform. Usage Information You can configure the amount of time for which the device must wait before it attempts to establish a TCP connection. Using this capability, you can limit the wait times for TCP connection requests.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. management route Configure a static route that points to the Management interface or a forwarding router. Syntax Parameters management route {ipv4-address | ipv6–address}/mask{forwardingrouter-address | managementethernet} {ipv4-address | ipv6–address}/ mask Enter an IPv4 address (A.B.C.
Parameters interface interface • For the Management interface, enter the keyword managementethernet followed by the slot/port information. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan followed by a number from 1 to 4094. dynamic (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword dynamic to view dynamic entries. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of ARP entries.
Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet Internet 5.5.5.10 10.1.2.4 10.10.10.4 10.16.127.53 10.16.134.254 133.33.33.4 1 1 1 20 1 00:01:e8:44:99:55 00:01:e8:d5:9e:e2 00:01:e8:d5:9e:e2 00:01:e8:d5:9e:e2 00:01:e8:d5:9e:e2 00:01:e8:d5:9e:e2 Ma Ma Ma Ma Ma 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 0/0 Vl 10 - CP CP CP CP CP CP Usage Information The following describes the show arp summary command shown in the following example.
show hosts View the host table and DNS configuration. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show hosts • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show hosts command in the following example. Field Description Default domain... Displays the domain name (if configured). Name/address lookup...
Example Related Commands Field Description Address Displays the IP addresses assigned to the host. Dell#show hosts Default domain is not set Name/address lookup uses static Name servers are not set Host Flags TTL Type -------- -------- ---ks (perm, OK) IP 4200-1 (perm, OK) IP 1230-3 (perm, OK) IP ZZr (perm, OK) IP Z10-3 (perm, OK) IP Dell# mappings Address ------2.2.2.2 192.68.69.2 192.68.99.2 192.71.18.2 192.71.23.1 traceroute — views the DNS resolution. ip host — configures a host.
summary Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a table listing route prefixes and the total number routes which can be entered in to CAM. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip cam command shown in the following example.
10.10.10.10 Dell# 0 0 1 1 0 00:00:00:00:00:00 3f01 CP Usage Information The following describes the show ip cam ecmp-group command shown in the following example. Example (ECMPGroup) Field Description Prefix Length Displays the prefix-length or mask for the IP address configured on the linecard 0 port pipe 0. Current Use Displays the number of routes currently configured for the corresponding prefix or mask on the linecard 0 port pipe 0.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address of the network destination to view only information on that destination. Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Enter the mask in slash prefix format (/X). longer-prefixes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords longer-prefixes to view all routes with a common prefix. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view the total number of prefixes in the FIB.
show ip interface View IP-related information on all interfaces. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip interface [interface | brief] [configuration] interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For the Management interface, enter the keyword ManagementEthernet followed by zero (0). • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel followed by a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
Example Lines Description Proxy ARP... States whether proxy ARP is enabled on the interface. Split horizon... States whether split horizon for RIP is enabled on the interface. Poison Reverse... States whether poison for RIP is enabled on the interface ICMP redirects... States if ICMP redirects are sent. ICMP unreachables... States if ICMP unreachable messages are sent.
show ip management-route View the IP addresses assigned to the Management interface. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show ip management-route [all | connected | summary | static] all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to view all IP addresses assigned to all Management interfaces on the switch. connected (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword connected to view only routes directly connected to the Management interface.
pipe-number Enter the number of the Port-Pipe number. The range is from 0 to 0. ip-address mask [longer-prefix] (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address and mask of a route to CAM entries for that route only. Enter the keyword longer-prefixes to view routes with a common prefix. Command Modes Supported Modes Command History detail Enter the keyword detail to display the group index ID used by the ecmp routes int he CAM.
Example Field Description V Id Displays the VLAN ID. If the entry is 0, the entry is not part of a VLAN. Mac Addr Displays the next-hop router’s MAC address. Port Displays the egress interface. Use the second half of the entry to determine the interface. For example, in the entry 17cl CP, the CP is the pertinent portion. • CP = control processor • Fo= 40 Gigabit Ethernet interface • Te = 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface Dell#show ip multicast-cam stack-unit 0 port-set 0 10.10.10.
Distance: external 20 internal 200 local 200 Neighbor(s): Address : 20.20.20.2 Filter-list in : foo Route-map in : foo Weight : 0 Address : 5::6 Weight : 0 Dell# show ip route View information, including how they were learned, about the IP routes on the switch.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The following describes the show ip route all command in the following example.
Dell#show ip route static Destination Gateway Last Change --------------------------*S 0.0.0.0/0 via 10.10.91.9, Te 1/2 3d2h Dell# Dist/Metric ----------1/0 show ip route list Display IP routes in an IP prefix list. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show ip route list prefix-list prefix-list • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Enter the name of a configured prefix list. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Related Commands ip prefix-list — enters CONFIGURATION-IP PREFIX-LIST mode and configures a prefix list. show ip prefix-list summary — displays a summary of the configured prefix lists. show ip route summary View a table summarizing the IP routes in the switch. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip route summary • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Intra-area: 762 Inter-area: 1 External-1: 600 External-2: 5 Total 1388 2 Total 1388 active route(s) using 222440 bytes Total 2 non-active route(s) using 128 bytes Dell> Related Commands show ip route — displays information about the routes found in the switch. show ip traffic View IP, ICMP, UDP, TCP and ARP traffic statistics. Syntax show ip traffic Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Keyword Definition ...encapsulation failed Counts packets which could not be forwarded due to ARP resolution failure. The system sends an arp request prior to forwarding an IP packet. If a reply is not received, the system repeats the request three times. These packets are counted in encapsulation failed. Rcvd: ...short packets The number of bytes in the packet are too small. ...bad length The length of the packet was not correct. ...
quench 0 parameter, 0 timestamp, 0 info request, 0 other Sent: 0 redirects, 1 unreachable, 0 echo, 0 echo reply 0 mask requests, 0 mask replies, 0 quench, 0 timestamp 0 info reply, 0 time exceeded, 0 parameter problem UDP statistics: Rcvd: 2938110 total, 14 checksum errors, 1 no port 0 short packets, 0 bad length, 1883908 no port broadcasts, 0 socket full Sent: 329731 total, 1883908 forwarded broadcasts --More-- show tcp statistics View information on TCP traffic through the switch.
Field Description 17 dup... Displays the number of duplicate packets and bytes received. 0 partially... Displays the number of partially duplicated packets and bytes received. 7 out-of-order... Displays the number of packets and bytes received out of order. 0 packets with data after window Displays the number of packets and bytes received that exceed the switch’s window size. 0 packets after close Displays the number of packet received after the TCP connection was closed.
Example Dell#show tcp statistics Rcvd: 9849 Total, 0 no port 0 checksum error, 0 bad offset, 0 too short 5735 packets (7919 bytes) in sequence 20 dup packets (2 bytes) 0 partially dup packets (0 bytes) 1 out-of-order packets (0 bytes) 0 packets ( 0 bytes) with data after window 0 packets after close 0 window probe packets, 0 window update packets 0 dup ack packets, 0 ack packets with unsend data 6671 ack packets (152813 bytes) Sent: 6778 Total, 0 urgent packets 7 control packets 6674 data packets (152822 b
Internet Protocol Security (IPSec) 26 Internet protocol security (IPSec) is an end-to-end security scheme for securing IP communications by authenticating and encrypting all packets in a session. Use IPSec between hosts, gateways, or hosts and gateways. IPSec uses a series of protocol functions to achieve information security: • Authentication Headers (AH) — Connectionless integrity and origin authentication for IP packets.
To delete a transform set, use the no crypto ipsec transform-set name {ah-authentication {md5|sha1|null} | esp-authentication {md5| sha1|null} | esp-encryption {3des|cbc|des|null}} command. Parameters name Enter the name for the transform set. ah-authentication Enter the keywords ah-authentication then the transform type of operation to apply to traffic. The transform type represents the encryption or authentication applied to traffic.
Usage Information Example • Both sides of the link must specify the same transform set. • You can create up to 64 transform sets. Dell(conf)#int ten 0/4 Dell(conf-if-te-0/4)#ipv6 address 200:1::/64 eui64 Dell(conf)#int ten 0/6 Dell(conf-if-te-0/6)#ipv6 address 801:10::/64 eui64 crypto ipsec policy Create a crypto policy used by ipsec. Syntax crypto ipsec policy name seq-num ipsec-manual To delete a crypto policy entry, use the no crypto ipsec policy name seqnum ipsec-manual command.
To remove the management traffic crypto policy, use the no management crypto-policy name command. Parameters name Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the name for the crypto policy. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. match Match a sequence number to the transmission control protocol (TCP)/user datagram protocol (UDP) packets.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information UDP is not supported. Only TCP 23 telnet and 21 FTP are supported. Example Dell(conf-crypto-policy)#match Dell(conf-crypto-policy)#match Dell(conf-crypto-policy)#match Dell(conf-crypto-policy)#match Dell(conf-crypto-policy)#match 23 Dell(conf-crypto-policy)#match 1.1.1.2 /32 0 Dell(conf-crypto-policy)#match 21 Dell(conf-crypto-policy)#match 1.1.1.
Defaults none Command Modes CONF-CRYPTO-POLICY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Usage Information Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. • This command is only available in the ipsec-manual model. • The key information entry is associated with the global method for enabling clear text or encrypted display in the running config. show crypto ipsec transform-set Display the transform set configuration.
Parameters name Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Enter the name for the crypto policy set. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
To delete a transform set from the crypto policy, use the no transform-set transform-set-name command. Parameters transform-setname Enter the name for the crypto policy transform set. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIG-CRYPTO-POLICY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
IPv6 Access Control Lists (IPv6 ACLs) 27 IPv6 ACLs and IPv6 Route Map commands are supported on Dell Networking switch. NOTE: For IPv4 ACL commands, refer to the Access Control Lists (ACL) chapter. Important Points to Remember • Certain platforms require manual CAM usage space allotment. For more information, refer to the cam-acl (Configuration) command. • Egress IPv6 ACL and IPv6 ACL on the Loopback interface is not supported. • Reference to an empty ACL permits any traffic.
l2acl 1-10 ipv4acl 1-10 ipv6acl 0-10 ipv4qos 1-10 l2qos 1-10 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History • L3 QoS (ipv4qos): 1 • L2 QoS (l2qos): 1 Allocate space to support IPv6 ACLs. Enter all of the profiles and a range. Enter the CAM profile name then the amount to be allotted. The total space allocated must equal 13. The ipv6acl range must be a factor of 2. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information For the new settings to take effect, save the new CAM settings to the startupconfig (write-mem or copy run start), then reload the system. The total amount of space allowed is 16 FP Blocks. System flow requires three blocks and these blocks cannot be reallocated. When configuring space for IPv6 ACLs, the total number of Blocks must equal 13.
ospfv3 Specify that this ACL is for OSPFv3 control plane traffic Defaults All access lists contain an implicit “deny any”; that is, if no match occurs, the packet is dropped. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for CoPP for OSPFv3 on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Parameters 750 • Use the no seq sequence-number command syntax if you know the filter’s sequence number • Use the no permit {ipv6-protocol-number | icmp | ipv6 | tcp | udp} command ip-protocolnumber Enter an IPv6 protocol number. The range is from 0 to 255. icmp Enter the keyword icmp to filter internet Control Message Protocol version 6. ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to filter any internet Protocol version 6. tcp Enter the keyword tcp to filter the Transmission Control protocol.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ACCESS-LIST Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.3(0.0) Added support for logging of ACLs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. permit icmp To allow all or specific internet control message protocol (ICMP) messages, configure a filter.
the message type. The range is from 0 to 255 for ICMP type and from 0 to 255 for ICMP code. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to count packets the filter processes. byte (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword byte to count bytes the filter processes. log (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword log to enable the triggering of ACL log messages.
If ACL logging is stopped because the configured threshold is exceeded, it is reenabled after the logging interval period elapses. ACL logging is supported for standard and extended IPv4 ACLs, IPv6 ACLs, and MAC ACLs. You can configure ACL logging only on ACLs that are applied to ingress interfaces; you cannot enable logging for ACLs that are associated with egress interfaces.
iscsiOptAcl ipv4pbr vrfv4Acl Openflow fedgovacl : : : : : 0 0 0 0 F3940 -- stack-unit 0 -Current Settings(in block sizes) 1 block = 128 entries L2Acl : 2 Ipv4Acl : 4 Ipv6Acl : 4 Ipv4Qos : 2 L2Qos : 1 L2PT : 0+F394 IpMacAcl : 0 VmanQos : 0 VmanDualQos : 0 EcfmAcl : 0 FcoeAcl : 0 iscsiOptAcl : 0 ipv4pbr : 0 vrfv4Acl : 0 Openflow : 0 fedgovacl : 0 Dell# Related Commands cam-acl — configures CAM profiles to support IPv6 ACLs. show cam-acl-egress Show information on FP groups allocated for egress ACLs.
L2Acl Ipv4Acl Ipv6Acl Related Commands Current Settings(in block sizes) : 1 : 1 : 2 cam-acl — configures CAM profiles to support IPv6 ACLs.
28 IPv6 Basics This chapter describes IPv6 basic commands. clear ipv6 fib Clear (refresh) all forwarding information base (FIB) entries on a linecard or stack unit. Syntax Parameters clear ipv6 fib linecard slot | stack-unit unit-number slot Enter the slot number to clear the FIB for a linecard. unit-number Enter the stack member number. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ipv6 mld_host Clear the IPv6 MLD host counters and reset the elapsed time. Syntax clear ipv6 mld_host Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
to create a new address. If there are no remaining prefixes, the software waits to receive a new prefix from the RA. • If auto-configuration is enabled, all IPv6 addresses on that management interface are auto-configured. Manual and auto-configurations are not supported on a single management interface. • Removing auto-configuration removes all auto-configured IPv6 addresses and the link-local IPv6 address from that management interface.
Example • IPv6 addresses on a single management interface cannot be members of the same subnet. • IPv6 secondary addresses on management interfaces across platform must be members of the same subnet. • IPv6 secondary addresses on management interfaces should not match the virtual IP address and should not be in the same subnet as the virtual IP.
Dell(conf)#int ten 0/6 Dell(conf-if-te-0/6)#ipv6 address 801:10::/64 eui64 ipv6 control-plane icmp error-rate-limit Configure the maximum number of ICMP error packets per second that can be sent per second. Syntax ipv6 control-plane icmp error-rate-limit {1-200} To restore the default value, use the no ipv6 control-plane icmp errorrate-limit command.
Usage Information If the flowlabel value is already set for BGP or SSH, the system defaults to the already configured value. All packets on the same connection are considered part of the same flow by the system. For new connections, set the new flowlabel to zero. ipv6 host Assign a name and IPv6 address the host-to-IPv6 address mapping table uses. Syntax ipv6 host name ipv6-address To remove an IP host, use the no ipv6 host name {ipv6–address}.
ipv6-address2... ipv6-address6 Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter up to five more IPv6 addresses, in the x:x:x:x::x format, of name servers to be used. Separate the IPv6 addresses with a space. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You can separately configure both IPv4 and IPv6 domain name servers.
ipv6 nd dns-server Configures Recursive DNS Server (RDNSS) addresses to be distributed via IPv6 router advertisements to an IPv6 device. Syntax ipv6 nd dns-server {ipv6-RDNSS-address} {lifetime | infinite} To remove the IPv6 RDSS configuration, use no ipv6 nd dns-server {ipv6RDNSS-address} {lifetime | infinite} Parameters ipv6-RDNSSaddress Enter the IPv6 Recursive DNS Server’s (RDNSS) address. You can specify up to 4 IPv6 RDNSS server addresses. lifetime Enter the lifetime in seconds.
Parameters ipv6-prefix Enter an IPv6 prefix. prefix-length Enter the prefix then the prefix length. The length range is from 0 to 128. default Enter the keyword default to set default parameters for all prefixes. no-advertise Enter the keyword no-advertise to prevent the specified prefix from being advertised. no-autoconfig Enter the keywords no-autoconfig to disable Stateless Address Autoconfiguration.
ipv6 route Establish a static IPv6 route. Syntax ipv6 route ipv6-address prefix-length {ipv6-address | interface | interface ipv6-address} [distance] [tag value] [permanent] To remove the IPv6 route, use the no ipv6 route ipv6-address prefixlength {ipv6-address | interface | interface ipv6-address} [distance] [tag value] [permanent] command. Parameters ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128.
permanent (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword permanent to specify that the route is not to be removed, even if the interface assigned to that route goes down. NOTE: If you disable the interface with an IPv6 address associated with the keyword permanent, the route disappears from the routing table. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Related Commands show ipv6 route — views the IPv6 configured routes. ipv6 unicast-routing Enable IPv6 Unicast routing. Syntax ipv6 unicast-routing To disable unicast routing, use the no ipv6 unicast-routing command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Parameters unit-number Enter the stack unit’s ID number. The range is from 0 to 5. port-set Enter the keyword Port Set. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to display a table listing network prefixes and the total number prefixes which can be entered into the IPv6 CAM. index (OPTIONAL) Enter the index in the IPv6 CAM. ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x/n format to display networks that have more specific prefixes. The range is from /0 to /128.
Supported Modes Command History Related Commands Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ipv6 flowlabel-zero — Configure IPv6 address auto-configuration for the management interface. show ipv6 fib stack-unit View all FIB entries. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 fib stack-unit unit-number [summary | ipv6-address] slot-number Enter the number of the stack unit. The range is from 0 to 5.
show ipv6 flowlabel-zero Display the flow label zero setting. Syntax show ipv6 flowlabel-zero Default Disabled Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ipv6 nd dad attempts — Configure system to set the flow label field in the packets to zero. show ipv6 interface Display the status of interfaces configured for IPv6.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History configured (OPTIONAL) View information on all IPv6 configured interfaces. gigabitethernet (OPTIONAL) View information for an IPv6 gigabitethernet interface. linecard slot/ port (OPTIONAL) View information for a specific IPv6 linecard or stack-unit. The range is 0 to 11. managementethe rnet slot/ port (OPTIONAL) View information on an IPv6 Management port. Enter the slot number (0-1) and port number zero (0).
ND advertised reachable time is 0 milliseconds ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds ND router advertisements are sent every 198 to 600 seconds ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds ND advertised hop limit is 64 IPv6 hop limit for originated packets is 64 Dell# Example Dell#show ipv6 int man 0/0 (Managementether ManagementEthernet 0/0 is up, line protocol is up IPV6 is enabled net) Link Local address: fe80::201:e8ff:fea7:497e Global Unicast address(es): Actual address is 300::1, subne
ND advertised retransmit interval is 0 milliseconds ND router advertisements are sent every 198 to 600 seconds ND router advertisements live for 1800 seconds ND advertised hop limit is 64 IPv6 hop limit for originated packets is 64 Dell# show ipv6 mld_host Display the IPv6 MLD host counters. Syntax show ipv6 mld_host Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show ipv6 route Displays the IPv6 routes. Syntax Parameters show ipv6 route [ipv6-address prefix-length] [hostname] [all] [bgp as number] [connected] [isis tag] [list prefix-list name] [ospf process-id] [rip] [static] [summary] ipv6-address prefix-length (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
Field Example Description • L = Local • C = connected • S = static • R = RIP • B = BGP • IN = internal BGP • EX = external BGP • LO = Locally Originated • O = OSPF • IA = OSPF inter-area • N1 = OSPF NSSA external type 1 • N2 = OSPF NSSA external type 2 • E1 = OSPF external type 1 • E2 = OSPF external type 2 • i = IS-IS • L1 = IS-IS level-1 • L2 = IS-IS level-2 • IA = IS-IS inter-area • * = candidate default • > = non-active route • + = summary routes Destination
S L Dell# Example (Summary) 800::/64 [1/0] via 100::1, Te 0/8, 00:00:50 fe80::/10 [0/0] Direct, Nu 0, 20:00:18 Dell#show ipv6 route summary Route Source Active Routes connected 3 static 1 Total 4 Total 4 active route(s) using 928 bytes Dell# Non-active Routes 0 0 0 trust ipv6-diffserv Allows the dynamic classification of IPv6 DSCP. Syntax trust ipv6-diffserv To remove the definition, use the no trust ipv6-diffserv command.
IPv6 Basics IPv6 Service Class Field Queue ID 001XXXXX 1 000XXXXX 0 777
29 IPv6 Border Gateway Protocol (IPv6 BGP) IPv6 Border Gateway Protocol (IPv6 BGP) is supported on Dell Networking platforms. This chapter includes the following sections: • IPv6 BGP Commands • IPv6 MBGP Commands IPv6 BGP Commands BGP is an external gateway protocol that transmits interdomain routing information within and between autonomous systems (AS). BGP version 4 (BGPv4) supports classless interdomain routing and the aggregation of routes and AS paths.
Usage Information After this command is executed, all subsequent commands apply to this address family. You can exit from this AFI/SAFI to the IPv6 Unicast (the default) family by entering the exit command and returning to the Router BGP context. aggregate-address Summarize a range of prefixes to minimize the number of entries in the routing table.
Usage Information At least one of the routes included in the aggregate address must be in the BGP routing table for the configured aggregate to become active. Do not add the as-set parameter to the aggregate if routes within the aggregate are constantly changing as the aggregate will flap to keep track of the changes in the AS_PATH. In route maps used in the suppress-map parameter, routes meeting the deny clause are not suppress; in other words, they are allowed.
bgp bestpath as-path ignore Ignore the AS PATH in BGP best path calculations. Syntax bgp bestpath as-path ignore To return to the default, use the no bgp bestpath as-path ignore command. Defaults Disabled (that is, the software considers the AS_PATH when choosing a route as best). Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
bgp bestpath med missing-as-best During path selection, indicate a preference to paths with missing MED (MULTI_EXIT_DISC) over those paths with an advertised MED attribute. Syntax bgp bestpath med missing-as-best To return to the default selection, use the no bgp bestpath med missing-asbest command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
bgp cluster-id Assign a cluster ID to a BGP cluster with more than one route reflector. Syntax bgp cluster-id {ip-address | number} To delete a cluster ID, use the no bgp cluster-id {ip-address | number} command. Parameters ip-address Enter an IP address as the route reflector cluster ID. number Enter a route reflector cluster ID as a number from 1 to 4294967295. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Parameters as-number Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the AS number. The range is from 1 to 65535. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The autonomous systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors. Each autonomous system is fully meshed and contains a few connections to other autonomous systems.
Usage Information The Autonomous Systems configured in this command are visible to the EBGP neighbors. Each Autonomous System is fully meshed and contains a few connections to other Autonomous Systems. After specifying autonomous systems numbers for the BGP confederation, recycle the peers to update their configuration. Related Commands bgp confederation identifier — configures a confederation ID. bgp dampening Enable BGP route dampening and configure the dampening parameters.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If you enter bgp dampening, the default values for half-life, reuse, suppress, and max-suppress-time are applied. The parameters are positiondependent; therefore, if you configure one parameter, you must configure the parameters in the order they appear in the command. Related Commands show ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampened-paths — views the BGP paths.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This is enabled by default; that is, for all updates received from EBGP peers, BGP ensures that the first AS of the first AS segment is always the AS of the peer. If not, the update is dropped and a counter is incremented. To view the failed enforcefirst-as check counter, use the show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors command.
To disable fast external fallover, use the no bgp four-octet-as-support command. Defaults Disabled (supports 2-Byte format) Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Routers supporting 4-Byte ASNs advertise that function in the OPEN message.
stale-path-time seconds Enter the keywords stale-path-time then the maximum number of seconds to wait before restarting a peer’s stale paths. The default is 360 seconds. role receiver-only Enter the keywords role receiver-only to designate the local router to support graceful restart as a receiver only. Defaults As above Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
To return to the default, use the no bgp non-deterministic-med command. Defaults Disabled (that is, paths/routes for the same destination but from different ASs does not have their MEDs compared). Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information In Non-Deterministic mode, paths are compared in the order in which they arrive.
For this command to take effect and to keep the BGP database consistent, you need the clear ip bgp command. Execute the clear ip bgp command right after executing this command. Related Commands capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size bgp regex-eval-optz-disable Disables the Regex Performance engine that optimizes complex regular expression with BGP. Syntax bgp regex-eval-optz-disable To re-enable optimization engine, use the no bgp regex-eval-optz-disable command. Defaults Enabled.
Parameters ip-address Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format to reset only that BGP neighbor. Defaults The router ID is the highest IP address of the Loopback interface or, if no Loopback interfaces are configured, the highest IP address of a physical interface on the router. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
capture bgp-pdu neighbor (ipv6) Enable capture of an IPv6 BGP neighbor packet. Syntax capture bgp-pdu neighbor ipv6-address direction {both | rx | tx} To disable capture of the IPv6 BGP neighbor packet, use the no capture bgppdu neighbor ipv6-address command. Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Related Commands ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address of the target BGP neighbor.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. capture bgp-pdu neighbor (ipv6) — enables route reflection between the route reflector and the clients. show capture bgp-pdu neighbor — configures a route reflector and clients. clear ip bgp * (asterisk) Reset all BGP sessions in the specified category. The soft parameter (BGP Soft Reconfiguration) clears the policies without resetting the TCP connection.
clear ip bgp as-number Reset BGP sessions. The soft parameter (BGP Soft Reconfiguration) clears the policies without resetting the TCP connection. Syntax Parameters clear ip bgp as-number [flap-statistics | ipv4 {multicast {flap-statistics | soft {in | out}} | unicast {flap-statistics | soft {in | out}} | ipv6 unicast {flap-statistics | soft {in | out}| soft [in | out] as-number Enter an autonomous system (AS) number to reset neighbors belonging to that AS.
clear ip bgp ipv6-address Reset BGP sessions specific to an IPv6 address. The soft parameter (BGP Soft Reconfiguration) clears the policies without resetting the TCP connection. Syntax Parameters clear ip bgp ipv6-address [flap-statistics | ipv4 {multicast {flap-statistics | soft {in | out}} | unicast {flap-statistics | soft {in | out}} | ipv6 unicast {flap-statistics | soft {in | out}| soft [in | out] ipv6-address Enter an IPv6 address to reset neighbors belonging to that IP.
clear ip bgp peer-group Reset a peer-group’s BGP sessions. Syntax Parameters clear ip bgp peer-group peer-group-name peer-group-name Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the peer group name to reset the BGP sessions within that peer group. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Parameters ipv6-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format. The range is from /0 to /128. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. filter-list as-pathname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords filter-list then the name of a configured AS-PATH list. regexp regularexpression (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword regexp then the regular expressions.
Parameters * Clear and reapply policies for all BGP sessions. as-number Clear and reapply policies for all neighbors belonging to the AS. The range is from 0 to 65535 (2 Byte), from 1 to 4294967295 (4 Byte), or from 0.1 to 0.65535.65535 (Dotted format). ipv4-neighboraddr | ipv6neighbor-addr Clear and reapply policies for a neighbor. peer-group name Clear and reapply policies for all BGP routers in the specified peer group. ipv6 unicast Clear and reapply policies for all IPv6 unicast routes.
peer-group peergroup-name Enter the keywords peer-group then the name of the peer group. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only information on inbound BGP routes. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only information on outbound BGP routes. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
peer-group peergroup-name Enter the keywords peer-group then the name of the peer group. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only information on inbound BGP routes. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only information on outbound BGP routes. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration Enable soft-reconfiguration debugging for IPv6 unicast routes. Syntax debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6-address | peer-group-name] ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp [ipv4-address | ipv6address | peer-group-name] ipv6 unicast soft-reconfiguration command. Parameters ipv4-address | ipv6-address Enter the IP address of the neighbor on which you want to enable soft-reconfiguration debugging.
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group peergroup-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords peer-group then the name of the peer group. in (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword in to view only inbound keepalive messages. out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only outbound keepalive messages. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Entering a no debug ip bgp command removes all configured debug commands for BGP. debug ip bgp updates Allows you to view information about BGP updates.
Usage Information Entering a no debug ip bgp command removes all configured debug commands for BGP. default-metric Allows you to change the metrics of redistributed routes to locally originated routes. Use this command with the redistribute command. Syntax default-metric number To return to the default setting, use the no default-metric command.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. router bgp — enters ROUTER mode on the switch. distance bgp Configure three administrative distances for routes. Syntax distance bgp external-distance internal-distance local-distance To return to default values, use the no distance bgp command.
Routes from confederations are treated as internal BGP routes. maximum-paths Configure the maximum number of parallel routes (multipath support) BGP supports. Syntax maximum-paths {ebgp | ibgp} number To return to the default values, use the no maximum-paths command. Parameters ebgp Enter the keyword ebgp to enable multipath support for External BGP routes. ibgp Enter the keyword ibgp to enable multipath support for Internal BGP routes. number Enter a number as the maximum number of parallel paths.
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information By default, when you create a neighbor/peer group configuration in the Router BGP context, it is enabled for the IPv6/Unicast AFI/SAFI. By using activate in the new context, the neighbor/peer group is enabled for AFI/SAFI.
neighbor allowas-in Set the number of times an AS number can occur in the AS path. Syntax neighbor {ip-address | peer-group-name} allowas-in number To return to the default value, use the no neighbor {ip-address | peergroup-name} allowas-in command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of a configured route map. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
neighbor distribute-list Distribute BGP information using an established prefix list. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} To delete a neighbor distribution list, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group. ttl (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of hops as the time to live (ttl) value. The range is from 1 to 255. The default is 255. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
unreachable (for examle, no active route exists in the routing table for peer IP or IPv6 destination/local address), BGP brings down the session with the peer. Related Commands show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors — displays IPv6 routing information exchanged by BGP neighbors. neighbor filter-list Configure a BGP filter based on the AS-PATH attribute.
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group. maximum Enter a number as the maximum number of prefixes allowed for this BGP router. The range is from 1 to 4294967295. threshold (OPTIONAL) Enter a number to be used as a percentage of the maximum value. When the number of prefixes reaches this percentage of the maximum value, the software sends a message. The range is from 1 to 100 percent. The default is 75.
Parameters encrypt-pass Enter the encrypted password. clear-pass Enter the clear text password. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The TCP session is authentication and prevents the data from being compromised.
To delete a peer from a peer group, use the no neighbor ipv6-address peer-group peer-group-name command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group peergroup-name Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keywords peer-group then the name of a configured peer group (maximum 16 characters). Version Description 9.9(0.
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors — views BGP neighbors configurations. neighbor peer-group (creating group) Allows you to create a peer group and assign it a name. Syntax neighbor peer-group-name peer-group To delete a peer group, use the no neighbor peer-group-name peer-group command. Parameters peer-group-name Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter a text string up to 16 characters long as the name of the peer group.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information After you configure a peer group as passive, you must assign it a subnet using the neighbor subnet command. Related Commands neighbor subnet — assigns a subnet to a dynamically configured BGP neighbor. neighbor remote-as Create and specify the remote peer to the BGP neighbor.
neighbor remove-private-as Remove private AS numbers from the AS-PATH of outgoing updates. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} remove-private-as To return to the default, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peergroup-name} remove-private-as command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to remove the private AS numbers.
NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group. map-name Enter the name of an established route map. If the Route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). in Enter the keyword in to filter inbound routes. out Enter the keyword out to filter outbound routes. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The first time you enter this command it configures the neighbor as a route reflector and members of the route-reflector cluster. Internal BGP (IBGP) speakers do not need to be fully meshed if you configure a route reflector.
neighbor shutdown Disable a BGP neighbor or peer group. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} shutdown To enable a disabled neighbor or peer group, use the no neighbor {ipv6address | peer-group-name} shutdown command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to disable or enable all routers within the peer group.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group for which you want to start storing inbound routing updates. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER BGPv6 ADDRESS FAMILY (conf-router_bgpv6_af) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command enables soft-reconfiguration for the specified BGP neighbor.
neighbor timers Set keepalive and hold time timers for a BGP neighbor or a peer group. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} timers keepalive holdtime To return to the default values, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peergroup-name} timers command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
neighbor update-source Enable the software to use Loopback interfaces for TCP connections for BGP sessions. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} update-source loopback interface To use the closest interface, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peergroup-name} update-source loopback interface command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the timers for all routers within the peer group. weight Enter a number as the weight. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 0. Defaults 0 Command Modes ROUTER BGP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The software resolves the network address configured by the network command with the routes in the main routing table to ensure that the networks are reachable using non-BGP routes and non-default routes. Related Commands redistribute — redistributes routes into BGP.
To disable redistribution, use the no redistribution {connected | static} command. Parameters connected Enter the keyword connected to redistribute routes from physically connected interfaces. static Enter the keyword static to redistribute manually configured routes. These routes are treated as incomplete routes. route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of an established route map. If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes).
metric (OPTIONAL) Assign metric to an interface for use with IPv6 information. metric-type (OPTIONAL) The external link type associated with the default route advertised into a routing domain. You must specify one of the following: route-map mapname • external • internal (default) (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of an established route map. If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). Defaults Not configured.
If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes). Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
• EXEC Privilege Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Related Command capture bgp-pdu neighbor (ipv6) — enables capture of an IPv6 BGP neighbor packet. capture bgp-pdu max-buffer-size — specifies a size for the capture buffer. show config View the current ROUTER BGP configuration.
! Dell# show ip bgp ipv6 unicast View the current BGP information. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp ipv6 unicast [network [network-mask] [longerprefixes]] network (OPTIONAL) Enter the network address (in dotted decimal format) of the BGP network to view information only on that network. network-mask (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords network mask (in slash prefix format) of the BGP network address.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community View information on all routes with community attributes or view specific BGP community groups.
show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community-list View routes that are affected by a specific community list. Syntax Paramters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp ipv6 unicast community-list community-list-name [exact-match] community-listname Enter the name of a configured IP community list. exact-match (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords exact-match to display only for an exact match of the communities. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.
• Supported Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast extcommunity-list View information on all routes with Extended Community attributes. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp ipv6 unicast extcommunity-list [list name] list name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Enter the extended community list name you wish to view.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics View flap statistics on BGP routes. Syntax Parameters show ip bgp ipv6 unicast flap-statistics [ipv6-address prefixlength] [filter-list as-path-name] [regexp regular-expression] ipv6-address prefix-length Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format then the prefix length in the /x format.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast inconsistent-as View routes with inconsistent originating autonomous system (AS) numbers; that is, prefixes that are announced from the same neighbor AS but with a different AS-Path. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp ipv6 unicast inconsistent-as • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.
routes (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword routes to view only the neighbor’s feasible routes. received-routes [network [network-mask] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords received-routes then either the network address (in dotted decimal format) or the network mask (in slash prefix format) to view all information received from neighbors. NOTE: You must configure the neighbor softreconfiguration inbound command prior to viewing all the information received from the neighbors.
Lines Beginning With Description • keepalive interval is the number of seconds between keepalive messages to help ensure that the TCP session is still alive Received messages This line displays the number of BGP messages received, the number of notifications (error messages), and the number of messages waiting in a queue for processing.
Example Dell#show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors BGP neighbor is 5ffe:10::3, remote AS 1, external link BGP version 4, remote router ID 5.5.5.
CISCO_ROUTE_REFRESH(128) For address family: IPv6 Unicast BGP table version 12, neighbor version 12 2 accepted prefixes consume 32 bytes Prefix advertised 0, rejected 0, withdrawn 0 Connections established 3; dropped 2 Last reset 00:00:41, due to Closed by neighbor Notification History 'OPEN error/Bad AS' Sent : 0 Recv: 1 Local host: 5ffe:11::4, Local port: 179 show ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group Allows you to view information on the BGP peers in a peer group.
BGP version 4 Minimum time between advertisement runs is 5 seconds For address family: IPv4 Unicast BGP neighbor is RR-CLIENT-PASSIV, peer-group internal, Number of peers in this group 1 Peer-group members (* - outbound optimized): 9000::9:2* Dell# show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary Allows you to view the status of all BGP connections. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.
show ip bgp next-hop View all next hops (using learned routes only) with current reachability and flap status. This command only displays one path, even if the next hop is reachable by multiple paths. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show ip bgp next-hop [local-routes] local-routes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Show next-hop information for local routes. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege • ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string. If the caret is used at the beginning of a sequence or range, it matches on everything BUT the characters specified. • $ = (dollar sign) the end of the output string. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp paths as-path View all unique AS-PATHs in the BGP database.
show ip bgp paths extcommunity View all unique extended community information in the BGP database. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp paths extcommunity • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp regexp Allows you to view the subset of BGP routing table matching the regular expressions specified.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. timers bgp Allows you to adjust the BGP network timers for all neighbors. Syntax timers bgp keepalive holdtimer To return to the default values, use the no timers bgp command. Parameters Defaults keepalive Enter the time interval (in seconds) between which the system sends keepalive messages. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 60 seconds.
IPv6 MBGP Commands Multiprotocol BGP (MBGP) is an enhanced BGP that enables multicast routing policy throughout the Internet and connecting multicast topologies between BGP and autonomous systems (AS). The Dell Networking MBGP is implemented as per IETF RFC 1858. address family This command changes the context to subsequent address family identifier (SAFI). Syntax address family ipv6 unicast To remove SAFI context, use the no address family ipv6 unicast command.
advertise-map map-name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords advertise-map then the name of a configured route map to set filters for advertising an aggregate route. as-set (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords as-set to generate path attribute information and include it in the aggregate. AS_SET includes AS_PATH and community information from the routes included in the aggregated route.
bgp dampening Enable MBGP route dampening. Syntax bgp dampening [half-life time] [route-map map-name] To disable route dampening, use the no bgp dampening [half-life time] [route-map map-name] command. Parameters half-life time (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes after which the Penalty is decreased. After the router assigns a Penalty of 1024 to a route, the Penalty is decreased by half, after the half-life period expires. The range is from 1 to 45. The default is 15 minutes.
peer-group Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords peer-group to clear all members of a peer-group. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. clear ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampening Clear information on route dampening.
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History • . (period) matches on any single character, including white space. • * (asterisk) matches on sequences in a pattern (zero or more sequences). • + (plus sign) matches on sequences in a pattern (one or more sequences). • ? (question mark) matches sequences in a pattern (0 or 1 sequences). • [ ] (brackets) matches a range of single-character patterns. • ^ (caret) matches the beginning of the input string.
debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group updates View information about BGP peer-group updates. Syntax debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group peer-group-name updates [in | out] To disable debugging, use the no debug ip bgp ipv6 unicast peer-group peer-group-name updates [in | out] command. Parameters peer-group peergroup-name Enter the keywords peer-group then the name of the peer-group. updates Enter the keyword updates to view BGP update information.
out (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword out to view only BGP updates sent to neighbors. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. distance bgp Define an administrative distance for routes. Syntax distance bgp external-distance internal-distance local-distance To return to default values, use the no distance bgp command.
The higher the administrative distance assigned to a route means that your confidence in that route is low. Routes assigned an administrative distance of 255 are not installed in the routing table. Routes from confederations are treated as internal BGP routes. neighbor activate Allows you to enable a specified neighbor/peer group for the current address and subsequent address family identifier (AFI/SAFI).
Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. Defaults peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to set the advertisement interval for all routers in the peer group. seconds Enter a number as the time interval, in seconds, between BGP advertisements. The range is from 0 to 600 seconds. The default is 5 seconds for internal BGP peers and 30 seconds for external BGP peers.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor distribute-list Distribute BGP information using an established prefix list. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} To delete a neighbor distribution list, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} distribute-list prefix-list-name {in | out} command.
To delete a BGP filter, use the no neighbor [ipv6-address | peer-groupname] filter-list aspath access-list-name [in | out] command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to apply the filter to all routers in the peer group. access-list-name Enter the name of an established AS-PATH access list.
threshold (OPTIONAL) Enter a number to be used as a percentage of the maximum value. When the number of prefixes reaches this percentage of the maximum value, the software sends a message. The range is from 1 to 100 percent. The default is 75. warning-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword warning-only to set the router to send a log message when the maximum value is reached. If this parameter is not set, the router stops peering when the maximum number of prefixes is reached.
neighbor remove-private-as Remove private AS numbers from the AS-PATH of outgoing updates. Syntax neighbor {ipv6-address | peer-group-name} remove-private-as To return to the default, use the no neighbor {ipv6-address | peergroup-name} remove-private-as command. Parameters ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros. peer-group-name Enter the name of the peer group to remove the private AS numbers.
out Enter the keyword out to filter outbound routes. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER BGPV6-ADDRESS FAMILY Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you apply a route map to outbound routes, only routes that match at least one section of the route map are permitted.
Usage Information The first time you enter this command it configures the neighbor as a route reflector and members of the route-reflector cluster. Internal BGP (IBGP) speakers do not need to be fully meshed if you configure a route reflector. When all clients of a route reflector are disabled, the neighbor is no longer a route reflector. network Specify the networks for the BGP process and enter them in the BGP routing table.
To disable redistribution, use the no redistribution {connected | static} command. Parameters connected Enter the keyword connected to redistribute routes from physically connected interfaces. static Enter the keyword static to redistribute manually configured routes. These routes are treated as incomplete routes. route-map mapname (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of an established route map. If the route map is not configured, the default is deny (to drop all routes).
longer-prefixes Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords longer-prefixes to view all routes with a common prefix. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you enable the bgp non-deterministic-med command, the show ip bgp command output for a BGP route does not list the INACTIVE reason.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History local-AS Enter the keywords local-AS to view all routes with the COMMUNITY attribute of NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED. All routes with the NO_EXPORT_SUBCONFED (0xFFFFFF03) community attribute must not be advertised to external BGP peers. no-advertise Enter the keywords no-advertise to view all routes containing the well-known community attribute of NO_ADVERTISE.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampened-paths View BGP routes that are dampened (non-active). Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip bgp ipv6 unicast dampened-paths • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast detail Display detailed BGP information.
NdTmpASPAP 0x41a25000 : NdTmpCommP 0x41a25800 NdTmpRRClP 0x41a4b000 : NdTmpOptP 0x41a4b800 : NdTmpNHP : NdOrigPAP 0 NdOrgNHP 0 : NdModPathP 0x419efcc0 : NdModASPAP 0x41a4c000 : NdModCommP 0x41a4c800 NdModOptP 0x41a4d000 : NdModNHP : NdComSortBufP 0x41a19110 : NdComSortHdP 0x41a19d04 : NdUpdAFMsk 0 : AFRstSe t 0x41a1a298 : NHopDfrdHdP 0x41a1a3e0 : NumNhDfrd 0 : CfgHdrAFMsk 1 show ip bgp ipv6 unicast filter-list View the routes that match the filter lists.
• * = (asterisk) the sequences in a pattern (0 or more sequences). • + = (plus) the sequences in a pattern (1 or more sequences). • ? = (question mark) sequences in a pattern (either 0 or 1 sequences). NOTE: You must enter an escape sequence (CTRL +v) prior to entering the ? regular expression. Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege • [ ] = (brackets) a range of single-character patterns. • ^ = (caret) the beginning of the input string.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast neighbors Allows you to view the information exchanged by BGP neighbors.
Lines Beginning With Description BGP neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address and its AS number. The last phrase in the line indicates whether the link between the BGP router and its neighbor is an external or internal one. If they are located in the same AS, then the link is internal; otherwise, the link is external. BGP version Displays the BGP version (always version 4) and the remote router ID.
Example Lines Beginning With Description Prefixes advertised Displays the number of network prefixes advertised, the number rejected, and the number withdrawn from the BGP routing table. Connections established Displays the number of TCP connections established and dropped between the two peers to exchange BGP information. Last reset Displays the amount of time since the peering session was last reset. Also states if the peer resets the peering session.
Local host: 5ffe:10::4, Local port: 179 Foreign host: 5ffe:10::3, Foreign port: 35470 Notification History 'Connection Reset' Sent : 1 Recv: 0 BGP neighbor is 5ffe:11::3, remote AS 1, external link BGP version 4, remote router ID 5.5.5.
Supported Modes Command History Related Commands Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. neighbor peer-group (assigning peers) — assigns a peer to a peer-group. neighbor peer-group (creating group) — creates a peer group. show ip bgp ipv6 unicast summary Allows you to view the status of all BGP connections.
Field Description command provides more details on the COMMUNITY attributes. Dampening enabled Displayed only when dampening is enabled. Displays the number of paths designated as history, dampened, or penalized. Neighbor Displays the BGP neighbor address. AS Displays the AS number of the neighbor. MsgRcvd Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor received. MsgSent Displays the number of BGP messages that neighbor sent.
Dampening enabled.
iSCSI Optimization 30 Internet small computer system interface (iSCSI) optimization enables quality-of-service (QoS) treatment for iSCSI storage traffic on an Aggregator. NOTE: When iSCSI storage devices are detected on the server-ports, storm-control is disabled on those ports. When the iSCSI devices are off the ports, storm-control is enabled again. advertise dcbx-app-tlv Configure DCBX to send iSCSI TLV advertisements.
iscsi aging time Set the aging time for iSCSI sessions. Syntax iscsi aging time time To remove the iSCSI session aging time, use the no iscsi aging time command. Parameters time Enter the aging time for the iSCSI session. The range is from 5 to 43,200 minutes. Defaults 10 minutes Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.
dot1p vlanpriority-value Enter the dot1p value of the VLAN priority tag assigned to the incoming packets in an iSCSI session. The range is from 0 to 7. The default is the dot1p value in ingress iSCSI frames is not changed and is the same priority is used in iSCSI TLV advertisements if you did not enter the iscsi prioritybits command. dscp dscp-value Enter the DSCP value assigned to the incoming packets in an iSCSI session. The valid range is from 0 to 63.
Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you enable the iSCSI feature using the iscsi enable command, flow control settings are set to rx on tx off on all interfaces.
iscsi profile-compellent Configure the auto-detection of Dell Compellent arrays on a port. Syntax iscsi profile-compellent Defaults Dell Compellent disk arrays are not detected. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module Usage Information You can configure up to 16 target TCP ports on the switch in one command or multiple commands.
860 Dell# Related Commands • show iscsi sessions — displays information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch that have been established since the last reload. • show iscsi sessions detailed — displays detailed information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch. show iscsi sessions Display information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch that have been established since the last reload.
show iscsi sessions detailed Displays detailed information on active iSCSI sessions on the switch. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example Related Commands 882 show iscsi sessions detailed [session isid] isid • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Enter the session’s iSCSi ID to display detailed information on specified iSCSi session. All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.
show run iscsi Display all globally configured non-default iSCSI settings in the current session. Syntax show run iscsi Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands iSCSI Optimization Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. • show iscsi — displays the currently configured iSCSI settings.
Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS) 31 The Dell Networking OS supports the intermediate system to intermediate system (IS-IS) protocol for IPv4 and IPv6. IS-IS is an interior gateway protocol that uses a shortest-path-first algorithm. IS-IS facilitates the communication between open systems, supporting routers passing both IP and OSI traffic. A router is considered an intermediate system. Networks are partitioned into manageable routing domains, called areas.
Usage Information To perform protocol-support consistency checks on hello packets, use this command. The adjacency-check is enabled by default. advertise Leak routes between levels (distribute IP prefixes between Level 1 and Level 2 and vice versa). Syntax advertise {level1-into-level2 | level2-into-level1} prefixlist-name To return to the default, use the no advertise {level1-into-level2 | level2-into-level1}[prefix-list-name] command.
area-password Configure a hash message authentication code (HMAC) password for an area. Syntax area-password [hmac-md5 | encryption-type] password To delete a password, use the no area-password command. Parameters hmac-md5 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords hmac-md5 to encrypt the password. encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter 7 to encrypt the password using DES.
Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information CAUTION: Use caution when you enter this command. Back up your configuration prior to using this command or your IS-IS configuration will be erased. clear isis Restart the IS-IS process. All IS-IS data is cleared.
clns host Define a name-to-network service mapping point (NSAP) that you use with commands that require NSAPs and system IDs. Syntax Parameters clns host name nsap name Enter an alphanumeric string to identify the name-to-NSAP mapping. nsap Enter a specific NSAP address that is associated with the name parameter. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
To display all debugging information in one output, use this command. To turn off debugging, you normally enter separate no forms of each command. To disable all debug messages for IS-IS at once, enter the no debug isis command. debug isis adj-packets Enable debugging on adjacency-related activity such as hello packets that are sent and received on IS-IS adjacencies. Syntax debug isis adj-packets [interface] To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis adj-packets [interface] command.
Parameters interface Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type slot/port as one of the following: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.9(0.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug isis spf-triggers Enable debugging on the events that triggered IS-IS shortest path first (SPF) events for debugging purposes. Syntax debug isis spf-triggers To turn off debugging, use the no debug isis spf-triggers command. Command Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. default-information originate Generates a default route into an IS-IS routing domain and controls the distribution of default information.
mode and the metric value in the default-information originate command is set to a number higher than 63, the metric value advertised in the LSPs is 63. If the metric-style command is set for Wide mode, the metric value in the default-information originate command is advertised. Related Commands • redistribute — redistributes routes from one routing domain to another routing domain. • isis metric — configures a metric for an interface. • metric-style — sets the metric style for the router.
Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History weight The administrative distance value indicates the reliability of a routing information source. The range is from 1 to 255. (A higher relative value indicates lower reliability. Routes with smaller values are given preference.) The default is 115. ip-address mask (OPTIONAL) Enter an IP address in dotted decimal format and enter a mask in either dotted decimal or /prefix format.
• Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Related Commands For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Not configured. • ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) • CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. • distribute-list out — suppresses networks from being advertised in updates.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) • CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You can assign a name to a routing process so a prefix list IS applied to only the routes derived from the specified routing process. Related Commands • distribute-list in — filters the networks received in updates.
domain-password Set the authentication password for a routing domain. Syntax domain-password [hmac-md5 | encryption-type] password To disable the password, use the no domain-password command. Parameters hmac-md5 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords hmac-md5 to encrypt the password using MD5. encryption-type (OPTIONAL) Enter 7 to encrypt the password using DES. password Enter an alphanumeric string up to 16 characters long.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Every graceful restart enabled router’s HELLO PDUs includes a restart TLV. This restart enables (re)starting as well as the existing ISIS peers to detect the GR capability of the routers on the connected network.
graceful-restart t1 Set the graceful restart wait time before unacknowledged restart requests are generated. This wait time is the interval before the system sends a restart request (an IIH with RR bit set in Restart TLV) until the CSNP is received from the helping router. Syntax graceful-restart t1 {interval seconds | retry-times value} To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart t1 command. Parameters interval Enter the keyword interval to set the wait time.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. graceful-restart t3 Configure the overall wait time before graceful restart completes. Syntax graceful-restart t3 {adjacency | manual} seconds To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart t3 command.
graceful-restart restart-wait Enable the graceful restart maximum wait time before a restarting peer comes up. Syntax NOTE: Set the t3 timer to adjacency on the restarting router when implementing this command. graceful-restart restart-wait seconds To return to the default, use the no graceful-restart restart-wait command. Parameters seconds Defaults 30 seconds Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Enter the graceful restart time in seconds.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information IS-IS hellos are padded to the full maximum transmission unit (MTU) size. Padding IS-IS Hellos (IIHS) to the full MTU provides early error detection of large frame transmission problems or mismatched MTUs on adjacent interfaces. Related Commands isis hello padding — turns ON or OFF hello padding on an interface basis.
Defaults In IS-IS, the default deletes LSPs with internal checksum errors (no ignore-lsperrors). Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information IS-IS normally purges LSPs with an incorrect data link checksum causing the LSP source to regenerate the message.
ipv6 router isis Enable the IPv6 IS-IS routing protocol and specify an IPv6 IS-IS process. Syntax ipv6 router isis [tag] To disable IS-IS routing, use the no router isis [tag] command. Parameters tag Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) This parameter is a unique name for a routing process. A null tag is assumed if the tag option is not specified. The tag name must be unique for all IP router processes for a given router.
Parameters level-1 You can form a Level 1 adjacency if there is at least one common area address between this system and neighbors. You cannot form Level 2 adjacencies on this interface. level-1-2 You can form a Level 1 and Level 2 adjacencies when the neighbor is also configured as Level-1-2 and there is at least one common area, if not, a Level 2 adjacency is established. This setting is the default.
level-2 (OPTIONAL) Independently configures the interval of time between transmission of CSNPs for Level 2. Defaults seconds = 10; level-1 (if not otherwise specified) Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The default values of this command are typically satisfactory transmission times for a specific interface on a designated intermediate system. To maintain database synchronization, the designated routers send CSNPs. You can configure Level 1 and Level 2 CSNP intervals independently.
isis hello padding Turn ON or OFF padding of hello PDUs from INTERFACE mode. Syntax isis hello padding To return to the default, use the no isis hello padding command. Defaults Padding of hello PDUs is enabled (ON). Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Dell Networking recommends configuring metrics on all interfaces. Without configuring this command, the IS-IS metrics are similar to hop-count metrics. isis metric Assign a metric to an interface.
isis network point-to-point Enable the software to treat a broadcast interface as a point-to-point interface. Syntax isis network point-to-point To disable the feature, use the no isis network point-to-point command. Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. isis password Configure an authentication password for an interface.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To protect your network from unauthorized access, use this command to prevent unauthorized routers from forming adjacencies. You can assign different passwords for different routing levels by using the keywords level-1 and level-2.
within hellos. The router with the highest priority becomes the designated intermediate system (DIS). NOTE: Routers with a priority of 0 cannot be a designated router. Setting the priority to 0 lowers the chance of this system becoming the DIS, but does not prevent it. If all the routers have priority 0, one with highest MAC address becomes DIS even though its priority is 0. is-type Configure IS-IS operating level for a router.
log-adjacency-changes Generate a log messages for adjacency state changes. Syntax log-adjacency-changes To disable this function, use the no log-adjacency-changes command. Defaults Adjacency changes are not logged. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
second_wait_inte rval seconds Defaults Refer to Parameters. Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the wait interval, in seconds, between the first and second LSP generation. The range is from 0 to 120 seconds. The default is 5 seconds. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The link MTU and the LSP MTU size must be the same. Because each device can generate a maximum of 255 LSPs, consider carefully whether you use the lsp-mtu command. lsp-refresh-interval Set the link state PDU (LSP) refresh interval. LSPs must be refreshed before they expire.
Related Commands max-lsp-lifetime — sets the maximum interval that LSPs persist without being refreshed. max-area-addresses Configure manual area addresses. Syntax max-area-addresses number To return to the default values, use the no max-area-addresses command. Parameters number Defaults 3 addresses Command Modes ROUTER ISIS Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Set the maximum number of manual area addresses. The range is from 3 to 6. The default is 3. Version Description 9.9(0.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Change the maximum LSP lifetime with this command. The maximum LSP lifetime must always be greater than the LSP refresh interval. The seconds parameter enables the router to keep LSPs for the specified length of time. If the value is higher, the overhead is reduced on slower-speed links.
metric-style To generate and accept old-style, new-style, or both styles of type, length, and values (TLV), configure a router. Syntax metric-style {narrow [transition] | transition | wide [transition]} [level-1 | level-2] To return to the default values, use the no metric-style {narrow [transition] | transition | wide [transition]} [level-1 | level-2] command. Parameters narrow Allows you to generate and accept old-style TLVs. The metric range is from 0 to 63.
multi-topology Enables multi-topology IS-IS. It also allows enabling/disabling of old and new style TLVs for IP prefix information in the LSPs. Syntax multi-topology [transition] To return to a single topology configuration, use the no multi-topology [transition] command. Defaults Disabled Command Modes CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
passive-interface Suppress routing updates on an interface. This command stops the router from sending updates on that interface. Syntax passive-interface interface To delete a passive interface configuration, use the no passive-interface interface command. Parameters interface Defaults Not configured.
To end redistribution or disable any of the specified keywords, use the no redistribute {static | connected | rip} [metric metric-value] [metric-type {external | internal}] [level-1 | level-1-2 | level-2] [route-map map-name] command. Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History connected Enter the keyword connected to redistribute active routes into IS-IS. rip Enter the keyword rip to redistribute RIP routes into IS-IS.
Usage Information To redistribute a default route (0.0.0.0/0), configure the default-information originate command. Changing or disabling a keyword in this command does not affect the state of the other command keywords. When an LSP with an internal metric is received, the system considers the route cost while considering the advertised cost to reach the destination.
metric metricvalue (OPTIONAL) The value used for the redistributed route. Use a metric value that is consistent with the destination protocol. The range is from 0 to 16777215. The default is 0. metric-type {external| internal} (OPTIONAL) The external link type associated with the default route advertised into a routing domain. The two options are: route-map mapname • external • internal map-name is an identifier for a configured route map.
redistribute ospf Redistribute routing information from an OSPF process. Syntax redistribute ospf process-id [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2] [match {internal | external}] [metric metric-value] [metrictype {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] To return to the default values, use the no redistribute ospf process-id [level-1| level-1-2 | level-2] [match {internal | external}] [metric metric-value][metric-type {external | internal}] [route-map map-name] command.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • ROUTER ISIS (for IPv4) • CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information How a metric value assigned to a redistributed route is advertised depends on how on the configuration of the metric-style command.
You can configure only one IS-IS routing process to perform Level 2 routing. A level-1-2 designation performs Level 1 and Level 2 routing at the same time. Related Commands • ip router isis — configures IS-IS routing processes for IP on interfaces and attaches an area designator to the routing process. • net — configures an IS-IS network entity title (NET) for a routing process. • is-type — assigns a type for a given area.
• Supported Modes Command History Example (RouterIsis) CONFIGURATION-ROUTER-ISIS-ADDRESS-FAMILY-IPV6 (for IPv6) Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. The bold section identifies that Multi-Topology IS-IS is enabled in Transition mode. Dell(conf-router_isis)#show config ! router isis clns host ISIS 49.0000.0001.F100.E120.0013.00 log-adjacency-changes net 49.0000.0001.F100.E120.0013.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History detail (OPTIONAL) Detailed link-state database information of each LSP displays when specified. If not specified, a summary displays. summary (OPTIONAL) Summary of link-state database information displays when specified. lspid (OPTIONAL) Display only the specified LSP. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Field Description LSP Checksum This is the checksum of the entire LSP packet. LSP Holdtime This value is the amount of time, in seconds, that the LSP remains valid. A zero holdtime indicates that this is a purged LSP and is being removed from the link state database. A value between brackets indicates the duration that the purged LSP stays in the database before being removed. ATT This value represents the Attach bit.
Area Address: 49.0000.0001 NLPID: 0xCC 0x8E IP Address: 10.1.1.1 IPv6 Address: 1011::1 Topology: IPv4 (0x00) IPv6 (0x8002) Metric: 10 IS OSPF.00 Metric: 10 IS (MT-IPv6) OSPF.00 Metric: 10 IP 10.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 Metric: 10 IP 15.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 Metric: 20 IP 10.3.3.0 255.255.255.
Database Sync count Dell# : 0 (level-1), 0 (level-2) show isis hostname Display IS-IS host names configured or learned on the system. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show isis hostname • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show isis hostname System Id Dynamic Name Static Name *F100.E120.
• Supported Modes Command History Example EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell>show isis int GigabitEthernet 0/7 is up, line protocol is up MTU 1497, Encapsulation SAP Routing Protocol: IS-IS Circuit Type: Level-1-2 Interface Index 37847070, Local circuit ID 1 Level-1 Metric: 10, Priority: 64, Circuit ID: systest-3.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
System Id Interface State Type Priority Uptime Circuit Id TEST Gi 7/1 Up L1L2(M) 127 09:28:04 TEST.02 Area Address(es): 49.0000.0001 IP Address(es): 25.1.1.3* MAC Address: 0000.0000.0000 Hold Time: 28 Link Local Address: fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:492c Topology: IPv4 IPv6 , Common (IPv4 IPv6 ) Adjacency being used for MTs: IPv4 IPv6 Dell# show isis protocol Display IS-IS routing information.
show isis traffic This command allows you to display IS-IS traffic interface information. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show isis traffic [interface] interface • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Identifies the interface type slot/port as one of the following: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
Example Item Description Level-1/Level-2 DR Elections Displays the number of times designated router elections ran. Level-1/Level-2 SPF Calculations Displays the number of shortest path first calculations. LSP checksum errors received Displays the number of checksum errors LSPs received. LSP authentication failures Displays the number of LSP authentication failures.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History interval seconds Enter the maximum number of seconds between SPF calculations. The range is from 0 to 120 seconds. The default is 10 seconds. initial_wait_interv al seconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the initial wait time, in seconds, before running the first SPF calculations. The range is from 0 to 120 seconds. The default is 5 seconds.
Isolated Networks 32 This chapter describes the isolated networks commands in the Dell Networking OS. io-aggregator isolated-network vlan Enable the isolated-network functionality for a particular VLAN or a set of VLANs.
show io-aggregator isolated-networks Display the VLANs that are configured to be part of an isolated network on an Aggregator. Syntax Parameters show io-aggregator isolated-networks isolatednetworks Specify an isolated network to be configured vlan vlanrange Enter the keyword vlan followed by the member VLANs using VLAN IDs (separated by commas), a range of VLAN IDs (separated by a hyphen), a single VLAN ID, or a combination. For example: VLAN IDs (comma-separated): 3, 4, 6.
33 Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) This chapter contains commands for Dell Networking’s implementation of the link aggregation control protocol (LACP) for the creation of dynamic link aggregation groups (LAGs — called port-channels in Dell Networking OS parlance). auto-lag enable Enable auto-lag on a server facing port. Syntax auto-lag enable To disable the auto-lag use the no auto-lag enable command. When disabled, the server port associated in a LAG is removed and the LAG itself gets removed.
Parameters port-channelnumber Enter a port-channel number: The range is from 1 to 128. Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. show lacp — displays the LACP configuration. debug lacp Debug LACP (events).
Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Command History All Modes Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. io-aggregator auto-lag enable Enable auto-lag globally on the server facing ports Syntax io-aggregator auto-lag enable To disable the auto-lag, use the no io-aggregator auto-lag enable command. When disabled, all the server ports associated in a LAG are removed and the LAG itself gets removed. Any LACPDUs received on the server ports are discarded.
To disable the LACP link fallback member, use theno lacp link-fallback member-independent port-channel 128 command. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Standalone, Stacking Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.
lacp port-priority To influence which ports will be put in Standby mode when there is a hardware limitation that prevents all compatible ports from aggregating, configure the port priority. Syntax lacp port-priority priority-value To return to the default setting, use the no lacp port-priority priorityvalue command. Parameters priority-value Enter the port-priority value. The higher the value number, the lower the priority. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 32768.
off Enter the keyword off to set the mode to the off state. NOTE: LACP modes are defined in Usage Information. Defaults off Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Dell(conf)#interface TenGigabitethernet 0/5 Dell(conf-if-te-0/5)#no shutdown Dell(conf-if-te-0/5)#port-channel-protocol lacp Dell(conf-if-te-0/5-lacp)#port-channel 32 mode active ...
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM and added support to display the interface configurations corresponding to a range of ports. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The following describes the show interfaces port-channel command shown in the following example. Field Description Port-Channel 1... Displays the status of LAG.
Field Description Output 0... Displays the type and number of packets sent out the interface. This information is displayed over three lines. Rate information... Displays the traffic rate information into and out of the interface. Traffic rate is displayed in bits and packets per second. Time since... Displays the time since the last change in the configuration of this interface.
Field Description • Example up — if the port channel is enabled (no shutdown) Uptime Displays the age of the port channel in hours:minutes:seconds. Ports Lists the interfaces assigned to this port channel. (untitled) Displays the status of the physical interfaces (up or down). • In Layer 2 port channels, an * (asterisk) indicates which interface is the primary port of the port channel. The primary port sends out interface PDU. • In Layer 3 port channels, the primary port is not indicated.
Example Dell-ct-mxl-1-b1(conf)#do show io-aggregator auto-lag status Auto LAG creation on server port(s) is disabled show lacp Displays the LACP matrix. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example (PortChannel-Number) show lacp port-channel-number [sys-id | counters] port-channelnumber Enter a port-channel number: sys-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords sys-id and the value that identifies a system.
Partner Admin: State BDFHJLMP Key 0 Oper: State BCEGIKNP Key 1 Dell# Example (Sys-id) Priority 0 Priority 128 Dell#show lacp 1 sys-id Actor System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e800.a12b Partner System ID: Priority 32768, Address 0001.e801.
Example Field Description Utilization (In Percent) Traffic usage in percentage of the packets processed by the port channel Alarm State Indicates whether an alarm is generated if overutilization of the port channel occurred.
vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. ether-type Enter the keywords ether-type then the ether-value in the XX:XX format. src-ip address Enter the keywords src-ip then the IP source address in IP address format. dest-ip address Enter the keywords dest-ip then the IP destination address in IP address format. src-port number Enter the keywords src-port then the source port number. The range is from 1 to 65536. The default is None.
34 Layer 2 This chapter describes commands to configure Layer 2 features.
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. mac-address-table aging-time Specify an aging time for MAC addresses to remove from the MAC address table. Syntax mac-address-table aging-time seconds To delete the configured aging time, use the no mac-address-table agingtime seconds command.
Parameters mac-address Enter the 48-bit hexadecimal address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. output interface Enter the keyword output then one of the following interfaces for which traffic is forwarded: vlan vlan-id • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Enter the keyword vlan then a VLAN ID number from 1 to 4094.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information For details about using this command, refer to the “NIC Teaming” section of the Layer 2 chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. mac learning-limit Limit the maximum number of MAC addresses (static + dynamic) learned on a selected interface.
MAC Learning Limit violation logs and actions are not available on a per-VLAN basis. With the keyword no-station-move option, MAC addresses learned through this feature on the selected interface persist on a per-VLAN basis, even if received on another interface. Enabling or disabling this option has no effect on already learned MAC addresses. After the MAC address learning limit is reached, the MAC addresses do not age out unless you add the dynamic option.
Usage Information This command is supported on physical interfaces, static LAGs, and LACP LAGs. Related Commands show mac learning-limit — displays details of the mac learning-limit. mac learning-limit station-move-violation Specify the actions for a station move violation. Syntax mac learning-limit station-move-violation {log | shutdown-both | shutdown-offending | shutdown-original} To disable a configuration, use the no mac learning-limit station-moveviolation command, then the configured keyword.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show cam mac stack-unit Display the content addressable memory (CAM) size and the portions allocated for MAC addresses and for MAC ACLs.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. show mac-address-table Display the MAC address table.
Command Modes Supported Modes • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The following describes the show mac-address-table command shown in the following example. Column Heading Description VlanId Displays the VLAN ID number. Mac Address Displays the MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format.
Column Heading Description VlanId Displays the VLAN ID number. Mac Address Displays the MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. Type Lists whether the MAC address was manually configured (Static), learned (Dynamic), or associated with a specific port (Sticky). An (N) indicates that the specified MAC address has been learnt by a neighbor and is synced to the node. Interface Displays the interface type and slot/port information.
Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example vlan vlan-id • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display the MAC address assigned to the VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show mac learning-limit Interface Learning Dynamic Slot/port Limit MAC count Dell# Static Unknown MAC count SA Drops Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands The following commands configure and monitor virtual local area networks (VLANs). VLANs are a virtual interface and use many of the same commands as physical interfaces.
To remove the default VLAN status from a VLAN and VLAN 1 does not exist, use the no default vlan-id vlan-id syntax. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID number of the VLAN to become the new Default VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. The default is 1. Defaults The Default VLAN is VLAN 1. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
To remove the name from the VLAN, use the no name command. Parameters vlan-name Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE VLAN Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter up to 32 characters as the name of the VLAN. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show vlan Display the current VLAN configurations on the switch. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show vlan [brief | id vlan-id | name vlan-name] brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the following information: • VLAN ID • VLAN name (left blank if none is configured) • Spanning Tree Group ID • MAC address aging time • IP address id vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword id then a number from 1 to 4094.
Column Heading Description Status Displays the word Inactive for inactive VLANs and the word Active for active VLANs.
untagged, V - VLT tagged NUM Status 1 Inactive Dell# Description Q Ports a Example (Brief) Dell#show vlan brief VLAN Name STG MAC Aging IP Address ---- -----------------------------1 0 0 unassigned 2 0 0 unassigned 20 0 0 unassigned 1002 0 0 unassigned Dell# Example (Name) Dellconf)#interface vlan 222 Dell(conf-if-vl-222)#name test Dell(conf-if-vl-222)#do show vlan name test Codes: Q: U x G - * - Default VLAN, G - GVRP VLANs Untagged, T - Tagged Dot1x untagged, X - Dot1x tagged GVRP tagged, M - Vlan-s
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you use the no tagged command, the interface is automatically placed in the Default VLAN as an untagged interface unless the interface is a member of another VLAN. If the interface belongs to several VLANs, remove it from all VLANs to change it to an untagged interface.
Usage Information When this command is configured, the VLAN is operationally UP if any of the interfaces specified in the track ip command are operationally UP, and the VLAN is operationally DOWN if none of the tracking interfaces are operationally UP. If the track ip command is not configured, the VLAN's Layer 3 operational state depends on all the members of the VLAN. The Layer 2 state of the VLAN, and hence the Layer 2 traffic, is not affected by the track ip command configuration.
Related Commands interface vlan — configures a VLAN. tagged — specifies which interfaces in a VLAN are tagged.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) 35 The link layer discovery protocol (LLDP) advertises connectivity and management from the local station to the adjacent stations on an IEEE 802 LAN. LLDP facilitates multi-vendor interoperability by using standard management tools to discover and make available a physical topology for network management. The Dell Networking OS implementation of LLDP is based on IEEE standard 801.1ab. This chapter describes the LLDP commands.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol lldp (Configuration) — enables LLDP globally. debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors. show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration. advertise dot3-tlv Advertise dot3 TLVs (Type, Length, Value).
advertise management-tlv Advertise management TLVs (Type, Length, Value). Syntax advertise management-tlv {system-capabilities | systemdescription | system-name} To remove advertised management TLVs, use the no advertise managementtlv {system-capabilities | system-description | system-name} command. Parameters systemcapabilities Enter the keywords system-capabilities to advertise the system capabilities TLVs to the LLDP peer.
• Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword tenGigabitEthernet followed by the slot/port information. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. clear lldp neighbors Clear LLDP neighbor information for all interfaces or a specific interface.
debug lldp interface Enable LLDP debugging to display timer events, neighbor additions or deletions, and other information about incoming and outgoing packets. Syntax debug lldp interface {interface | all}{events | packet {brief | detail} {tx | rx | both}} To disable debugging, use the no debug lldp interface {interface | all}{events} {packet {brief | detail} {tx | rx | both}} command.
disable Enable or disable LLDP. Syntax disable To enable LLDP, use the no disable command. Defaults Enabled, that is no disable. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. mode To receive or transmit, set LLDP. Syntax mode {tx | rx} To return to the default, use the no mode {tx | rx} command. Parameters tx Enter the keyword tx to set the mode to transmit. rx Enter the keyword rx to set the mode to receive. Defaults Both transmit and receive.
Parameters integer Enter the number of consecutive misses before the LLDP declares the interface dead. The range is from 2 to 10. Defaults 4 x hello Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) and INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.
To return to the global LLDP configuration mode, use the no protocol lldp command from Interface mode. Defaults Enabled Command Modes INTERFACE (conf-if-interface-lldp) Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command is available only in PMUX mode.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information Omitting the keyword detail displays only the remote chassis ID, Port ID, and host name.
show running-config lldp Display the current global LLDP configuration. Syntax show running-config lldp Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full-Switch Command History Example 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
advertise med guest-voice To advertise a separate limited voice service for a guest user with their own IP telephony handset or other appliances that support interactive voice services, configure the system. Syntax advertise med guest-voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med guest-voice {vlan-id layer2_priority DSCP_value} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094.
layer2_priority Enter the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7. DSCP_value Enter the DSCP value. The range is from 0 to 63. priority-tagged number Enter the keywords priority-tagged then the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7. Defaults unconfigured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Supported Modes Full-Switch Command History Related Commands 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Usage Information Related Commands 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. • ECS — Emergency call service such as defined by TIA or the national emergency numbering association (NENA) • ELIN — Emergency location identification number, a valid North America Numbering Plan format telephone number supplied for ECS purposes. debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors.
To return to the default, use the no advertise med softphone-voice {vlan-id} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. priority-tagged number Enter the keywords priority-tagged then the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7. Defaults unconfigured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Supported Modes Full-Switch Command History Related Commands 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. Version 8.3.16.
Related Commands debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors. show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration. advertise med video-conferencing To advertise dedicated video conferencing and other similar appliances that support real-time interactive video, configure the system.
priority-tagged number Enter the keywords priority-tagged then the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7. Defaults unconfigured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-lldp) Supported Modes Full-Switch Command History Related Commands 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. Version 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug lldp interface — debugs LLDP. show lldp neighbors — displays the LLDP neighbors. show running-config lldp — displays the LLDP running configuration.
advertise med voice-signaling To advertise when voice control packets use a separate network policy than voice data, configure the system. Syntax advertise med voice-signaling {vlan-id} | {priority-tagged number} To return to the default, use the no advertise med voice-signaling {vlan-id} | {priority-tagged number} command. Parameters vlan-id Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. priority-tagged number Enter the keywords priority-tagged then the Layer 2 priority. The range is from 0 to 7.
Microsoft Network Load Balancing 36 Network Load Balancing (NLB) is a clustering functionality that is implemented by Microsoft on Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 operating systems. NLB uses a distributed methodology or pattern to equally split and balance the network traffic load across a set of servers that are part of the cluster or group.
• With NLB feature enabled, after learning the NLB ARP entry, all the subsequent traffic is flooded on all ports in VLAN1. With NLB, the data frame is forwarded to all the servers for them to perform load-balancing. NLB Multicast Mode Scenario Consider a sample topology in which four servers, namely S1 through S4, are configured as a cluster or a farm. This set of servers is connected to a Layer 3 switch, which in turn is connected to the end-clients.
ip vlan-flooding command on the Dell switch at the time that the Microsoft cluster is configured. The server MAC address is given in the Ethernet frame header of the ARP reply, while the virtual MAC address representing the cluster is given in the payload. Then, all the traffic destined for the cluster is flooded out of all member ports. Since all the servers in the cluster receive traffic, failover and balancing are preserved.
output interface output-range interface vlan vlan-id Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example (Multicast) For a multicast MAC address, enter the keyword output then one of the following interfaces for which traffic is forwarded: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
Command History Default Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL Switch . Disabled Usage Information By default this command is disabled. There might be some ARP table entries which are resolved through ARP packets which had Ethernet MAC SA different from MAC information inside the ARP packet. This unicast data traffic flooding occurs only for those packets which use these ARP entries.
Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP) 37 Multicast source discovery protocol (MSDP) connects multiple PIM Sparse-Mode (PIM-SM) domains together. MSDP peers connect using TCP port 639. Peers send keepalives every 60 seconds. A peer connection is reset after 75 seconds if no MSDP packets are received. MSDP connections are parallel with MBGP connections. clear ip msdp peer Reset the TCP connection to the peer and clear all the peer statistics.
rejected-sa Enter the keywords rejected-sa to clear the cache source-active entries that are rejected because the RPF check failed, an SA filter or limit is configured, the RP or MSDP peer is unreachable, or because of a format error. local Enter the keyword local to clear out local PIM advertised entries. It applies the redistribute filter (if present) while adding the local PIM SA entries to the SA cache. Defaults Without any options, this command clears the entire source-active cache.
debug ip msdp Turn on MSDP debugging. Syntax debug ip msdp {event peer address | packet peer address | pim} To turn debugging off, use the no debug ip msdp {event peer address | packet peer address | pim} command. Parameters event peer address Enter the keyword event then the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). packet peer address Enter the keyword packet then the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). pim Enter the keyword pim to debug advertisement from PIM.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL Switch . show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa — Displays the rejected SAs in the SA cache. ip msdp default-peer Define a default peer from which to accept all source-active (SA) messages.
To disable logging, use the no ip msdp log-adjacency-changes command. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip msdp mesh-group To be a member of a mesh group, configure a peer. Syntax ip msdp mesh-group {name} {peer address} To remove the peer from a mesh group, use the no ip msdp mesh-group {name} {peer address} command.
ip msdp originator-id Configure the MSDP Originator ID. Syntax ip msdp originator-id {interface} To remove the originator-id, use the no ip msdp originator-id {interface} command. Parameters interface Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
• For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094.
ip msdp redistribute Filter local PIM SA entries in the SA cache. SAs which the ACL denies time out and are not refreshed. Until they time out, they continue to reside in the MSDP SA cache. Syntax Parameters ip msdp redistribute [list acl-name] list acl-name Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the name of an extended ACL that contains permitted SAs. If you do not use this option, all local entries are blocked.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip msdp sa-limit Configure the upper limit of source-active (SA) entries in SA-cache. Syntax ip msdp sa-limit number To return to the default, use the no ip msdp sa-limit number command.
ip msdp shutdown Administratively shut down a configured MSDP peer. Syntax Parameters ip msdp shutdown {peer address} peer address Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the peer address in a dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.). Version Version 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip multicast-msdp Enable MSDP.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example sa-cache Enter the keywords sa-cache to display the Source-Active cache. summary Enter the keyword summary to display an MSDP peer summary. Not configured. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show ip msdp peer 100.1.1.1 Peer Addr: 100.1.1.1 Local Addr: 100.1.1.
show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa Display the rejected SAs in the SA cache. Syntax show ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa Defaults none Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example 1008 • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#sh ip msdp sa-cache rejected-sa MSDP Rejected SA Cache 200 rejected SAs 1000 UpTime GroupAddr SourceAddr RPAddr 00:00:13 225.1.2.1 10.1.1.3 110.1.1.
38 Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) Multiple spanning tree protocol (MSTP), as implemented by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS), conforms to IEEE 802.1s. debug spanning-tree mstp Enable debugging of the multiple spanning tree protocol and view information on the protocol. Syntax Parameters debug spanning-tree mstp [all | bpdu interface {in | out} | events] all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to debug all spanning tree operations.
Example Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#debug spanning-tree mstp bpdu tengigabitethernet 0/16 ? in Receive (in) out Transmit (out) Dell# description Enter a description of the multiple spanning tree. Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters description Enter a description to identify the multiple spanning tree (maximum 80 characters).
Supported Modes Command History Related Commands Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol spanning-tree mstp — enters MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode. disable Enable bridge protocol data units (BPDU) filter globally to filter transmission of BPDU on port-fast enabled interfaces. Syntax edge-port bpdufilter default To disable global bpdu filter default, use the no edge-port bpdufilter default command.
Defaults 15 seconds Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. max-age — changes the wait time before MSTP refreshes protocol configuration information. hello-time — changes the time interval between bridge protocol data units (BPDUs).
max-age To maintain configuration information before refreshing that information, set the time interval for the MSTB. Syntax max-age seconds To return to the default values, use the no max-age command. Parameters max-age Enter a number of seconds the system waits before refreshing configuration information. The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The max-hops command is a configuration command that applies to both the IST and all MST instances in the MSTP region. The BPDUs sent out by the root switch set the remaining-hops parameter to the configured value of max-hops.
Usage Information By default, all VLANs are mapped to MST instance zero (0) unless you use the vlan range command to map it to a non-zero instance. Although MSTP instance IDs range from 0 to 4094, only 64 active instances are supported on the switch. name The name you assign to the multiple spanning tree region. Syntax name region-name To remove the region name, use the no name command. Parameters region-name Enter the MST region name. The range is 32 character limit. Defaults no default name.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information MSTP is not enabled when you enter MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode. To enable MSTP globally on the switch, enter the no disable command while in MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE mode. For more information about the multiple spanning tree protocol, refer to the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
name — assigns the region name to the MST region. show config View the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values are shown. Syntax show config Command Modes MULTIPLE SPANNING TREE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Dell#show spanning-tree mst configuration MST region name: CustomerSvc Revision: 2 MSTI VID 10 101-105 Dell# show spanning-tree msti View the multiple spanning tree instance. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show spanning-tree msti [instance-number [brief]] [guard] instance-number (Optional) Enter the multiple spanning tree instance number. The range is from 0 to 63. brief (Optional) Enter the keyword brief to view a synopsis of the MST instance.
---------- -------- ---- ------- ----------- -------------------------Te 0/10 128.170 128 2000 FWD 0 32768 0001.e800.0204 128.170 Te 0/11 128.171 128 2000 FWD 0 32768 0001.e800.0204 128.171 Te 0/12 128.172 128 2000 FWD 0 32768 0001.e800.0204 128.172 Interface Bpdu Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Cost Link-type Edge Filter Boundary ---------- ------ -------- ---- ------- ----------- --------------- ---Te 0/10 Desg 128.170 128 2000 FWD 0 P2P No No No Te 0/11 Desg 128.
on Gi 0/0 Port 257 (GigabitEthernet 0/0) is LBK_INC Discarding Port path cost 20000, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.257 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.6aa8 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e801.6aa8 Designated port id is 128.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. spanning-tree msti Configure multiple spanning tree instance cost and priority for an interface. Syntax Parameters spanning-tree msti instance {cost cost | priority priority} msti instance Enter the keyword msti and the MST instance number. The range is from zero (0) to 63.
spanning-tree mstp Configures a Layer 2 MSTP interface as an edge port with (optionally) a bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) guard, or enables the root guard or loop guard feature on the interface. Syntax Parameters spanning-tree mstp {edge-port [bpduguard [shutdown-onviolation]] | bpdufilter| rootguard} edge-port Enter the keywords edge-port to configure the interface as a multiple spanning tree edge port.
Enabling Portfast BPDU guard and loop guard at the same time on a port results in a port that remains in a blocking state and prevents traffic from flowing through it. For example, when Portfast BPDU guard and loop guard are both configured: • If a BPDU is received from a remote device, BPDU guard places the port in an err-disabled blocking state and no traffic is forwarded on the port.
39 Multicast The multicast commands are supported by Dell Networking Operating System (OS). This chapter contains the following sections: • IPv4 Multicast Commands • IPv6 Multicast Commands IPv4 Multicast Commands The following section contains the IPv4 multicast commands. clear ip mroute Clear learned multicast routes on the multicast forwarding table. To clear the protocol-independent multicast (PIM) tree information base, use the clear ip pim tib command.
ip mroute Assign a static mroute. Syntax ip mroute destination mask {ip-address | null 0| {{bgp| ospf} process-id | isis | rip | static} {ip-address | tag | null 0}} [distance] To delete a specific static mroute, use the ip mroute destination mask {ipaddress | null 0| {{bgp| ospf} process-id | isis | rip | static} {ip-address | tag | null 0}} [distance] command. To delete all mroutes matching a certain mroute, use the no ip mroute destination mask command.
Related Commands Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip mroute — views the multicast routing table. ip multicast-limit To limit the number of multicast entries on the system, use this feature. Syntax Parameters ip multicast-limit limit limit Defaults 15000 routes. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the desired maximum number of multicast entries on the system. The range is from 1 to 50000.
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information After you enable multicast, you can enable IGMP and PIM on an interface. In INTERFACE mode, enter the ip pim sparse-mode command to enable IGMP and PIM on the interface. Related Commands ip pim sparse-mode — enables IGMP and PIM on an interface.
snooping discovers for a specified multicast group and source. Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example (Static) summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of all routes. vlt (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlt to view multicast routes with a spanned incoming interface. Enter a multicast group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.
Example Dell#show ip mroute IP Multicast Routing Table (*, 224.10.10.1), uptime 00:05:12 Incoming interface: TenGigabitEthernet 0/2 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 0/13 (1.13.1.100, 224.10.10.1), uptime 00:04:03 Incoming interface: TenGigabitEthernet 1/4 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 0/6 TenGigabitEthernet 0/7 (*, 224.20.20.
Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 1/4 show ip rpf View reverse path forwarding. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip rpf • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2.(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Network administrators use static mroutes to control the reach-ability of the multicast sources.
debug ipv6 mld_host Enable the collection of debug information for MLD host transactions. Syntax [no] debug ipv6 mld_host [int-count | interface type] [slot/ port-range] To discontinue collection of debug information for the MLD host transactions, use the no debug ipv6 mld_host command. Parameters int-count Enter the keyword count to indicate the number of required debug messages.
Defaults 15000 routes. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This feature allows you to limit the number of multicast entries on the system. This number is the total of all the multicast entries on all line cards in the system.
Neighbor Discovery Protocol (NDP) 40 The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports the network discovery protocol for IPv6. The neighbor discovery protocol for IPv6 is defined in RFC 2461 as part of the Stateless Address Autoconfiguration protocol. It replaces the Address Resolution Protocol used with IPv4.
interface interface Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege To remove all neighbor entries learned on a specific interface, enter the keyword interface then the interface type and slot/port or number information of the interface: • For a Fast Ethernet interface, enter the keyword fastEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number.
• hardware_address Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Enter a 48-bit hardware MAC address in nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn format. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ipv6 neighbors Display IPv6 discovery information.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example 1036 none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell# show ipv6 neighbors IPv6 Address Expires(min)Hardware Address State Interface VLAN CPU -----------------------------------------------------------------100::1 0.03 00:00:00:00:00:22 DELAY Te 1/12 CP fe80::200:ff:fe00:22 232 00:00:00:00:00:22 STALE Te 1/12 CP 500::1 0.
NPIV Proxy Gateway 41 The N-port identifier virtualization (NPIV) Proxy Gateway (NPG) feature provides FCoE-FC bridging capability on the FN IOM with the FC Flex IO module switch, allowing server CNAs to communicate with SAN fabrics over the FN IOMwith the FC Flex IO module.
To display the PFC and ETS settings in DCB maps, enter the show qos dcb-map command. Use the dcb-map command to create a DCB map to specify PFC and ETS settings and apply it on Ethernet ports. After you apply a DCB map to an interface, the PFC and ETS settings in the map are applied when the Ethernet port is enabled. DCBx is enabled on Ethernet ports by default. The dcb-map command is supported only on physical Ethernet interfaces.
show fcoe-map— displays the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps. fabric-id vlan In an FCoE map, configure the association between the dedicated VLAN used to carry FCoE traffic between servers and a SAN, and the fabric where the desired storage arrays are installed.
Related Commands fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric. show fcoe-map— displays the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps. fcf-priority In an FCoE map, configure the priority used by a server CNA to select an upstream FCoE forwarder (FCF).
fc-map In an FCoE map, configure the FCoE mapped address prefix (FC-MAP) value which is used to identify FCoE traffic transmitted on the FCoE VLAN for the specified fabric. Syntax Parameters fc—map fc-map-value fc-map-value Enter the unique MAC address prefix used by a SAN fabric. The range of FC-MAP values is from 0EFC00 to 0EFCFF. Defaults None Command Modes FCoE MAP Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.
fcoe-map Create an FCoE map which contains the parameters used to configure the links between server CNAs and a SAN fabric. Apply the FCoE map on a server-facing Ethernet port. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes fcoe-map map-name map-name Maximum: 32 alphanumeric characters.
On an FN2210S Aggregator a with the PMUX module NPIV proxy gateway, you cannot apply an FCoE map applied on fabric-facing FC ports and server-facing 10– Gigabit Ethernet ports. An FCoE map consists of the following parameters: the dedicated FCoE VLAN used for storage traffic, the destination SAN fabric (FC-MAP value), FCF priority used by a server, and the FIP keepalive (FKA) advertisement timeout. In each FCoE map, the fabric ID, FC-MAP value, and FCoE VLAN parameters must be unique.
Parameters seconds Defaults 8 seconds Command Modes FCoE MAP Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter the time period (in seconds) used to send FIP keepalive messages to peer devices. The range is from 8 to 90 seconds. Version Description 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN 2210S Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module.
Usage Information FIP keepalive (FKA) messaging is used to detect if other FCoE devices are reachable. To remove FIP keepalive monitoring from an FCoE map, enter the no keepalive command. Related Commands fcoe-map— creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric. show fcoe-map— displays the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps. show fcoe-map Displays the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps.
The following describes the show fcoe-map brief output shown in the example. Field Description Fabric-Name Name of a SAN fabric. Fabric ID The ID number of the SAN fabric to which FC traffic is forwarded. VLAN ID The dedicated FCoE VLAN used to transport FCoE storage traffic between servers and a fabric over the NPIV proxy gateway. The configured VLAN ID must be the same as the fabric ID. FC-MAP FCoE MAC address-prefix value - The unique 24-bit MAC address prefix that identifies a fabric.
Example Field Description FCF Priority The priority used by a server to select an upstream FCoE forwarder. Config-State Indicates whether the configured FCoE and FC parameters in the FCoE map are valid: Active (all mandatory FCoE and FC parameters are correctly configured) or Incomplete (either the FC-MAP value, fabric ID, or VLAN ID are not correctly configured).
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Supported on the FN2210S Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module.
Example Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
server-fabric connection over an FN I/O Aggregator with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway. The following describes the show npiv devices brief output shown in the example. Field Description ENode-Intf FN I/O Aggregator with the FC Flex IO module Ethernet interface (slot/port) to which a server CNA is connected. ENode-WWPN Worldwide port name (WWPN) of a server CNA port. FCoE-Vlan VLAN ID of the dedicated VLAN used to transmit FCoE traffic to and from the fabric.
Example NPIV Proxy Gateway Field Description FCF MAC Fibre Channel forwarder MAC: MAC address of FN I/O Aggregator Switch with the FC Flex IO module FCF interface. Fabric Intf Fabric-facing Fibre Channel port (slot/port) on which FCoE traffic is transmitted to the specified fabric. FCoE VLAN ID of the dedicated VLAN used to transmit FCoE traffic from a server CNA to a fabric and configured on both the serverfacing FN I/O Aggregator with the FC Flex IO module port and server CNA port.
ENode WWNN FCoE MAC FC-ID LoginMethod Secs Status Related Commands : : : : : : 10:00:00:00:c9:d9:9c:cd 0e:fc:03:01:02:02 01:02:01 FDISC 5593 LOGGED_IN dcb-map— creates a DCB map to configure DCB parameters on Ethernet ports that support converged Ethernet traffic. fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric. show qos dcb-map Display the DCB parameters configured in a specified DCB map.
Example Field Description PFC Mode PFC configuration in DCB map: On (enabled) or Off. PG Priority group configured in the DCB map. TSA Transmission scheduling algorithm used by the priority group: Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS). BW Percentage of bandwidth allocated to the priority group. PFC PFC setting for the priority group: On (enabled) or Off. Priorities 802.1p priorities configured in the priority group.
Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) 42 The Switch supports open shortest path first version 2 (OSPFv2) for IPv4 and version 3 (OSPFv3) for IPv6. Up to 16 OSPF instances can be run simultaneously on the Switch. OSPF is an Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP), which means that it distributes routing information between routers in a single Autonomous System (AS).
Defaults cost = 1; no areas are configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information In the Dell Networking operating software, cost is defined as reference bandwidth. Related Commands area stub — creates a stub area. area nssa Specify an area as a not so stubby area (NSSA).
area range Summarize routes matching an address/mask at an area border router (ABR). Syntax area area-id range ip-address mask [not-advertise] To disable route summarization, use the no area area-id range ip-address mask command. Parameters area-id Specify the OSPF area in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) or enter a number from zero (0) to 65535. ip-address Specify an IP address in dotted decimal format. mask Specify a mask for the destination prefix. Enter the full mask (for example, 255.255.255.
Parameters area-id Specify the OSPF area in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D.) or enter a number from zero (0) to 65535. no-summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords no-summary to prevent the ABR from sending summary Link State Advertisements (LSAs) into the stub area. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
clear ip ospf Clear all OSPF routing tables. Syntax Parameters clear ip ospf process-id [process] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to clear a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, all OSPF processes are cleared. process (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword process to reset the OSPF process. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Supported Modes Command History Related Commands Full—Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip ospf statistics — displays the OSPF statistics. debug ip ospf Display debug information on OSPF. Entering the debug ip ospf commands enables OSPF debugging for the first OSPF process.
Field Description 8:14 Displays the time stamp. OSPF Displays the OSPF process ID: instance ID. v: Displays the OSPF version. The system supports version 2 only. t: Displays the type of packet sent: • 1 - Hello packet • 2 - database description • 3 - link state request • 4 - link state update • 5 - link state acknowledgement l: Displays the packet length. rid: Displays the OSPF router ID. aid: Displays the Autonomous System ID. chk: Displays the OSPF checksum.
Field Example Description • E + (router is able to accept AS External LSAs) • E - (router cannot accept AS External LSAs) • T + (router can support TOS) • T - (router cannot support TOS) hi: Displays the amount of time configured for the HELLO interval. di: Displays the amount of time configured for the DEAD interval. dr: Displays the IP address of the designated router. bdr: Displays the IP address of the Border Area Router.
• route-map mapname Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Related Commands 2 = Type 2 external route (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of an established route map. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. redistribute — redistributes routes from other routing protocols into OSPF.
description Add a description about the selected OSPF configuration. Syntax description description To remove the OSPF description, use the no description command. Parameters description Defaults none Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Related Commands Enter a text string description to identify the OSPF configuration (80 characters maximum). Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Supported Modes Command History Full—Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. distance ospf Configure an OSPF distance metric for different types of routes. Syntax distance ospf [external dist3] [inter-area dist2] [intra-area dist1] To delete these settings, use the no distance ospf command.
distribute-list in Apply a filter to incoming routing updates from OSPF to the routing table. Syntax distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] To delete a filter, use the no distribute-list prefix-list-name in [interface] command. Parameters prefix-list-name Enter the name of a configured prefix list. interface (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/ port or number information: Defaults Not configured.
isis (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword isis to specify that IS-IS routes are distributed. rip (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword rip to specify that RIP routes are distributed. static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to specify that only manually configured routes are distributed. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description heading 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
NOTE: The faster the convergence, the more frequent the route calculations and updates. This behavior impacts CPU utilization and may impact adjacency stability in larger topologies. Generally, convergence level 1 meets most convergence requirements. Higher convergence levels should only be selected following consultation with Dell Networking technical support. flood-2328 Enable RFC-2328 flooding behavior. Syntax flood-2328 To disable, use the no flood-2328 command. Defaults Disabled.
graceful-restart grace-period Specifies the time duration, in seconds, that the router’s neighbors continue to advertise the router as fully adjacent regardless of the synchronization state during a graceful restart. Syntax graceful-restart grace-period seconds To disable the grace period, use the no graceful-restart grace-period command.
graceful-restart mode Enable the graceful restart mode. Syntax graceful-restart mode [planned-only | unplanned-only] To disable graceful restart mode, use the no graceful-restart mode command. Parameters planned-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords planned-only to indicate graceful restart is supported in a planned restart condition only. unplanned-only (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords unplanned-only to indicate graceful restart is supported in an unplanned restart condition only.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip ospf auth-change-wait-time OSPF provides a grace period while OSPF changes its interface authentication type. During the grace period, OSPF sends out packets with new and old authentication scheme until the grace period expires. Syntax ip ospf auth-change-wait-time seconds To return to the default, use the no ip ospf auth-change-wait-time command.
Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information All neighboring routers in the same network must use the same password to exchange OSPF information. ip ospf cost Change the cost associated with the OSPF traffic on an interface. Syntax ip ospf cost cost To return to default value, use the no ip ospf cost command.
ip ospf dead-interval Set the time interval since the last hello-packet was received from a router. After the interval elapses, the neighboring routers declare the router dead. Syntax ip ospf dead-interval seconds To return to the default values, use the no ip ospf dead-interval command. Parameters seconds Defaults 40 seconds Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Enter the number of seconds for the interval. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 40 seconds.
Usage Information The time interval between the hello packets must be the same for routers in a network. Related Commands ip ospf dead-interval — sets the time interval before a router is declared dead. ip ospf message-digest-key Enable OSPF MD5 authentication and send an OSPF message digest key on the interface. Syntax ip ospf message-digest-key keyid md5key To delete a key, use the no ip ospf message-digest-key keyid command. Parameters keyid Enter a number as the key ID. The range is from 1 to 255.
ip ospf mtu-ignore Disable OSPF MTU mismatch detection upon receipt of database description (DBD) packets. Syntax ip ospf mtu-ignore To return to the default, use the no ip ospf mtu-ignore command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip ospf network Set the network type for the interface.
ip ospf priority To determine the designated router for the OSPF network, set the priority of the interface. Syntax ip ospf priority number To return to the default setting, use the no ip ospf priority command. Parameters number Defaults 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Enter a number as the priority. The range is from 0 to 255. The default is 1. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Supported Modes Command History Full—Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Set the time interval to a number large enough to prevent unnecessary retransmissions. For example, the interval must be larger for interfaces connected to virtual links. ip ospf transmit-delay To send a link state update packet on the interface, set the estimated time elapsed.
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. maximum-paths Enable the software to forward packets over multiple paths. Syntax maximum-paths number To disable packet forwarding over multiple paths, use the no maximum-paths command. Parameters number Specify the number of paths. The range for OSPFv2 is from 1 to 16.
Defaults none. Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command is either enabled or disabled. If no OSPF process is identified as the MIB manager, the first OSPF process is used. If an OSPF process has been selected, it must be disabled prior to assigning new process ID the MIB responsibility.
Usage Information To enable OSPF on an interface, the network area command must include, in its range of addresses, the primary IP address of an interface. NOTE: An interface can be attached only to a single OSPF area. If you delete all the network area commands for Area 0, the show ip ospf command output does not list Area 0. passive-interface Suppress both receiving and sending routing updates on an interface.
The default keyword sets all interfaces as passive. You can then configure individual interfaces, where adjacencies are desired, using the no passiveinterface interface command. The no form of this command is inserted into the configuration for individual interfaces when the no passive-interface interface command is issued while passive-interface default is configured.
Parameters connected Enter the keyword connected to specify that information from active routes on interfaces is redistributed. rip Enter the keyword rip to specify that RIP routing information is redistributed. static Enter the keyword static to specify that information from static routes is redistributed. metric metricvalue (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then a number. The range is from 0 (zero) to 16777214.
To disable redistribution, use the no redistribute bgp as number [metric metric-value] | [metric-type type-value] [tag tag-value] command. Parameters as number Enter the autonomous system number. The range is from 1 to 65535. metric metricvalue (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then the metricvalue number. The range is from 0 to16777214.
level-1-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-1-2 to redistribute both IS-IS Level-1 and Level-2 routes. level-2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords level-2 to redistribute only IS-IS Level-2 routes. metric metricvalue (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then a number. The range is from 0 (zero) to 4294967295.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You can configure an arbitrary value in the IP address format for each router. However, each router ID must be unique. If you use this command on an OSPF router process, which is already active (that is, has neighbors), a prompt reminding you that changing the router-id brings down the existing OSPF adjacency.
Example Dell(conf)#router ospf 2 Dell(conf-router_ospf)# show config Display the non-default values in the current OSPF configuration. Syntax show config Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If you delete all the network area commands for Area 0, the show ip ospf command output does not list Area 0. The following describes the show ip ospf command shown in the following example. Line Beginning Description with “Routing Process...” Displays the OSPF process ID and the IP address associated with the process ID. “Supports only...” Displays the number of Type of Service (TOS) rouse supported.
show ip ospf asbr Display all autonomous system boundary router (ASBR) routers visible to OSPF. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip ospf process-id asbr process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. databasesummary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords database-summary to the display the number of LSA types in each area and the total number of LSAs. • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
1.1.1.1 10.1.1.0 10.1.2.0 10.2.2.0 10.2.3.0 10.2.4.0 11.1.1.0 11.1.2.0 12.1.2.0 13.1.1.0 13.1.2.0 172.16.1.0 Dell> Related Commands 192.68.135.2 11.1.2.1 11.1.2.1 11.1.2.1 11.1.2.1 13.1.1.1 11.1.2.1 11.1.2.1 192.68.135.2 13.1.1.1 13.1.1.1 13.1.1.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip ospf database asbr-summary command shown in the following example. Example Field Description LS Age Displays the LSA’s age. Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following options can be found in this item: • TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on whether the router can support Type of Service.
Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Summary Asbr Link State ID: 104.1.50.1 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.10 LS Seq Number: 0x80000010 Checksum: 0x4198 Length: 28 --More-Related Commands show ip ospf database — displays OSPF database information. show ip ospf database external Display information on the AS external (type 5) LSAs. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf process-id database external [link-state-id] [advrouter ip-address] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
Example Field Description LS Age Displays the LSA’s age. Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following options can be found in this item: • TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on whether the router can support Type of Service. • DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router can support OSPF over demand circuits. • E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS External LSAs.
Length: 36 Network Mask: /32 Metrics Type: 2 TOS: 0 Metrics: 25 Forward Address: 0.0.0.0 External Route Tag: 43 LS age: 1868 Options: (No TOS-capability, DC) LS type: Type-5 AS External Link State ID: 24.216.12.0 Advertising Router: 20.20.20.8 LS Seq Number: 0x80000005 Checksum: 0xa00e Length: 36 Network Mask: /24 Metrics Type: 2 TOS: 0 Metrics: 1 Forward Address: 0.0.0.0 External Route Tag: 701 Dell# Related Commands show ip ospf database — displays OSPF database information.
• Supported Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip ospf process-id database network command shown in the following example. Example Field Description LS Age Displays the LSA’s age. Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router.
Network Mask: Attached Attached Attached /24 Router: 20.20.20.8 Router: 20.20.20.9 Router: 20.20.20.7 Network (Area 0.0.0.1) LS age: 252 Options: (TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Network Link State ID: 192.10.10.2 Advertising Router: 192.10.10.2 LS Seq Number: 0x80000007 Checksum: 0x4309 Length: 36 Network Mask: /24 Attached Router: 192.10.10.2 Attached Router: 20.20.20.1 Attached Router: 20.20.20.5 Dell# Related Commands show ip ospf database — displays OSPF database information.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show ip ospf database — displays OSPF database information. show ip ospf database opaque-area Display the opaque-area (type 10) LSA information. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf process-id database opaque-area [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address] process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process.
Example Item Description LS Age Displays the LSA’s age. Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following options can be found in this item: • TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on whether the router can support Type of Service. • DC or No DC is displayed depending on whether the originating router can support OSPF over demand circuits. • E or No E is displayed on whether the originating router can accept AS External LSAs.
Related Commands show ip ospf database — displays OSPF database information. show ip ospf database opaque-as Display the opaque-as (type 11) LSA information. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf process-id database opaque-as [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address] process-id Enter the OSPF process ID to show a specific process. If you do not enter the process ID, the command applies only to the first OSPF process. link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format.
show ip ospf database opaque-link Display the opaque-link (type 9) LSA information. Syntax Parameters show ip ospf process-id database opaque-link [link-state-id] [adv-router ip-address] process-id Enter the OSPF process ID to show a specific process. If you do not enter the process ID, the command applies only to the first OSPF process. link-state-id (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format.
link-state-id adv-router ipaddress Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Specify LSA ID in dotted decimal format. The LSA ID value depends on the LSA type, and it can be one of the following: • the network’s IP address for Type 3 LSAs or Type 5 LSAs • the router’s OSPF router ID for Type 1 LSAs or Type 4 LSAs • the default destination (0.0.0.
Example Item Description Checksum Displays the Fletcher checksum of an LSA’s complete contents. Length Displays the length in bytes of the LSA. Number of Links Displays the number of active links to the type of router (Area Border Router or AS Boundary Router) listed in the previous line. Link connected to: Identifies the type of network to which the router is connected. (Link ID) Identifies the link type and address. (Link Data) Identifies the router interface address.
Number of TOS metric: 0 TOS 0 Metric: 1 Link connected to: a Transit Network (Link ID) Designated Router address: 192.68.140.2 (Link Data) Router Interface address: 192.68.140.2 Number of TOS metric: 0 TOS 0 Metric: 1 Link connected to: a Stub Network (Link ID) Network/subnet number: 11.1.5.0 --More-Related Commands show ip ospf database — displays OSPF database information. show ip ospf database summary Display the network summary (type 3) LSA routing information.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip ospf process-id database summary command shown in the following example. Example Item Description LS Age Displays the LSA age. Options Displays the optional capabilities available on router. The following options can be found in this item: • TOS-capability or No TOS-capability is displayed depending on whether the router can support Type of Service.
LS age: 9 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Summary Network Link State ID: 192.68.32.0 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.10 LS Seq Number: 0x80000016 Checksum: 0x987c Length: 28 Network Mask: /24 TOS: 0 Metric: 1 LS age: 7 Options: (No TOS-capability, No DC, E) LS type: Summary Network Link State ID: 192.68.33.0 Advertising Router: 1.1.1.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip ospf process-id interface command shown in the following example. Example Item Description TenGigabitEthern et... This line identifies the interface type slot/port and the status of the OSPF protocol on that interface. Internet Address...
address 192.168.1.1 Timer intervals configured, Hello 10, Dead 40, Wait 40, Retransmit 5 Hello due in 00:00:02 Neighbor Count is 1, Adjacent neighbor count is 1 Adjacent with neighbor 192.168.253.1 (Backup Designated Router) TenGigabitEthernet 1/2 is up, line protocol is up Internet Address 192.168.0.1/24, Area 0.0.0.1 Process ID 1, Router ID 192.168.253.2, Network Type BROADCAST, Cost: 1 Transmit Delay is 1 sec, State DROTHER, Priority 1 Designated Router (ID) 192.168.253.5, Interface address 192.168.0.
Example Item Description Neighbor ID Displays the neighbor router ID. Pri Displays the priority assigned neighbor. State Displays the OSPF state of the neighbor. Dead Time Displays the expected time until the system declares the neighbor dead. Address Displays the IP address of the neighbor. Interface Displays the interface type slot/port information. Area Displays the neighbor’s area (process ID). Dell#show ip ospf 34 neighbor Neighbor ID 20.20.20.7 192.10.10.2 20.20.20.
display output of this command, the problem is with downloading the route to the RTM. This command has the following limitations: Example • The display output is sorted by prefixes; intra-area ECMP routes are not displayed together. • For Type 2 external routes, Type 1 cost is not displayed. Dell#show ip ospf 100 route Prefix Cost Nexthop 1.1.1.1 1 0.0.0.0 3.3.3.3 2 13.0.0.3 13.0.0.0 1 0.0.0.0 150.150.150.0 2 13.0.0.3 172.30.1.0 2 13.0.0.
Supported Modes Command Modes Command History Full–Switch • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip ospf statistics process-id global command shown in the following example. Row Heading Description Total Displays the total number of packets the OSPF process receives/transmits.
Example Error Type Description Non-Dr Received packets with a destination address of ALL_DRS even though SELF is not a designated router. Self-Org Receive the self originated packet. Wrong_Len The received packet length is different to what was indicated in the OSPF header. Invld-Nbr LSA, LSR, LSU, and DDB are received from a peer which is not a neighbor peer. Nbr-State LSA, LSR, and LSU are received from a neighbor with stats less than the loading state.
0 No-Buffer 0 Seq-No 0 Socket 0 Q-OverFlow 0 Unknown-Pkt 0 RtidZero 0 Error packets (Transmit statistics) Socket Errors 0 Dell# Usage Information The show ip ospf process-id statistics command displays the error packet count received on each interface as: • The hello-timer remaining value for each interface • The wait-timer remaining value for each interface • The grace-timer remaining value for each interface • The packet count received and transmitted for each neighbor • Dead timer remaining valu
Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example process-id Enter the OSPF Process ID to show a specific process. If no Process ID is entered, command applies only to the first OSPF process. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show ip ospf 10 timers rate-limit List of LSAs in rate limit Queue LSA id: 1.1.1.0 Type: 3 Adv Rtid: 3.3.3.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To isolate problems with inter-area and external routes, use this command. In OSPF inter-area and external routes are calculated by adding LSA cost to the cost of reaching the router. If an inter-area or external route is not of correct cost, the display can determine if the path to the originating router is correct or not. Example Dell#show ip ospf 1 topology Router ID 3.3.3.3 1.1.1.
With the not-advertise parameter configured, you can use this command to filter out some external routes. For example, if you want to redistribute static routes to OSPF, but you don't want OSPF to advertise routes with prefix 1.1.0.0, you can configure the summary-address 1.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 not-advertise to filter out all the routes fall in range 1.1.0.0/16. Related Commands area range — summarizes routes within an area.
Dell(conf-router_ospf-1)#end Dell# timers throttle lsa all Configure LSA transmit intervals. Syntax timers throttle lsa all {start-interval | hold-interval | maxinterval} To return to the default, use the no timers throttle lsa command. Parameters Defaults start-interval Set the minimum interval between initial sending and resending the same LSA. The range is from 0 to 600,000 milliseconds. hold-interval Set the next interval to send the same LSA.
timers throttle lsa arrival Configure the LSA acceptance intervals. Syntax timers throttle lsa arrival arrival-time To return to the default, use the no timers throttle lsa command. Parameters arrival-time Defaults 1000 msec Command Modes ROUTER OSPF Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Set the interval between receiving the same LSA repeatedly, to allow sufficient time for the system to accept the LSA. The range is from 0 to 600,000 milliseconds. Version Description 9.9(0.
ipsec spi number Security Policy index (SPI) value that identifies an IPsec security policy. The range is from 256 to 4294967295. MD5 | SHA1 Authentication type: Message Digest 5 (MD5) or Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (SHA-1). key-encryptiontype (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the key is encrypted. The values are 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). key Text string used in authentication. For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (nonencrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted).
area encryption Configure an IPsec encryption policy for OSPFv3 packets in an OSPFv3 area. Syntax area area-id encryption ipsec spi number esp encryptionalgorithm [key-encryption-type] key authentication-algorithm [key-encryption-type] key | null To remove an IPsec encryption policy from an interface, use the no area areaid encryption spi number command. Parameters area area-id Area for which OSPFv3 traffic is to be encrypted. For areaid, enter a number. The range is from 0 to 4294967295.
Valid values: 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). key Text string used in authentication. For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (nonencrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted). For SHA-1 authentication, the key must be 40 hex digits (non-encrypted) or 80 hex digits (encrypted). null Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv3 Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Causes an encryption policy configured for the area to not be inherited on the interface.
auto-cost Specify how the OSPF interface cost is calculated based on the reference bandwidth method. Syntax auto-cost [reference-bandwidth ref-bw] To return to the default bandwidth or to assign cost based on the interface type, use the no auto-cost [reference-bandwidth ref-bw] command. Parameters ref-bw (OPTIONAL) Specify a reference bandwidth in megabits per second. The range is from 1 to 4294967. The default is 100 megabits per second. Defaults 100 megabits per second.
clear ipv6 ospf process Reset an OSPFv3 router process without removing or re-configuring the process. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History clear ipv6 ospf process • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full—Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. debug ipv6 ospf bfd Display debug information and interface types for BFD on OSPF IPv6 packets.
Example Lines Beginning With or Including Description OSPFv3... Debugging is on for all OSPFv3 packets and all interfaces. 05:21:01 Displays the time stamp. Sending Ver:3 Sending OSPF3 version..
Parameters interface Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter one of the following keywords and slot/ port or number information: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keyword portchannel then a number. The range is 1 to 128. • For a tunnel interface, enter the keyword tunnel then a number. The range is 1 to 16383.
route-map mapname Defaults Disabled. Command Modes ROUTER OSPFv3 Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords route-map then the name of an established route map. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
When graceful restart is enabled (restarting role), an OSPFv3 restarting expects its OSPFv3 neighbors to help when it restarts by not advertising the broken link. When you enable the helper-reject role on an interface with the ipv6 ospf gracefulrestart helper-reject command, you reconfigure OSPFv3 graceful restart to function in a “restarting-only” role. In a “restarting-only” role, OSPFv3 does not participate in the graceful restart of a neighbor.
By default, both planned and unplanned restarts trigger an OSPFv3 graceful restart. Selecting one or the other mode restricts OSPFv3 to the single selected mode. ipv6 ospf area Enable IPv6 OSPF on an interface. Syntax ipv6 ospf process id area area id To disable OSPFv6 routing for an interface, use the no ipv6 ospf process-id area area-id command. Parameters process-id Enter the process identification number. area area-id Specify the OSPF area. The range is from 0 to 65535.
ipsec spi number Security Policy index (SPI) value that identifies an IPsec security policy. The range is from 256 to 4294967295. MD5 | SHA1 Authentication type: Message Digest 5 (MD5) or Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (SHA-1). key-encryptiontype (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the key is encrypted. Valid values: 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). key Text string used in authentication. For MD5 authentication, the key must be 32 hex digits (nonencrypted) or 64 hex digits (encrypted).
To disable all BFD sessions on an OSPFv3 interface implicitly, use the no ipv6 ospf bfd all-neighbors disable command. Parameters disable (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword disable to disable BFD on this interface. interval milliseconds (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interval to specify nondefault BFD session parameters beginning with the transmission interval. The range is from 50 to 1000. The default is 100.
ipv6 ospf cost Explicitly specify the cost of sending a packet on an interface. Syntax Parameters ipv6 ospf interface-cost interface-cost Enter a unsigned integer value expressed as the link-state metric. The range is from 1 to 65535. Defaults Default cost based on the bandwidth. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information By default, the dead interval is four times longer than the default ipv6 ospf hello-interval command. ipv6 ospf encryption Configure an IPsec encryption policy for OSPFv3 packets on an IPv6 interface.
3DES - 48 or 96 hex digits; DES - 16 or 32 hex digits; AESCBC -32 or 64 hex digits for AES-128 and 48 or 96 hex digits for AES-192. authenticationalgorithm Specifies the authentication algorithm to use for encryption. Valid values are MD5 or SHA1. key-encryptiontype (OPTIONAL) Specifies if the authentication key is encrypted. Valid values: 0 (key is not encrypted) or 7 (key is encrypted). key Text string used in authentication.
To disable the helper-reject role, use the no ipv6 ospf graceful-restart helper-reject command. Defaults The helper-reject role is not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Usage Command Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
ipv6 ospf priority To determine the Designated Router for the OSPFv3 network, set the priority of the interface. Syntax ipv6 ospf priority number To return to the default time interval, use the no ipv6 ospf priority command. Parameters number Defaults 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the number as the priority. The range is from 1 to 255. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. maximum-paths Enable the software to forward packets over multiple paths. Syntax maximum-paths number To disable packet forwarding over multiple paths, use the no maximum-paths command. Parameters number Specify the number of paths. The range is from 1 to 64. The default is 8 paths.
interface Command Modes Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. ROUTER OSPF for OSPFv2 ROUTER OSPFv3 for OSPFv3 Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.
Parameters bgp as number Enter the keyword bgp then the autonomous system number. The range is from 1 to 65535. connected Enter the keyword connected to redistribute routes from physically connected interfaces. static Enter the keyword static to redistribute manually configured routes. metric metricvalue Enter the keyword metric then the metric value. The range is from 0 to 16777214. The default is 20.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Added support for OSPFv3. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To redistribute the default route (x:x:x:x::x), use the default-information originate command. Related Commands default-information originate — generates a default route into the OSPF routing domain. router-id Designate a fixed router ID.
Example Dell(conf)#router ospf 100 Dell(conf-router_ospf)#router-id 1.1.1.1 Changing router-id will bring down existing OSPF adjacency [y/ n]: Dell(conf-router_ospf)#show config ! router ospf 100 router-id 1.1.1.1 Dell(conf-router_ospf)#no router-id Changing router-id will bring down existing OSPF adjacency [y/ n]: Dell# show crypto ipsec policy Display the configuration of IPsec authentication and encryption policies.
show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 Display the IPsec security associations (SAs) used on OSPFv3 interfaces. Syntax Parameters show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 [interface interface] interface interface Defaults none Command Modes EXEC (OPTIONAL) Displays information about the SAs used on a specified OSPFv3 interface, where interface is one of the following values: • For a Port Channel interface, enter port-channel then the port channel number.
grace-lsa Defaults none Command Modes EXEC (OPTIONAL): Enter the keywords grace-lsa to display the Type-11 Grace LSAs sent and received on an OSPFv3 router. EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information The show crypto ipsec sa ipv6 command output displays security associations set up for OSPFv3 links in IPsec authentication and encryption policies on the router.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information If you enable BFD at the global level, show ipv6 ospf interface shows the BFD provisioning. If you enable BFD at the interface level, show ipv6 ospf interface shows the BFD interval timers.
EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. timers spf Set the time interval between when the switch receives a topology change and starts a shortest path first (SPF) calculation. Syntax timers spf delay holdtime To return to the default, use the no timers spf command. Parameters Defaults delay Enter a number as the delay. The range is from 0 to 4294967295.
Dell(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)#timer spf 2 5 Dell(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)# Dell(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)#show config ! ipv6 router ospf 1 timers spf 2 5 Dell(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)# Dell(conf-ipv6-router_ospf)#end Dell# Open Shortest Path First (OSPFv2 and OSPFv3) 1143
43 Policy-based Routing (PBR) Policy-based routing (PBR) allows you to apply routing policies to specific interfaces. To enable PBR, create a redirect list and apply it to the interface. After the redirect list is applied to the interface, all traffic passing through the interface is subject to the rules defined in the redirect list. PBR is supported by the Dell Networking operating software (OS).
ip redirect-group Apply a redirect list (policy-based routing) on an interface. You can apply multiple redirect lists to an interface by entering this command multiple times. Syntax ip redirect-group redirect-list-name To remove a redirect list from an interface, use the no ip redirect-group name command. Parameters redirect-list-name Enter the name of a configured redirect list.
ip redirect-list Configure a redirect list and enter REDIRECT-LIST mode. Syntax ip redirect-list redirect-list-name To remove a redirect list, use the no ip redirect-list command. Parameters redirect-list-name Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Enter the name of a redirect list. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. 8.4.2.1 Introduced on the C-Series and S-Series.
ip for any internet protocol • tcp for transmission control protocol • udp for user datagram protocol source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x). any Enter the keyword any to specify that all traffic is subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
Version Description 7.5.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series ExaScale. redirect Configure a rule for the redirect list. Syntax redirect {ip-address | slot/port} | tunnel tunnel-id}[track ]{ip-protocol-number | protocol-type [bit]} {source mask | any | host ip-address} {destination mask | any | host ip-address} [operator] To remove this filter, use one of the following: Parameters • Use the no seq sequence-number command if you know the filter’s sequence number.
psh = push function • rst = reset the connection • syn = synchronize sequence number • urg = urgent field source Enter the IP address of the network or host from which the packets were sent. mask Enter a network mask in /prefix format (/x). any Enter the keyword any to specify that all traffic is subject to the filter. host ip-address Enter the keyword host then the IP address to specify a host IP address. destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent.
seq Configure a filter with an assigned sequence number for the redirect list.
destination Enter the IP address of the network or host to which the packets are sent. bit (OPTIONAL) For the TCP protocol type only, enter one or a combination of the following TCP flags: operator ack = acknowledgement • fin = finish (no more data from the user) • psh = push function • rst = reset the connection • syn = synchronize sequence number • urg = urgent field (OPTIONAL) For the TCP and UDP parameters only.
show cam pbr Displaysthe PBR CAM content. Syntax Parameters show cam pbr {[interface interface] | stack—unit slot-number port-set number]} [summary] interface interface Enter the keyword interface then the name of the interface. stack–unit number Enter the keyword stack-unit then the slot number. The range is from 0 to 11 . port-set number Enter the keywords port-set then the port-pipe number. The range is from 0 to 0. summary Enter the keyword summary to view only the total number of CAM entries.
show ip redirect-list View the redirect list configuration and the interfaces it is applied to. Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show ip redirect-list redirect-list-name redirect-list-name • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Enter the name of a configured Redirect list. Full—Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added support for removing the Sonet interface on the MXL. 7.4.1.0 Introduced.
44 PIM-Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) The protocol-independent multicast (PIM) commands are supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). This chapter contains the following sections: • IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands • IPv6 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands IPv4 PIM-Sparse Mode Commands The following describes the IPv4 PIM-sparse mode (PIM-SM) commands. clear ip pim rp-mapping The bootstrap router (BSR) feature uses this command to remove all or particular rendezvous point (RP) advertisement.
clear ip pim tib Clear PIM tree information from the PIM database. Syntax Parameters clear ip pim tib [group] group Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full—Swtich Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
packet [in | out] • in: to view incoming packets • out: to view outgoing packets register (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword register to view PIM register address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). state (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword state to view PIM state changes. timer [assert | hello | joinprune | register] (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword timer to view PIM timers. Enter one of the optional parameters: Defaults Disabled.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command is applied to the subsequent PIM-BSR. Existing BSR advertisements are cleaned up by time-out. To clean the candidate RP advertisements, use the clear ip pim rp-mapping command. ip pim bsr-candidate To join the Bootstrap election process, configure the PIM router.
ip pim dr-priority Change the designated router (DR) priority for the interface. Syntax ip pim dr-priority priority-value To remove the DR priority value assigned, use the no ip pim dr-priority command. Parameters priority-value Defaults 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Swtich Command History Enter a number. Preference is given to larger/higher number. The range is from 0 to 4294967294. The default is 1. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell(conf)# ip access-list extended iptv-channels Dell(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip 10.1.2.3/24 225.1.1.0/24 Dell(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip any 232.1.1.0/24 Dell(config-ext-nacl)# permit ip 100.1.1.
To remove the restriction, use the no ip pim neighbor-filter {accesslist} command. Parameters access-list Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Enter the name of a standard access list. Maximum 16 characters. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Do not enter this command before creating the access-list.
ip pim register-filter To prevent a PIM source DR from sending register packets to an RP for the specified multicast source and group, use this feature. Syntax ip pim register-filter access-list To return to the default, use the no ip pim register-filter access-list command. Parameters access-list Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Enter the name of an extended access list. Maximum 16 characters. Version Description 9.9(0.
NOTE: This option is applicable to multicast group range. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full—Swtich Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information First-hop routers use this address by to send register packets on behalf of source multicast hosts. The RP addresses are stored in the order in which they are entered.
Supported Modes Command History Full—Swtich Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Priority is stored at BSR router when receiving a Candidate-RP-Advertisement. ip pim sparse-mode Enable PIM sparse mode and IGMP on the interface. Syntax ip pim sparse-mode To disable PIM sparse mode and IGMP, use the no ip pim sparse-mode command. Defaults Disabled.
access-list name (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a previously configured Extended ACL to enable the expiry time to specified S,G entries. Defaults Disabled. The default expiry timer (with no times configured) is 210 sec. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full—Swtich Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command configures an expiration timer for all S.
no ip pim snooping dr-flood Disable the flooding of multicast packets to the PIM designated router. Syntax no ip pim snooping dr-flood To re-enable the flooding of multicast packets to the PIM designated router, use the ip pim snooping dr-flood command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Supported Modes Command History Example Full—Swtich Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. E600-7-rpm0#show ip pim bsr-router PIMv2 Bootstrap information This system is the Bootstrap Router (v2) BSR address: 7.7.7.7 (?) Uptime: 16:59:06, BSR Priority: 0, Hash mask length: 30 Next bootstrap message in 00:00:08 This system is a candidate BSR Candidate BSR address: 7.7.7.
Field Description • Example S = PIM Sparse mode Nbr Count Displays the number of PIM neighbors discovered over this interface. Query Intvl Displays the query interval for Router Query messages on that interface (configured with ip pim query-interval command). DR Prio Displays the Designated Router priority value configured on the interface (use the ip pim dr-priority command). DR Displays the IP address of the Designated Router for that interface.
Field Description Interface List the interface type, with either slot/port information or ID (VLAN or Port Channel), on which the PIM neighbor was found. Uptime/expires Displays the amount of time the neighbor has been up then the amount of time until the neighbor is removed from the multicast routing table (that is, until the neighbor hold time expires). Ver Displays the PIM version number. • DR prio/Mode Example v2 = PIM version 2 Displays the Designated Router priority and the mode.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#sh ip pim rp Group RP 224.2.197.115 165.87.20.4 224.2.217.146 165.87.20.4 224.3.3.3 165.87.20.4 225.1.2.1 165.87.20.4 225.1.2.2 165.87.20.4 229.1.2.1 165.87.20.4 229.1.2.2 165.87.20.4 Dell# Example (Mapping) Dell#sh ip pim rp mapping Group(s): 224.0.0.0/4 RP: 165.87.20.4, v2 Info source: 165.87.20.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip pim snooping interface commands shown in the following example. Example (#2) Field Description Interface Displays the VLAN interfaces with PIM-SM snooping enabled.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show ip pim snooping neighbor commands shown in the following example. Field Description Neighbor address Displays the IP address of the neighbor learned through PIM-SM snooping. Interface Displays the VLAN ID number and slot/port on which the PIM-SM-enabled neighbor was discovered.
Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History vlan vlan-id (OPTIONAL) Enter a VLAN ID to display TIB information PIMSM snooping discovered on a specified VLAN. The valid VLAN IDs range is from 1 to 4094. group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D) to display TIB information PIM-SM snooping discovered for a specified multicast group. source-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the source address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.
Example Field Description Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding (RPF) interface towards the RP/ source. RPF neighbor Displays the next hop from this interface towards the RP/ source.
• Supported Modes Command History Example EXEC Privilege Full—Swtich Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
show ip pim tib View the PIM tree information base (TIB). Syntax Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip pim tib [group-address [source-address]] group-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). source-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the source address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full—Swtich Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Field Description Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding (RPF) interface towards the RP/ source. RPF neighbor Displays the next hop from this interface towards the RP/ source.
show running-config pim Display the current configuration of PIM-SM snooping. Syntax show running-config pim Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full—Swtich Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example Dell#show running-config pim ! ip pim snooping enable Related Commands ip pim sparse-mode — enables PIM-SM snooping.
ipv6 pim bsr-candidate Configure the router as a bootstrap (BSR) candidate. Syntax ipv6 pim bsr-candidate interface [hash-mask-length] [priority] To disable the bootstrap candidate, use the no ipv6 pim bsr-candidate command. Parameters interface • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number.
Parameters priority-value Defaults 1 Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full—Swtich Command History Enter a number. Preference is given to larger/higher number. The range is from 0 to 4294967294. The default is 1. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The router with the largest value assigned to an interface becomes the designated router.
Dell(conf-ipv6-acl)#exit Dell(conf)#interface tengigabitethernet 0/84 Dell(conf-if-te-0/84)#ipv6 pim join-filter JOIN-FIL_ACL in Dell(conf-if-te-0/84)#ipv6 pim join-filter JOIN-FIL_ACL out ipv6 pim query-interval Change the frequency of IPv6 PIM router-query messages. Syntax ipv6 pim query-interval seconds To return to the default value, use the no ipv6 pim query-interval seconds command.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Do not enter this command before creating the access-list. ipv6 pim register-filter Configure the source DR so that it does not send register packets to the RP for the specified sources and groups.
Parameters address Enter the IPv6 RP address in the x:x:x:x::x format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero. group-address group-address mask Enter the keywords group-address then the group address in the x:x:x:x::x format and then the mask in /nn format to assign that group address to the RP. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zero. override Enter the keyword override to override the BSR updates with static RP.
priority-value Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. (OPTIONAL) Enter a number as the priority of this RP Candidate, which is included in the Candidate-RPAdvertisements.
ipv6 pim spt-threshold Specifies when a PIM leaf router should join the shortest path tree. Syntax ipv6 pim spt-threshold {kbps | infinity} To return to the default value, use the no ipv6 pim spt-threshold command. Parameters kbps Enter a traffic rate in kilobytes per second. The range is from 0 to 4294967 kbps. The default is 10 kbps. infinity Enter the keyword infinity to have all sources for the specified group use the shared tree and never join shortest path tree (SPT).
Uptime: 00:02:54, BSR Priority: 0, Hash mask length: 126 Next bootstrap message in 00:00:06 This system is a candidate BSR Candidate BSR address: 14::2, priority: 0, hash mask length: 126 Dell show ipv6 pim interface Display IPv6 PIM enabled interfaces. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show ipv6 pim interface • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full—Swtich Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show ipv6 pim neighbor detail Neighbor Interface Uptime/Expires Ver DR Address Prio/Mode fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:6265 Te 0/3 00:07:39/00:01:42 v2 1 / S 165:87:50::6 Dell# show ipv6 pim rp View all multicast groups-to-RP mappings.
Example (Mapping) Dellshow ipv6 pim rp mapping PIM Group-to-RP Mappings Group(s): ff00::/8 RP: 14::1, v2 Info source: 14::1, via bootstrap, priority 192 Uptime: 00:03:37, expires: 00:01:53 Group(s): ff00::/8, Static RP: 14::2, v2 Dell show ipv6 pim tib View the IPv6 PIM multicast-routing database (tree information base — tib).
(25::1, ff0e::225:1:2:1), uptime 00:09:53, expires 00:00:00,flags: CJ RPF neighbor: TenGigabitEthernet 0/3, fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:6265 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 (25::1, ff0e::225:1:2:2), uptime 00:09:54, expires 00:00:00,flags: CJ RPF neighbor: TenGigabitEthernet 0/3, fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:6265 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 1/1 (25::2, ff0e::225:1:2:2), uptime 00:09:54, expires 00:00:00,flags: CJ RPF neighbor: TenGigabitEthernet 0/3, fe80::201:e8ff:fe00:6265 Outgoing interfac
Port Monitoring 45 The port monitoring feature allows you to monitor network traffic by forwarding a copy of each incoming or outgoing packet from one port to another port. Important Points to Remember • Port monitoring is supported on physical ports only. Port-channel interfaces and virtual local area networks (VLANs), are not supported. • The monitoring (destination, “MG”) and monitored (source, “MD”) ports must be on the same switch.
description Enter a description of this monitoring session. Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command. Parameters description Enter a description regarding this session (80 characters maximum). Defaults none Command Modes MONITOR SESSION (conf-mon-sess-session-ID) Supported Modes All Modes Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.
Version Description 7.4.1.0 Introduced on the E-Series. Usage Information To monitor traffic with particular flows the interface, appropriate ACLs has be applied in ingress direction. Flow- based is not supported in the tx direction. Even though we can configure it in both the direction, only rx will work. The flow- based enable command has to be applied as a monitor session with some configuration which is already present in it, other wise flow- based will not take effect.
monitor session Create a session for monitoring traffic with port monitoring. Syntax monitor session session-ID To delete a session, use the no monitor session session-ID command. To delete all monitor sessions, use the no monitor session all command. Parameters session-ID Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter a session identification number. The range is from 0 to 65535. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
Example Dell(conf-mon-sess-5)#show config ! monitor session 5 source TenGigabitEthernet 0/4 destination TenGigabitEthernet 0/7 direction rx Dell(conf-mon-sess-5)# show monitor session Display the monitor information of a particular session or all sessions. Syntax show monitor session {session-ID} To display monitoring information for all sessions, use the show monitor session command.
To display the running configuration for all monitor sessions, use the show running-config monitor session command. Parameters session-ID Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter a session identification number. The range is from 0 to 65535. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator.
Parameters interface Enter the one of the following keywords and slot/port information: • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. destination Enter the keyword destination to indicate the interface destination. direction {rx | tx | both} Enter the keyword direction followed by one of the packet directional indicators. • rx: to monitor receiving packets only. • tx: to monitor transmitting packets only.
Private VLAN (PVLAN) 46 Private VLANs extend the Dell Networking OS security suite by providing Layer 2 isolation between ports within the same private VLAN. A private VLAN partitions a traditional VLAN into subdomains identified by a primary and secondary VLAN pair. The Dell Networking OS private VLAN implementation is based on RFC 3069. For more information, refer to the following commands. The command output is augmented in the Dell Networking OS version 7.8.1.
• Isolated port: An isolated port is a port that, in Layer 2, can only communicate with promiscuous ports that are in the same PVLAN. • Promiscuous port: A promiscuous port is a port that is allowed to communicate with any other port type. • Trunk port: A trunk port carries VLAN traffic across switches: – A trunk port in a PVLAN is always tagged. – A trunk port in Tagged mode carries primary or secondary VLAN traffic. The tag on the packet helps identify the VLAN to which the packet belongs.
show interfaces private-vlan — displays the type and status of the PVLAN interfaces. show vlan private-vlan — displays the PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN. switchport mode private-vlan — sets PVLAN mode of the selected port. private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan Map secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN.
show vlan private-vlan mapping — displays the primary-secondary VLAN mapping. switchport mode private-vlan — sets PVLAN mode of the selected port. private-vlan mode Set PVLAN mode of the selected VLAN to community, isolated, or primary. Syntax [no] private-vlan mode {community | isolated | primary} To remove the PVLAN configuration, use the no private-vlan mode {community | isolated | primary} command syntax. Parameters community Enter the keyword community to set the VLAN as a community VLAN.
Related Commands private-vlan mapping secondary-vlan — maps secondary VLANs to the selected primary VLAN. show interfaces private-vlan — displays the type and status of the PVLAN interfaces. show vlan private-vlan — displays the PVLANs and/or interfaces that are part of a PVLAN. show vlan private-vlan mapping — displays the primary-secondary VLAN mapping. switchport mode private-vlan — sets PVLAN mode of the selected port. show interfaces private-vlan Display type and status of PVLAN interfaces.
Example (All) Field Description PVLAN-Type Displays the type of VLAN in which the designated interface resides. Interface Type Displays the PVLAN port type of the designated interface. Status States whether the interface is operationally up or down.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History primary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword primary to display VLANs configured as primary VLANs, along with their interfaces. primary_vlan (OPTIONAL) Enter a private VLAN ID or secondary VLAN ID to display interface details about the designated PVLAN. interface interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface and an interface ID to display the PVLAN configuration of the designated interface.
201 202 community No community Yes Gi 3/11-12 Example (Primary) Dell# show vlan private-vlan primary Primary Secondary Type Active Ports ------- --------- --------- ------ ------10 primary Yes Gi 2/1,3 20 primary Yes Gi 3/1,3 Example (Isolated) Dell# show vlan private-vlan isolated Primary Secondary Type Active Ports ------- --------- --------- ------ ---------10 primary Yes Gi 2/1,3 100 isolated Yes Gi 2/2,4-6 200 isolated Yes Gi 3/2,4-6 Example (Community) Dell# show vlan private-vlan community Pr
show vlan private-vlan mapping — displays the primary-secondary VLAN mapping. switchport mode private-vlan — sets PVLAN mode of the selected port. show vlan private-vlan mapping Display primary-secondary VLAN mapping. Syntax show vlan private-vlan mapping Defaults none Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full—Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced the on MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
switchport mode private-vlan Set PVLAN mode of the selected port. Syntax [no] switchport mode private-vlan {host | promiscuous | trunk} To remove PVLAN mode from the selected port, use the no switchport mode private-vlan command. Parameters host Enter the keyword host to configure the selected port or port channel as an isolated interface in a PVLAN. promiscuous Enter the keyword promiscuous to configure the selected port or port channel as an promiscuous interface.
show vlan private-vlan mapping — displays the primary-secondary VLAN mapping.
Per-VLAN Spanning Tree Plus (PVST+) 47 The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) implementation of per-VLAN spanning tree plus (PVST+) is based on the IEEE 802.1w standard spanning tree protocol, but it creates a separate spanning tree for each VLAN configured. NOTE: For easier command line entry, the plus (+) sign is not used at the command line. description Enter a description of the PVST+. Syntax description {description} To remove the description, use the no description {description} command.
To enable PVST+, use the no disable command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-pvst) Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol spanning-tree pvst — enter PVST+ mode. edge-port bpdufilter default Enable BPDU Filter globally to filter transmission of BPDU on port fast enabled interfaces.
Supported Modes Command History Example Full—Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell(conf-pvst)#do show spanning-tree pvst vlan 2 brief VLAN 2 Executing IEEE compatible Spanning Tree Protocol Root ID Priority 32768, Address 001e.c9f1.00f3 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge ID Priority 32768, Address 001e.c9f1.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
guard Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword guard to display the type of guard enabled on a PVST interface and the current port state. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full—Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show spanning-tree pvst command shown in the following examples.
128.459 Interface Name Role PortID Prio Cost Sts Filter ---------- ------ -------- ---- -----------Po 23 Desg 128.24 128 1600 FWD Te 0/11 Dis 128.450 128 2000 DIS Te 0/12 Desg 128.459 128 2000 FWD Dell# Example Bpdu Cost Link-type Edge --- -------- ---0 0 0 P2P P2P P2P No No No No No No Dell#show spanning-tree pvst vlan 2 VLAN 2 Root Identifier has priority 32768, Address 001e.c9f1.00f3 Root Bridge hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15 Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, Address 001e.c9f1.
----------------------------------------------------------Te 0/2 128.1223 128 20000 EDS 0 32768 0001.e800.a12b 128.
shutdown-onviolation (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords shutdown-on-violation to hardware disable an interface when a BPDU is received and the port is disabled. bpdufilter (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdufilter to stop sending and receiving BPDUs on port fast enabled ports. err-disable Enter the keywords err-disable to enable the port to be put into the error-disable state (EDS) if an error condition occurs. vlan vlan-range Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN numbers. The range is from 1 to 4094.
NOTE: A port configured as an edge port, on a PVST switch, will immediately transition to the forwarding state. Only ports connected to end-hosts should be configured as an edge port. Consider an edge port similar to a port with a spanning-tree portfast enabled.
Related Commands show spanning-tree pvst — views the PVST+ configuration. tc-flush-standard Enable the MAC address flushing after receiving every topology change notification. Syntax tc-flush-standard To disable, use the no tc-flush-standard command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full—Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Supported Modes Command History Related Commands Full—Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. vlan forward-delay — changes the time interval before the system transitions to the Forwarding state. vlan hello-time — change the time interval between BPDUs. vlan max-age — changes the time interval before PVST+ refreshes. show spanning-tree pvst — displays the PVST+ configuration.
vlan max-age — changes the time interval before PVST+ refreshes. show spanning-tree pvst — displays the PVST+ configuration. vlan hello-time Set the time interval between generation of PVST+ and BPDUs. Syntax vlan vlan-id hello-time seconds To return to the default value, use the no vlan hello-time command. Parameters vlan vlan-range Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN numbers. The range is from 1 to 4094.
To return to the default, use the no vlan max-age command. Parameters vlan vlan-range Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN numbers. The range is from 1 to 4094. max-age seconds Enter the keywords max-age then the time interval, in seconds, that the system waits before refreshing configuration information. The range is from 6 to 40 seconds. The default is 20 seconds.
48 Quality of Service (QoS) The Dell Networking operating software commands for quality of service (QoS) include traffic conditioning and congestion control. QoS commands are not universally supported on all Dell Networking Products. Global Configuration Commands There are only two global configuration QoS commands. qos-rate-adjust By default, while rate limiting, policing, and shaping, the system does not include the Preamble, SFD, or the IFG fields.
Parameters Defaults value Enter a dot1p list number and value. The list number range is from 0 to 7. The range is from 0 to 3. For each dot1p Priority, the default CoS queue value is: • dot1p CoS Queue 0 0-7 1 0-7 2 0-7 3 0-7 4 0-7 5 0-7 6 0-7 7 0-7 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full-Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
To delete the IEEE 802.1p configuration on the interface, use the no dot1ppriority command. Parameters priority-value Enter a value from 0 to 7. dot1p Queue Number 0 2 1 0 2 1 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full-Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.
Parameters kbps Enter the keyword kbps to specify the rate limit in Kilobits per second (Kbps). Make the following value a multiple of 64. The range is from 0 to 40000000. The default granularity is Megabits per second (Mbps). committed-rate Enter the bandwidth in Mbps. The range is from 0 to 10000. burst-KB (OPTIONAL) Enter the burst size in KB. The range is from 16 to 200000. The default is 50. peak peak-rate (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword peak then a number to specify the peak rate in Mbps.
64. The range is from 0 to 40000000. The default granularity is Megabits per second (Mbps). rate Enter the outgoing rate in multiples of 10 Mbps. The range is from 10 to 10000. burst-KB (OPTIONAL) Enter the burst size in KB. The range is from 0 to 10000. The default is 50. Defaults Granularity for rate is Mbps unless you use the kbps option. Command Modes QOS-POLICY-OUT Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full-Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM.
Command Modes Supported Modes dot1p Queue ID 6 3 7 3 • INTERFACE • CONFIGURATION Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full-Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To honor all incoming 802.1p markings on incoming switched traffic on the interface, enter this command.
Full-Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Guarantee a minimum bandwidth to different queues globally using the serviceclass bandwidth-percentage command from CONFIGURATION mode. The command is applied in the same way as the bandwidth-percentage command in an output QoS policy.
this traffic is flowing. To assign the strict priority schedule type to egress queues, use the scheduler strict command in QOS-POLICY-OUT mode. The system OS does not support bandwidth configuration on strict priority scheduler queues. When you enable ETS, the egress QoS features in the output QoS policy-map (such as strict priority unicast <0-3> and scheduler strict), default scheduler for egress queues are superseded by ETS configurations. This is to provide compatibility with DCBX.
Usage Information The unit of bandwidth percentage is 1%. A bandwidth percentage of 0 is allowed and disables the scheduling of that class. If the sum of the bandwidth percentages given to all eight classes exceeds 100%, the bandwidth percentage automatically scales down to 100%. Related Commands qos-policy-output — creates a QoS output policy. class-map Create/access a class map. Class maps differentiate traffic so that you can apply separate quality-ofservice policies to each class.
ip access-list standard — configures a standard IP ACL. match ip access-group — configures the match criteria based on the access control list (ACL). match ip precedence — identifies the IP precedence values as match criteria. match ip dscp configures the match criteria based on the DSCP value. match ip access-group — configures a match criterion for a class map based on the contents of the designated MAC ACL. match mac dot1p — configures a match criterion for a class map based on a dot1p value.
Related Commands show qos statistics — displays the QoS statistics. crypto key zeroize rsa Removes the generated RSA host keys and zeroize the key storage location. Syntax crypto key zeroize rsa Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supporting Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.
match ip vlan Uses a VLAN as the match criterion for an L3 class map. Syntax match ip vlan vlan-id To remove VLAN as the match criterion, use the no match ip vlan vlan-id command. Parameters vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan and then the ID of the VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. Defaults none Command Modes CONF-CLASS-MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the MXL switch. Usage Information To access this command, enter the class-map command.
qos-policy-output — creates an output QoS-policy on the router. match ip dscp Use a differentiated services code point (DSCP) value as a match criteria. Syntax match {ip | ipv6 | ip-any} dscp dscp-list [set-ip-dscp value] To remove a DSCP value as a match criteria, use the no match {ip | ipv6 | ip-any} dscp dscp-list [[multicast] set-ip-dscp value] command. Parameters ip Enter the keyword ip to support IPv4 traffic.
Related Commands class-map — identifies the class map. match ip precedence Use IP precedence values as a match criteria. Syntax match {ip | ipv6 | ip-any} precedence ip-precedence-list [setip-dscp value] To remove IP precedence as a match criteria, use the no match {ip | ipv6 | ip-any} precedence ip-precedence-list [[multicast] set-ip-dscp value] command. Parameters ip Enter the keyword ip to support IPv4 traffic. ipv6 Enter the keyword ipv6 to support IPv6 traffic.
NOTE: Only one of the IP precedence values must be a successful match criterion, not all of the specified IP precedence values must match. Related Commands class-map — identifies the class map. match mac access-group Configure a match criterion for a class map, based on the contents of the designated MAC ACL. Syntax Parameters match mac access-group {mac-acl-name} mac-acl-name Defaults none Command Modes CLASS-MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter a MAC ACL name.
Usage Information To access this command, enter the class-map command. After the class map is identified, you can configure the match criteria. Related Commands class-map — identifies the class map. match mac vlan Configure a match criterion for a class map based on VLAN ID. Syntax Parameters match mac vlan number number Defaults none Command Modes CLASS-MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.9(0.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Aggregate input/output QoS policy applies to all the port ingoing/outgoing traffic. Aggregate input/output QoS policy can coexist with per queue input/output QoS policies. Related Commands 1.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The input policy map is used to classify incoming traffic to different flows using class-map, QoS policy, or incoming packets DSCP. This command enables PolicyMap-Input Configuration mode (conf-policy-map-in). Related Commands service-queue — assigns a class map and QoS policy to different queues. policy-aggregate — allows an aggregate method of configuring per-port QoS using policy maps.
policy-aggregate — allows an aggregate method of configuring per-port QoS using policy maps. service-policy output — applies an output policy map to the selected interface. qos-policy-input Create a QoS input policy on the router. Syntax qos-policy-input qos-policy-name [layer2] To remove an existing input QoS policy from the router, use the no qos-policyinput qos-policy-name [layer2] command. Parameters qos-policy-name Enter the name for the policy map in character format (32 characters maximum).
To remove an existing output QoS policy, use the no qos-policy-output qospolicy-name command. Parameters qos-policy-name Enter your output QoS policy name in character format (32 characters maximum). Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.
Defaults Burst size is 100 KB. peak-rate is the same as committed-rate. Granularity for committed-rate and peak-rate is Mbps unless you use the kbps option. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. rate police — specifies traffic policing on the selected interface.
service-policy input Apply an input policy map to the selected interface. Syntax service-policy input policy-map-name [layer2] To remove the input policy map from the interface, use the no service-policy input policy-map-name [layer2] command. Parameters policy-map-name Enter the name for the policy map in character format (16 characters maximum). You can identify an existing policy map or name one that does not yet exist. layer2 (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword layer2 to specify a Layer 2 Class Map.
Parameters policy-map-name Enter the name for the policy map in character format (16 characters maximum). You can identify an existing policy map or name one that does not yet exist. Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
characters maximum). This specifies the input QoS policy assigned to the queue under policy-map-input and output QoS policy under policy-map-output context. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-policy-map-in and conf-policy-map-out) Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.
show qos class-map View the current class map information. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show qos class-map [class-name] class-name (Optional) Enter the name of a configured class map. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information Use the show qos dcb-map command to display the enhanced transmission selection (ETS) and priority-based flow control (PFC) parameters used to configure server-facing Ethernet ports. The following table describes the show qos dcb-map output shown in the example below. Example Field Description State Complete: All mandatory DCB parameters are correctly configured. In progress: The DCB map configuration is not complete. Some mandatory parameters are not configured.
detail interface To view a policy map interface in detail, enter the keyword detail and optionally one of the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example (IPv4) For a 10 Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.
qos-policy-input qos-policy-name Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example Enter the keyword qos-policy-input then the QoS policy name. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example Dell#show qos qos-policy-output Qos-policy-output qmap_out Bandwidth-percentage 10 Qos-policy-output qmap_wg Rate-shape 100 50 Wred yellow wy Wred green wg Dell# show qos qos-policy-input View the input QoS policy details. Syntax Parameters Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show qos qos-policy-input [qos-policy-name] qos-policy-name Enter the QoS policy name. none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM.
Supported Modes Command History Example Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show qos qos-policy-output Qos-policy-output qmap_out Bandwidth-percentage 10 Qos-policy-output qmap_wg Rate-shape 100 50 Wred yellow wy Wred green wg Dell# show qos statistics View QoS statistics.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.8(0.0) Added the egress-queue keyword. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show qos statistics Interface Te 0/2 Queue# Matched Pkts 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 Dell# show qos wred-profile View the WRED profile details.
test cam-usage Checks the Input Policy Map configuration for the CAM usage. Syntax Parameters test cam-usage service-policy input policy-map stack-unit {[number | [all]} policy-map Enter the policy map name. stack-unit number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords stack-unit then the stack-unit number. stack-unit all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords stack-unit all all to indicate all the stack-units. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
Field Description Estimated CAM per Port Indicates the number of free CAM entries required (for the classification rules) to apply the input policy map on a single interface. NOTE: The CAM entries for the default rule are not included in this column; a CAM entry for the default rule is always dedicated to a port and is always available for that interface.
fallback Enter the keyword fallback to classify packets according to their DSCP value as a secondary option in case no match occurs against the configured class maps. Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION (conf-policy-map-in) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
To remove the WRED drop precedence, use the no wred {yellow | green} [profile-name] command. Parameters yellow | green Enter the keyword yellow for yellow traffic. A DSCP value of xxx110 and xxx101 maps to yellow. Enter the keyword green for green traffic. A DSCP value of xxx0xx maps to green. profile-name Enter your WRED profile name in character format (16 character maximum). Or use one of the five pre-defined WRED profile names.
Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.0.2.0 Introduced on the S6000. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the S4820t. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the Z9000. 8.3.7.0 Introduced on the S4810.
plus the five pre-defined profiles, for a total of 31 WRED profiles. Pre-defined Profiles: wred_drop, wred-ge_y, wred_ge_g, wred_teng_y, wred_teng_g. Defaults The five pre-defined WRED profiles. When you configure a new profile, the minimum and maximum threshold defaults to predefined wred_ge_g values. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. 8.3.16.
Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL.
Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. 9.5.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL.
The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000-ON. Version 9.5.0.0 Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, and MXL. Usage Information If the specified color-map does not exist, the Diffserv Manager (DSM) creates a color map and sets all the DSCP values to green (low drop precedence). Example The following example assigns the color map, bat-enclave-map, to interface.
Example Related Commands show qos dscp-color-map — displays DSCP color maps show qos dscp-color-map Display the DSCP color map for one or all interfaces. Syntax Parameters show qos dscp-color-map map-name map-name Enter the name of the color map. Defaults None Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example none • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Dell#show qos dot1p-queue-mapping Dot1p Priority : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Queue : 0 0 0 1 2 3 3 3 Dell# trust Specify dynamic classification (DSCP) or dot1p to trust.
Dynamic mapping honors packets marked according to the standard definitions of DSCP. The following lists the default mapping. Table 3.
Routing Information Protocol (RIP) 49 Routing information protocol (RIP) is a distance vector routing protocol. The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) supports both RIP version 1 (RIPv1) and RIP version 2 (RIPv2). The implementation of RIP is based on IETF RFCs 2453 and RFC 1058. For more information about configuring RIP, refer to the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. auto-summary Restore the default behavior of automatic summarization of subnet routes into network routes.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command triggers updates of the main RIP routing tables. debug ip rip Examine RIP routing information for troubleshooting. Syntax debug ip rip [interface | database | events [interface] | packet [interface] | trigger] To turn off debugging output, use the no debug ip rip command. Parameters interface For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number.
default-information originate Generate a default route for the RIP traffic. Syntax default-information originate [always] [metric metric-value] [route-map map-name] To return to the default values, use the no default-information originate command. Parameters always (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword always to enable the switch software to always advertise the default route. metric metricvalue (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword metric then a number as the metric value. The range is from 1 to 16. The default is 1.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command ensures that route information being redistributed is converted to the same metric value. Related Commands redistribute — allows you to redistribute routes learned by other methods. description Enter a description of the RIP routing protocol.
To return to the default values, use the no distance weight [ip-address mask] command. Parameters weight Enter a number from 1 to 255 for the weight (for prioritization). The default is 120. ip-address (OPTIONAL) Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D), of the host or network to receive the new distance metric. mask If you enter an IP address, also enter a mask for that IP address, in either dotted decimal format or /prefix format (/x).
• Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip prefix-list — enters PREFIX-LIST mode and configures a prefix list. distribute-list out Configure a filter for outgoing routing updates.
Command Modes ROUTER RIP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip prefix-list — enters PREFIX-LIST mode and configures a prefix list. ip poison-reverse Set the prefix of the RIP routing updates to the RIP infinity value. Syntax ip poison-reverse To disable poison reverse, use the no ip poison-reverse command. Defaults Disabled.
Defaults RIPv1 and RIPv2 Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If you want the interface to receive both versions of RIP, use the ip rip receive version 1 2 command. Related Commands ip rip send version — sets the RIP version for sending RIP traffic on an interface. version — sets the RIP version the switch software uses.
version — sets the RIP version for the switch software. ip split-horizon Enable split-horizon for RIP data on the interface. As described in RFC 2453, the split-horizon scheme prevents any routes learned over a specific interface to be sent back out that interface. Syntax ip split-horizon To disable split-horizon, use the no ip split-horizon command. Defaults Enabled Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.
Usage Information RIP supports a maximum of 16 ECMP paths. neighbor Define a neighbor router with which to exchange RIP information. Syntax neighbor ip-address To delete a neighbor setting, use the no neighbor ip-address command. Parameters ip-address Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the IP address, in dotted decimal format, of a router with which to exchange information. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM.
Defaults No RIP network is configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You can enable an unlimited number of RIP networks. RIP operates over interfaces configured with any address the network command specifies. offset-list Specify a number to add to the incoming or outgoing route metrics learned using RIP.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When the offset metric is applied to an interface, that value takes precedence over an offset value that is not extended to an interface. Related Commands ip prefix-list — enters PREFIX-LIST mode and configure a prefix list. output-delay Set the interpacket delay of successive packets to the same neighbor.
Parameters interface Defaults Not configured. Command Modes ROUTER RIP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the following information: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For a VLAN, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To redistribute the default route (0.0.0.0/0), configure the default-information originate command. Related Commands default-information originate — generates a default route for RIP traffic. redistribute ospf Redistribute routing information from an OSPF process.
router rip To configure and enable RIP, enter ROUTER RIP mode. Syntax router rip To disable RIP, use the no router rip command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To enable RIP, assign a network address using the network command.
show ip rip database Display the routes that RIP learns. If the switch learned no RIP routes, no output is generated. Syntax Parameters show ip rip database [ip-address mask] ip-address (OPTIONAL) Specify an IP address in dotted decimal format to view RIP information on that network only. If you enter an IP address, also enter a mask for that IP address. mask (OPTIONAL) Specify a mask, in /network format, for the IP address.
207.250.53.0/24 auto-summary 208.250.42.0/24 [50/2] via 1.1.120.2, 00:00:55, Port-channel 20 [50/2] via 1.1.130.2, 00:00:12, Port-channel 30 [50/2] via 1.1.10.2, 00:00:18, Vlan 10 208.250.42.0/24 auto-summary show running-config rip Display the current RIP configuration. Syntax show running-config rip Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
invalid value should be at least three times the update timer value. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295. The default is 180 seconds. Defaults holddown Enter the number of seconds to specify a time interval during which the route is marked as unreachable but still sending RIP packets. The holddown value should be at least three times the update timer value. The range is from zero (0) to 4294967295. The default is 180 seconds.
Command Modes ROUTER RIP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip rip receive version — sets the RIP version the interface receives. ip rip send version — sets the RIP version the interface sends.
50 Remote Monitoring (RMON) The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) remote monitoring (RMON) is based on IEEE standards, providing both 32-bit and 64-bit monitoring and long-term statistics collection.
Parameters number Enter the alarm integer number from 1 to 65535. The value must be unique in the RMON alarm table. variable Enter the MIB object to monitor. The variable must be in the SNMP OID format; for example, 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3. The object type must be a 32-bit integer. interval Time, in seconds, the alarm monitors the MIB variables; this is the alarmSampleType in the RMON alarm table. The range is from 5 to 3600 seconds. delta Enter the keyword delta to test the change between MIB variables.
rmon collection history Enable the RMON MIB history group of statistics collection on an interface. Syntax rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} [owner name] [buckets number] [interval seconds] To remove a specified RMON history group of statistics collection, use the no rmon collection history {controlEntry integer} command. Parameters controlEntry integer Enter the keyword controlEntry to specify the RMON group of statistics using a value.
Parameters controlEntry integer Enter the keyword controlEntry to specify the RMON group of statistics using a value. Then enter an integer value from 1 to 65535 that identifies the RMON Statistic Table. The integer value must be a unique in the RMON statistic table. owner name (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword owner then the owner name to record the owner of the RMON group of statistics.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. rmon hc-alarm Set an alarm on any MIB object. Syntax rmon hc-alarm number variable interval {delta | absolute} rising-threshold value event-number falling-threshold value event-number [owner string] To disable the alarm, use the no rmon hc-alarm number command.
the alarmFallingEventIndex or the alarmTable of the RMON MIB. If there is no corresponding falling-threshold event, the value is zero. owner string Defaults owner Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword owner then the owner name to specify an owner for the alarm. This is the alarmOwner object in the alarmTable of the RMON MIB. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
show rmon alarms Display the contents of the RMON alarm table. Syntax Parameters show rmon alarms [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON alarm table in an easy-to-read format. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
20 21 22 Dell# 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 show rmon events Display the contents of the RMON event table. Syntax Parameters show rmon events [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON event table in an easy-to-read format. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Dell# 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 show rmon hc-alarm Display the contents of RMON High-Capacity alarm table. Syntax Parameters show rmon hc-alarm [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON High-Capacity alarm table in an easy-to-read format. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
1 2 3 4 5 Dell# 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 1.3.6.1.2.1.1.3 show rmon history Display the contents of the RMON Ethernet history table. Syntax Parameters show rmon history [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry.
show rmon log Display the contents of the RMON log table. Syntax Parameters show rmon log [index] [brief] index (OPTIONAL) Enter the table index number to display just that entry. brief (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword brief to display the RMON log table in an easy-to-read format. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Example (Index) Dell#show rmon statistics 6001 RMON statistics entry 6001 interface: ifIndex.
9002 9003 9004 Dell# 1296 134529054 134791198 134791198 GigabitEthernet 3/0 GigabitEthernet 3/1 GigabitEthernet 3/1 Remote Monitoring (RMON)
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) 51 The Dell Networking Operating System (OS) implementation of rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP) is based on the IEEE 802.1w standard spanning-tree protocol. The RSTP algorithm configures connectivity throughout a bridged local area network (LAN) that is comprised of LANs interconnected by bridges. bridge-priority Set the bridge priority for RSTP. Syntax bridge-priority priority-value To return to the default value, use the no bridge-priority command.
Parameters all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to debug all spanning tree operations. bpdu interface {in | out} (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdu to debug the bridge protocol data units. (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword interface along with the type slot/port of the interface you want displayed. Type slot/ port options are the following: • For a Port Channel interface, enter the keywords portchannel then a number. The range is from 1 to 128.
Parameters description Enter a description to identify the rapid spanning tree (80 characters maximum). Defaults none Command Modes SPANNING TREE (The prompt is “config-rstp”.) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. protocol spanning-tree rstp — enters SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. disable Disable RSTP globally on the system.
To return to the default setting, use the no forward-delay command. Parameters seconds Enter the number of seconds that the system waits before transitioning RSTP to the forwarding state. The range is from 4 to 30. The default is 15 seconds. Defaults 15 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The hello time is encoded in BPDUs in increments of 1/256ths of a second. The standard minimum hello time in seconds is 1 second, which is encoded as 256. Millisecond hello times are encoded using values less than 256; the millisecond hello time equals (x/1000)*256.
edge-port bpdufilter default To filter transmission of BPDU on port fast enabled interfaces, enable BPDU Filter globally. Syntax edge-port bpdufilter default To disable global bpdu filter default, use the no edge-port bpdufilter default command. Parameters priority-value Enter a number as the bridge priority value in increments of 4096. The range is from 0 to 61440. The default is 32768.
Related Commands disable — disables RSTP globally on the system. show config View the current configuration for the mode. Only non-default values are displayed. Syntax show config Command Modes CONFIGURATION RSTP (conf-rstp) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
bpduguard (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword portfast to enable Portfast to move the interface into Forwarding mode immediately after the root fails. Enter the keyword bpduguard to disable the port when it receives a BPDU. shutdown-onviolation (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords shutdown-on-violation to hardware disable an interface when a BPDU is received and the port is disabled.
Enabling Portfast BPDU guard and loop guard at the same time on a port results in a port that remains in a Blocking state and prevents traffic from flowing through it. For example, when Portfast BPDU guard and loop guard are both configured: Example • If a BPDU is received from a remote device, BPDU guard places the port in an Err-Disabled Blocking state and no traffic is forwarded on the port.
Enter the keyword bpduguard to disable the port when it receives a BPDU. shutdown-onviolation (OPTIONAL) Enter the keywords shutdown-on-violation to hardware disable an interface when a BPDU is received and the port is disabled. bpdufilter (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdufilter to enable BPDU Filter to stop sending and receiving BPDUs on port enabled interfaces. priority priority Enter keyword priority then a value in increments of 16 as the priority. The range is from 0 to 240. The default is 128.
Example • If a BPDU is received from a remote device, BPDU guard places the port in an Err-Disabled Blocking state and no traffic is forwarded on the port. • If no BPDU is received from a remote device, loop guard places the port in a Loop-Inconsistent Blocking state and no traffic is forwarded on the port.
52 Security This chapter describes various types of security commands in the Dell Networking OS, in the following sections: The commands are listed in the following sections: • AAA Accounting Commands • Authentication and Password Commands • RADIUS Commands • TACACS+ Commands • SSH Server and SCP Commands NOTE: Starting with the Dell Networking OS version 7.2.1.0, LEAP with MSCHAP v2 supplicant is implemented.
commands level Enter the keyword command then a privilege level for accounting of commands executed at that privilege level. name | default Enter one of the following: For name, enter a user-defined name of a list of accounting methods. • For default, the default accounting methods used. start-stop Enter the keywords start-stop to send a “start accounting” notice at the beginning of the requested event and a “stop accounting” notice at the end of the event.
aaa accounting suppress Prevent the generation of accounting records of users with the user name value of NULL. Syntax aaa accounting suppress null-username To permit accounting records to users with user name value of NULL, use the no aaa accounting suppress null-username command. Defaults Accounting records are recorded for all users. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6.(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator.
To disable authorization checking for EXEC level commands, use the no aaa authorization exec command. Parameters name Define a name for the list of authorization methods. default Define the default list of authorization methods. local Use the authorization parameters on the system to perform authorization. tacacs+ Use the TACACS+ protocol to perform authorization. none Enter the keyword none to apply no authorization.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator and M I/O Aggregator. Related Commands aaa accounting — enables AAA Accounting and creates a record for monitoring the accounting function.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command steps through all active sessions and then displays the accounting records for the active account functions.
• ... method2 tacacs+: use the TACACS+ server(s) configured with the tacacs-server host command. (OPTIONAL) In the event of a “no response” from the first method, Dell Networking Operating System (OS) applies the next configured method. Defaults Use the enable password. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Parameters method-list-name Enter a text string (up to 16 characters long) as the name of a user-configured method list that can be applied to different lines. default Enter the keyword default to specify that the method list specified is the default method for all terminal lines. method Enter one of the following methods: ... method4 • enable: use the password the enable password command defines in CONFIGURATION mode. • line: use the password the password command defines in LINE mode.
NOTE: If authentication fails using the primary method, Dell Networking Operating System (OS) employs the second method (or third method, if necessary) automatically. For example, if the TACACS+ server is reachable, but the server key is invalid, Dell Networking Operating System (OS) proceeds to the next authentication method. The TACACS+ is incorrect, but the user is still authenticated by the secondary method.
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. aaa authorization commands — sets the parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC and CONFIGURATION level commands aaa authorization exec — sets the parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC level commands. aaa authorization commands Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC and CONFIGURATION level commands.
aaa authorization role-only Configure authentication to use the user’s role only when determining if access to commands is permitted. Syntax aaa authorization role-only To return to the default setting, use the no aaa authentication role-only command. Parameters name Enter a text string for the name of the user up to 63 characters. It cannot be one of the system defined roles (sysadmin, secadmin, netadmin, netoperator).
aaa authorization config-commands Set parameters that restrict (or permit) a user’s access to EXEC level commands. Syntax aaa authorization config-commands Disable authorization checking for CONFIGURATION level commands using the no aaa authorization config-commands command. Defaults Enabled when you configure aaa authorization commands command. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes. Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) Change the access or privilege level of one or more commands. Syntax privilege mode {level level command | reset command} To delete access to a level and command, use the no privilege mode level level command command.
Usage Information To define a password for the level to which you are assigning privilege or access, use the enable password command. privilege level (LINE mode) Change the access level for users on the terminal lines. Syntax privilege level level To delete access to a terminal line, use the no privilege level level command. Parameters level level Enter the keyword level then a number for the access level. The range is from 0 to 15. Level 1 is EXEC mode and Level 15 allows access to all CLI modes.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information After entering the banner login command, type one or more spaces and a delineator character. Enter the banner text then the second delineator character. When the user is connected to the router, if a message of the day banner is configured, it displays first.
line Enter a text string for your text banner message ending the message with your delineator. The delineator is a percent character (%). Range: maximum of 50 lines, up to 255 characters per line Defaults No banner is configured and the CR is required when creating a banner. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
banner motd Set a message of the day (MOTD) banner. Syntax Parameters banner motd c line c c Enter a delineator character to specify the limits of the text banner. The delineator is a percent character (%). line Enter a text string for your MOTD banner the message with your delineator. The delineator is a percent character (%). Defaults No banner is configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. debug tacacs+ To assist with troubleshooting, view TACACS+ transactions. Syntax debug tacacs+ To disable debugging of TACACS+, use the no debug tacacs+ command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.
line — enables and configures console and virtual terminal lines to the system. access-class Restrict incoming connections to a particular IP address in a defined IP access control list (ACL). Syntax access-class access-list-name To delete a setting, use the no access-class command. Parameters access-list-name Defaults Not configured. Command Modes LINE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Enter the name of an established IP Standard ACL. Version Description 9.9(0.
Use this parameter only with a password that you copied from the show running-config file of another Dell Networking router. password Enter a text string, up to 32 characters long, as the clear text password. Defaults No password is configured. level = 15. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Enter 7 followed a text string as the hidden password. The text string must be a password that was already encrypted by a Dell Networking router. Use this parameter only with a password that you copied from the show running-config file of another Dell Networking router. password Defaults Not configured. Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter a text string, up to 32 characters long, as the clear text password. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To control access to command modes, use this command to define a password for a level and use the privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) command. Passwords must meet the following criteria: • Start with a letter, not a number. • Passwords can have a regular expression as the password.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Related Commands Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the MXL. • show running-config — views the current configuration. • privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) — controls access to the command modes within the switch.
password Specify a password for users on terminal lines. Syntax password [encryption-type] password To delete a password, use the no password password command. Parameters encryption-type password (OPTIONAL) Enter either zero (0) or 7 as the encryption type for the password entered. The options are • 0 is the default and means the password is not encrypted and stored as clear text. • 7 means that the password is encrypted and hidden. Enter a text string up to 32 characters long.
password-attributes Configure the password attributes (strong password). Syntax password-attributes [min-length number] [max-retry number] [lockout-period minutes][character-restriction [upper number] [lower number] [numeric number] [special-char number]] To return to the default, use the no password-attributes [min-length number] [max-retry number] [lockout-period minutes] [characterrestriction [upper number] [lower number] [numeric number] [special-char number]] command.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Introduced the special-characters on the MXL Switch. 9.5(0.0) Introduced thelockout-period option on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. password — specifies a password for users on terminal lines. service password-encryption Encrypt all passwords configured in the system.
Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show privilege Current privilege level is 15 Dell# Dell#show privilege Current privilege level is 14. Dell# Dell#show privilege Current privilege level is 10. Dell# Related Commands privilege level (CONFIGURATION mode) — assigns access control to different command modes.
Example Related Commands Field Description (untitled) Indicates with an asterisk (*) which terminal line you are using. Line Displays the terminal lines currently in use. User Displays the user name of all users logged in. Host(s) Displays the terminal line status. Location Displays the IP address of the user.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The software measures the period of inactivity defined in this command as the period between consecutive keystrokes. For example, if your password is “password” you can enter “p” and wait 29 seconds to enter the next letter. username Establish an authentication system based on user names.
available with the secret option only, and is the default encryption type for this option. password Enter a string up to 32 characters long. privilege level Enter the keyword privilege then a number from zero (0) to 15. role role-name Enter the keyword role followed by the role name to associate with that user ID. secret Enter the keyword secret then the encryption type. sha256-password Enter the keyword sha256-password then the encryption-type or the password.
To disable debugging of RADIUS, use the no debug radius command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip radius source-interface Specify an interface’s IP address as the source IP address for RADIUS connections.
To disable this function or return to the default value, use the no radius-server deadtime command. Parameters seconds Defaults 0 seconds Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter a number of seconds during which non-responsive RADIUS servers are skipped. The range is from 0 to 2147483647 seconds. The default is 0 seconds. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.
authentication key and the RADIUS daemon operating on this switch. For the encryption-type, enter either zero (0) or 7 as the encryption type for the key entered. The options are: • 0 is the default and means the password is not encrypted and stored as clear text. • 7 means that the password is encrypted and hidden. Configure this parameter last because leading spaces are ignored. Defaults Not configured.
Parameters encryption-type key Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter either zero (0) or 7 as the encryption type for the key entered. The options are: • 0 is the default and means the key is not encrypted and stored as clear text. • 7 means that the key is encrypted and hidden. Enter a string that is the key to be exchanged between the switch and RADIUS servers. It can be up to 42 characters long.
Defaults 3 retries Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. radius-server host — configures a RADIUS host. radius-server timeout To reply to a request, configure the amount of time the RADIUS client (the switch) waits for a RADIUS host server .
Parameters mode Enter one of the following keywords as the mode for which you are controlling access: configure for CONFIGURATION mode exec for EXEC mode interface for INTERFACE modes line for LINE mode route-map for Route-map mode router for Router mode addrole Enter the keyword addrole to add permission to the command. You cannot add or delete rights for the sysadmin role. deleterole Enter the keyword deleterole to remove access to the command. You cannot add or delete rights for the sysadmin role.
show privilege View your access level. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show privilege • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
To disable AAA Accounting, use the no aaa accounting {system | exec | command level} {name | default}{start-stop | wait-start | stoponly} {tacacs+} command Parameters system Enter the keyword system to send accounting information of any other AAA configuration. exec Enter the keyword exec to send accounting information when a user has logged in to EXEC mode. commands level Enter the keyword command then a privilege level for accounting of commands executed at that privilege level.
Example Related Commands Dell(config)# aaa accounting exec default start-stop tacacs+ Dell(config)# aaa accounting command 15 default start-stop tacacs+ Dell(config)# enable password changes the password for the enable command. login authentication enables AAA login authentication on the terminal lines. password creates a password. tacacs-server host specifies a TACACS+ server host. debug tacacs+ To assist with troubleshooting, view TACACS+ transactions.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. tacacs-server host Specify a TACACS+ host. Syntax Parameters tacacs-server host {hostname | ipv4-address | ipv6-address} [port number] [timeout seconds] [key key] hostname Enter the name of the TACACS+ server host. ipv4-address | ipv6-address Enter the IPv4 address (A.B.C.
Usage Information To list multiple TACACS+ servers to be used by the aaa authentication login command, configure this command multiple times. If you are not configuring the switch as a TACACS+ server, you do not need to configure the port, timeout and key optional parameters. If you do not configure a key, the key assigned in the tacacs-server key command is used. Related Commands aaa authentication login — specifies the login authentication method.
timeout login response Specify how long the software waits for the login input (for example, the user name and password) before timing out. Syntax timeout login response seconds To return to the default values, use the no timeout login response command. Parameters seconds Enter a number of seconds the software waits before logging you out. The range is: • VTY: the range is from 1 to 30 seconds, the default is 30 seconds.
Parameters Defaults Command History rsa Enter the keyword rsa then the key size to generate a SSHv2 RSA host keys. The range is from 1024 to 2048 if you did not enable FIPS mode; if you enabled FIPS mode, you can only generate a 2048-bit key. The default is 1024. rsa1 Enter the keyword rsa1 then the key size to generate a SSHv1 RSA host keys. The range is from 1024 to 2048. The default is 1024. Key size 1024; if you enable FIPS mode, the key size is 2048. Version Description 9.9(0.
Parameters client Enter the keyword client to enable collecting debug information on the client. server Enter the keyword server to enable collecting debug information on the server. Defaults Disabled on both client and server. Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Parameters 1-10 Defaults 3 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the number of maximum retries to authenticate a user. The range is from 1 to 10. The default is 3. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command specifies the maximum number of attempts to authenticate a user on an SSH connection with the remote host for password authentication.
Command History Usage Information This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, see the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON, S6000, S6000–ON, S5000, S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, MXL, C9010, S3100 series, and Z9100-ON. • You can select one or more ciphers from the list. • The default list of supported ciphers is same irrespective of whether FIPS mode is enabled or disabled.
Parameters enable Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keyword enable to enable hostbasedauthentication for SSHv2 server. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If you enable this command, clients can log in without a password prompt.
ip ssh mac Configure the list of MAC algorithms supported on both SSH client and SCP. Syntax Parameters ip ssh mac mac-list mac mac-list Enter the keyword mac then a space-delimited list of message authentication code (MAC) algorithms supported by the SSH client. The following MAC algorithms are available.
Usage Information Version Description 9.10(0.0) Introduced on the S6100–ON, S6000, S6000–ON, S5000, S4810, S4820T, S3048–ON, S4048–ON, MXL, C9010, S3100 series, and Z9100-ON. • You can select one or more MAC algorithms from the list. • Client-supported MAC list gets preference over the server-supported MAC list in selecting the MAC algorithm for the SSH session. • When the MAC (-m) option is used with the SSH CLI, it overrides the configured or default MAC list.
Supported Modes Command History Example Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#conf Dell(conf)# ip ssh rhostsfile flash://shosts Dell(conf)# Usage Information This command specifies the rhost file used for host-based authentication. This creates/ file overwrites the flash:/ADMIN_DIR/ssh/shosts file and deletes the user-specified file.
The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.0) Introduced on the S6000–ON. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the Z9000, S6000, S4820T, S4810, MXL ip ssh rsa-authentication (Config) Enable RSA authentication for the SSHv2 server. Syntax ip ssh rsa-authentication enable To disable RSA authentication, use the no ip ssh rsa-authentication enable command. Parameters enable Defaults Disabled.
Parameters my-authorizedkeys WORD Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter the keywords my-authorized-keys then the filename of the RSA authorized-keys. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If you want to log in without being prompted for a password, log in through RSA authentication.
• aes256-cbc • aes128-ctr • aes192-ctr • aes256-ctr The default cipher list is used. mac hmacalgorithm • 3des-cbc • aes128-cbc • aes192-cbc • aes256-cbc • aes128-ctr • aes192-ctr • aes256-ctr Enter the keyword mac then a space-delimited list of hash message authentication code (HMAC) algorithms supported by the SSH server for keying hashing for the message authentication.
• diffie-hellman-group14-sha1 When FIPS is enabled, the default key-exchange-algorithm is diffie-hellman-group14-sha1. When FIPS is not enabled, the default key-exchangealgorithms are the following: • diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1 • diffie-hellman-group1-sha1, • diffie-hellman-group14-sha1 port port-number (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword port then the port number of the listening port of the SSH server. The range is from 1 to 65535. The default is 22.
show crypto Displays the public part of the SSH host-keys. Syntax Parameters show crypto key mypubkey {rsa | rsa1} Key Enter the keyword key to display the host public key. mypubkey Enter the keyword mypubkey to display the host public key. rsa Enter the keyword rsa to display the host SSHv2 RSA public key. rsa1 Enter the keyword rsa1 to display the host SSHv1 RSA public key. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
show ip ssh Display information about established SSH sessions. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History show ip ssh • EXEC • EXEC Privilege All Modes Version Description 9.10(0.0) Removed the support for hmac-sha2-256-96 algorithm. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Example Dell#show ip ssh SSH server : enabled. SSH server version : v1 and v2. SSH server vrf : default.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command displays the contents of the flash://ADMIN_DIRssh/ knownhosts file. Example Dell#show ip ssh client-pub-keys poclab4,123.12.1.
show role Display information on permissions assigned to a command, including user role and/or permission level. Syntax Parameters show role mode {mode} {command} command Enter the command’s keywords to assign the command to a certain access level. You can enter one or all of the keywords. mode mode Enter keyword then one of the following modes.
Example Dell#show userroles Role Inheritance netoperator netadmin secadmin sysadmin netoperator testadmin Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands netadmin Modes Exec Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Route-map Protocol MAC Exec Config Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Route-map Protocol MAC Exec Config Interface Line Router IP Route-map Protocol MAC Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.7(0.
Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.10(0.0) Removed the support for hmac-sha2-256-96 algorithm. 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Dell#ssh 123.12.1.123 -l ashwani -p 5005 -v 2 ip ssh pub-key-file Specify the file used for host-based authentication.
Example Dell#conf Dell(conf)# ip ssh pub-key-file flash://knownhosts Dell(conf)# Related Commands show ip ssh client-pub-keys — displays the client-public keys used for the hostbased authentication. Secure DHCP Commands The dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) as defined by RFC 2131 provides no authentication or security mechanisms. Secure DHCP is a suite of features that protects networks that use dynamic address allocation from spoofing and attacks.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip dhcp snooping Enable DHCP Snooping globally. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When enabled, no learning takes place until you enable snooping on a VLAN.
ip dhcp snooping binding Create a static entry in the DHCP binding table. Syntax Parameters [no] ip dhcp snooping binding mac address vlan-id vlan-id ip ip-address interface type slot/port lease number mac address Enter the keyword mac then the MAC address of the host to which the server is leasing the IP address. vlan-id vlan-id Enter the keywords vlan-id then the VLAN to which the host belongs. The range is from 2 to 4094.
• Supported Modes Command History EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.19.0 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ip dhcp snooping trust Configure an interface as trusted. Syntax [no] ip dhcp snooping trust Defaults Untrusted Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When enabled, the system begins creating entries in the binding table for the specified VLANs. NOTE: Learning only happens if there is a trusted port in the VLAN. Related Commands ip dhcp snooping trust — configures an interface as trusted.
Parameters name Enter a text string for the name of the user up to 63 characters. nopassword Enter the keyword nopassword to specify that the user should not enter a password. password Enter the keyword password followed by the encryption-type or the password. secret Enter the keyword secret followed by the encryptiontype or the password. encryption-type Enter an encryption type for the password that you enter. • 0 directs Dell Networking OS to store the password as clear text.
userrole Create user roles for the role-based security model. Syntax userrole name inherit existing-role-name To delete a role name, use the no userrole name command. Note that the reserved role names may not be deleted. Parameters name Enter a text string for the name of the user up to 63 characters. It cannot be one of the system defined roles (sysadmin, secadmin, netadmin, netoperator).
NOTE: If you inherit a user role, you cannot modify or delete the inheritance. If you want to change or remove the inheritance, delete the user role and create it again. If the user role is in use, you cannot delete the user role. Related Commands 1376 role mode { { { addrole | deleterole } role-name } | reset } command – Modifies (adds or deletes) command permissions for newly created user roles and system defined roles.
sFlow 53 sFlow monitoring system includes an sFlow Agent and an sFlow Collector. • The sFlow Agent combines the flow samples and interface counters into sFlow datagrams and forwards them to the sFlow Collector. • The sFlow Collector analyses the sFlow Datagrams received from the different devices and produces a network-wide view of traffic flows.
sflow collector Configure a collector device to which sFlow datagrams are forwarded. Syntax sflow collector {ip-address} agent-addr {ip-address} [number [max-datagram-size number]] | [max-datagram-size number] To delete a configured collector, use the no sflow collector {ip-address} agent-addr {ipv4-address} [number [max-datagram-size number]] | [max-datagram-size number] command. Parameters sflow collector ipaddress Enter the IPv4 (A.B.C.D) of the sFlow collector device.
sflow enable (Global) Enable sFlow globally. Syntax sflow enable To disable sFlow, use the no sflow enable command. Defaults Disabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information sFlow is disabled by default. In addition to this command, you must enable sFlow on individual interfaces where you want sFlow sampling.
NOTE: After a physical port is a member of a LAG, it inherits the sFlow configuration from the LAG port. Related Commands sflow enable (Global) — turns sFlow globally. sflow extended-switch enable Enable packing information on a switch only. Syntax sflow extended-switch enable To disable packing information, use the no sflow extended-switch [enable] command. Parameters enable Defaults Disabled.
Parameters extended Defaults 128 bytes Command Modes CONFIGURATION Enter the keyword extended to copy 256 bytes from the sample packets to sFlow datagram. INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Example Version Description 9.9(0.
Usage Information The polling interval for an interface is the maximum number of seconds between successive samples of counters sent to the collector. This command changes the global default counter polling (20 seconds) interval. You can configure an interface to use a different polling interval. sflow polling-interval (Interface) Set the sFlow polling interval at an interface (overrides the global-level setting).
example, 4096, 8192, 16384, and so on. The default is 32768 packets. Defaults 32768 packets Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Sample-rate is the average number of packets skipped before the sample is taken. This command changes the global default sampling rate.
Usage Information This command changes the sampling rate for an interface. By default, the sampling rate of an interface is set to the same value as the current global default sampling rate. If the value you enter is not a correct power of 2, the command generates an error message with the previous and next power-of-2 value. Select one of these two numbers and re-enter the command. Related Commands sflow sample-rate (Global) — changes the sampling rate globally.
Te 0/1: configured rate 256, actual rate 256 Dell# Dell#show running-config sflow ! sflow enable sflow sample-rate 2048 Dell#show running-config interface tengigabitethernet 0/1 ! interface TenGigabitEthernet 0/1 no ip address sflow enable sflow sample-rate 256 no shutdown show sflow stack-unit Display the sFlow information on a stack unit.
54 Service Provider Bridging Service provider bridging is composed of virtual local area network (VLAN) Stacking, Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling, and Provider Backbone Bridging as described in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. This chapter includes commands for the Dell Networking operating software Layer 2 Protocol Tunneling (L2PT). L2PT enables protocols to tunnel through an 802.1q tunnel. For more information, see VLAN Stacking, Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), and GARP VLAN Registration (GVRP).
• in | out | both Enter the keyword in, out, or both to debug incoming interfaces, outgoing interfaces, or both incoming and outgoing interfaces. vlan vlan-id Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID. The range is from 1 to 4094. count value Enter the keyword count then the number of debug outputs. The range is from 1 to 100. Defaults Debug disabled.
Example Version Description 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#conf Dell(conf)#interface vlan 2 Dell(conf-if-vl-2)#vlan-stack compatible Dell(conf-if-vl-2)#member Te1/2-3 Dell(conf-if-vl-2)#protocol-tunnel stp Dell(conf-if-vl-2)#protocol-tunnel enable Related Command show protocol-tunnel — displays tunneling information for all VLANs. protocol-tunnel destination-mac Overwrite the BPDU destination MAC address with a specific value.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Mode Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The system must have the default CAM profile with the default microcode before you enable L2PT. protocol-tunnel rate-limit Enable traffic rate limiting per box. Syntax protocol-tunnel rate-limit rate To reset the rate limit to the default, use the no protocol-tunnel rate-limit rate command.
show protocol-tunnel Display protocol tunnel information for all or a specified VLAN-Stack VLAN. Syntax Parameters show protocol-tunnel [vlan vlan-id] vlan vlan-id Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword vlan then the VLAN ID to display information for the one VLAN. The range is from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
55 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) and Syslog This chapter contains commands to configure and monitor the simple network management protocol (SNMP) v1/v2/v3 and Syslog. The chapter contains the following sections: • SNMP Commands • Syslog Commands SNMP Commands The following SNMP commands are available in the Dell Networking OS.
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the MXL.
0 0 32649 29078 Dell# Related Commands Bad values errors General errors Response PDUs Trap PDUs snmp-server community — enables the SNMP and set community string. show snmp engineID Display the identification of the local SNMP engine and all remote engines that are configured on the router. Syntax Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example show snmp engineID • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Mode Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following Example displays a group named ngroup. The ngroup has a security model of version 3 (v3) with authentication (auth), the read and notify name is nview with no write view name specified, and finally the row status is active.
snmp ifmib ifalias long Display the entire description string through the Interface MIB, which would be truncated otherwise to 63 characters. Syntax snmp ifmib ifalias long Defaults Interface description truncated beyond 63 characters. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
ro Enter the keyword ro to specify read-only permission. rw Enter the keyword rw to specify read-write permission. security-name name (Optional) Enter the keywords security-name then the security name as defined by the community MIB. access-list-name (Optional) Enter a standard IPv4 access list name (a string up to 16 characters long). Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
Example Dell#config Dell(conf)# snmp-server community public ro Dell(conf)# snmp-server community guest ro security-name guestuser Dell(conf)# Example Dell(conf)# ip access-list standard snmp-ro-acl Dell(config-std-nacl)#seq 5 permit host 10.10.10.224 Dell(config-std-nacl)#seq 10 deny any count ! Dell(conf)#snmp-server community guest ro snmp-ro-acl Dell(conf)# Related Commands ip access-list standard — names (or selects) a standard access list to filter based on IP address.
snmp-server enable traps Enable SNMP traps. Syntax snmp-server enable traps [notification-type] [notificationoption] To disable traps, use the no snmp-server enable traps [notificationtype] [notification-option] command. Parameters notification-type notificationoption Enter the type of notification from the following list: • ecfm — Notification of changes to ECFM. • entity — Notification of changes to entity.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.8(0.0) Added the following two SNMP notification options: syslog-reachable and syslog-unreachable. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The system supports up to 16 SNMP trap receivers. If you do not configure this command, no traps controlled by this command are sent. If you do not specify a notification-type and notification-option, all traps are enabled.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Mode Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Changing the value of the SNMP Engine ID has important side effects. A user’s password (entered on the command line) is converted to a message digest algorithm (MD5) or secure hash algorithm (SHA) security digest. This digest is based on both the password and the local Engine ID.
1 | 2c | 3 (OPTIONAL) Enter the security model version number (1, 2c, or 3): • 1 is the least secure version. • 3 is the most secure of the security modes. • 2c allows transmission of informs and counter 64, which allows for integers twice the width of what is normally allowed. The default is 1. auth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword auth to specify authentication of a packet without encryption. noauth (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword noauth to specify no authentication of a packet.
Example Dell#conf Dell(conf)# snmp-server group harig 3 priv read rview Dell# Related Commands show snmp group — displays the group name, security model, view status, and storage type of each group. show running-config — displays the SNMP running configuration. snmp-server host Configure the recipient of an SNMP trap operation.
priv (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword priv to specify both authentication and then scrambling of the packet. community-string Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) as the name of the SNMP community. NOTE: For version 1 and version 2c security models, this string represents the name of the SNMP community. The string can be set using this command; however, Dell Networking OS recommends setting the community string using the snmp-server community command before executing this command.
Usage Information In order to configure the router to send SNMP notifications, enter at least one snmp-server host command. If you enter the command with no keywords, all trap types are enabled for the host. If you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications are sent. In order to enable multiple hosts, issue a separate snmp-server host command for each host. You can specify multiple notification types in the command for each host.
To delete the SNMP location, use the no snmp-server location command. Parameters text Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Enter an alpha-numeric text string, up to 55 characters long. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. snmp-server packetsize Set the largest SNMP packet size permitted.
To disable sending traps out a specific interface, use the no snmp trap-source command. Parameters interface Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383. • For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. Defaults The IP address assigned to the management interface is the default.
group_name Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) as the name of the group. The following groups are created for mapping to read/write community/security-names (defaults): • v1v2creadu — maps to a community with ro permissions. • 1v2cwriteu — maps to a community rw permissions. remote ip-address Enter the keywords udp-port then the user datagram protocol (UDP) port number on the remote device. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 162.
priv password (OPTIONAL) Enter a text string (up to 20 characters long) password that enables the host to encrypt the contents of the message it sends to the agent and decrypt the contents of the message it receives from the agent. Minimum: eight characters long. access-list-name (Optional) Enter the standard IPv4 access list name (a string up to 16 characters long).
udp-port 5009 3 auth md5 authpasswd Related Commands show snmp user — displays the information configured on each SNMP user name. snmp-server user (for AES128-CFB Encryption) Specify that AES128-CFB encryption algorithm needs to be used for transmission of SNMP information. The Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) Cipher Feedback (CFB) 128-bit encryption algorithm is in compliance with RFC 3826. RFCs for SNMPv3 define two authentication hash algorithms, namely, HMACMD5-96 and HMAC-SHA1-96.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Added support for the AES128-CFB encryption algorithm on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module platform 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The oid-tree variable is a full sub-tree starting from 1.3.6 and cannot specify the name of a sub-tree or a MIB. The following Example configures a view named rview that allows access to all objects under 1.3.6.1. Example Dell#(conf) snmp-server view rview 1.3.6.
clear logging Clear the messages in the logging buffer. Syntax clear logging Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. show logging — displays logging settings and system messages in the internal buffer. default logging buffered Return to the default setting for messages logged to the internal buffer.
Supported Modes Command History Related Commands Full–Switch Mode Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. logging console — sets the logging console parameters. logging extended Logs security and audit events to a system log server. Syntax logging extended Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History This guide is platform-specific.
Related Commands show logging auditlog — displays audit log, clear logging auditlog — clears audit log default logging monitor Return to the default settings for messages logged to the terminal. Syntax default logging monitor Defaults level = 7 or debugging Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
logging Configure an IP address or host name of a Syslog server where logging messages are sent. You can configure multiple logging servers of both IPv4 and/or IPv6. Syntax logging {ip-address | ipv6–address |hostname} {{udp {port}} | {tcp {port}} To disable logging, use the no logging command. Parameters ip-address Enter the IPv4 address in dotted decimal format. ipv6-address Enter the IPv6 address in the x:x:x:x::X format. NOTE: The :: notation specifies successive hexadecimal fields of zeros.
logging buffered Enable logging and specify which messages are logged to an internal buffer. By default, all messages are logged to the internal buffer. Syntax logging buffered [level] [size] To return to the default values, use the default logging buffered command. To disable logging stored to an internal buffer, use the no logging buffered command.
logging console Specify which messages are logged to the console. Syntax logging console [level] To return to the default values, use the default logging console command. To disable logging to the console, use the no logging console command. Parameters level (OPTIONAL) Indicate a value from 0 to 7 or enter one of the following parameters: emergencies, alerts, critical, errors, warnings, notifications, informational, or debugging. The default is 7 or debugging.
• kern (kernel) • local0 (local use) • local1 (local use) • local2 (local use) • local3 (local use) • local4 (local use) • local5 (local use) • local6 (local use) • local7 (local use) • lpr (line printer system) • mail (mail system) • news (USENET news) • sys9 (system use) • sys10 (system use) • sys11 (system use) • sys12 (system use) • sys13 (system use) • sys14 (system use) • syslog (Syslog process) • user (user process) • uucp (Unix to Unix copy process) The defa
logging history Specify which messages are logged to the history table of the switch and the SNMP network management station (if configured). Syntax logging history level To return to the default values, use the no logging history command.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When the number of messages reach the limit you set with the logging history size command, older messages are deleted as newer ones are added to the table. Related Commands show logging — displays information logged to the history buffer. logging monitor Specify which messages are logged to Telnet applications.
logging on Specify that debug or error messages are asynchronously logged to multiple destinations, such as the logging buffer, Syslog server, or terminal lines. Syntax logging on To disable logging to logging buffer, Syslog server and terminal lines, use the no logging on command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History • For a ten-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information. • For VLAN interface, enter the keyword vlan then a number from 1 to 4094. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Mode Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When you enable logging synchronous, unsolicited messages appear between software prompts and outputs. Only the messages with a severity at or below the set level are sent to the console. If the message queue limit is reached on a terminal line and messages are discarded, a system message appears on that terminal line.
logging on — enables logging. logging version Displays syslog messages in a RFC 3164 or RFC 5424 format. Syntax logging version {0|1} Defaults 0 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.
Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History Example (Partial) number (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of messages displayed in the output. The range is from 1 to 65535. history (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword history to view only information in the Syslog history table. reverse (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword reverse to view the Syslog messages in FIFO (first in, first out) order. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a table showing the number of messages per type and per slot.
from vty2 ( 10.11.68.22 )by admin May 19 12:05:43: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from vty2 ( 10.11.68.22 )by admin May 19 10:23:59: %STKUNIT0-M:CP %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from vty0 ( 10.11.68.
Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.5(0.0) Introduced on the MXL.
56 Stacking Commands Stacking is supported on the FN410S and FN410T cards with ports 9 and 10 as the stack ports. Stacking is limited to six Aggregators in the same or different chassis in a single stack. Stacking provides a single point of management and NIC teaming for high availability and higher throughput. To configure an Aggregator stack, you must use the CLI. The stacking commands are always available and operational.
Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command is supported on the M I/O, FN410S, and FN410T Aggregators. This command is used to reset the stack-unit. The master unit can also be power cycled using this command. redundancy disable-auto-reboot Prevent the switch stack management unit from rebooting if it fail.
redundancy force-failover stack-unit Force the standby unit in the stack to become the management unit. Syntax redundancy force-failover stack-unit Defaults Not enabled. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. reset stack-unit Reset any designated stack member except the management unit (master unit).
-- Stack Info -Unit UnitType Status ReqTyp CurTyp Version Ports ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Management online I/O-Aggregator I/O-Aggregator 8-3-17-46 56 1 Standby online I/O-Aggregator I/O-Aggregator 8-3-17-46 56 2 Member not present 3 Member not present 4 Member not present 5 Member not present Dell# Dell#reset stack-unit 0 >>>Resetting master not allowed % Error: Reset of master unit is not allowed.
Auto Data Sync: Failover Type: Auto reboot Stack-unit: Auto failover limit: Full Hot Failover Enabled 3 times in 60 minutes -- Stack-unit Failover Record ------------------------------------------------Failover Count: 0 Last failover timestamp: None Last failover Reason: None Last failover type: None -- Last Data Block Sync Record: ------------------------------------------------Stack Unit Config: no block sync done Start-up Config: no block sync done Runtime Event Log: no block sync done Running Config:
Usage Information This command is supported on the M I/O, FN410S, and FN410T Aggregators. The following describes the show interfaces command shown in the following example. Example Field Description Topology Lists the topology of stack ports connected: Ring, Daisy chain, or Standalone. Interface The unit/port ID of the connected stack port on this unit. Link Speed Link Speed of the stack port (10) in Gb/s. Admin Status The only currently listed status is Up.
show system—displays the current status of all stack members or a specific member. show system stack-unit iom-mode Displays the current iom-mode (stack/standalone) and the mode configured after next reboot. Syntax Parameters show system stack-unit unit-number iom-mode unit number <0– 5> Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter the number of the member stack unit. The range is from 0 to 5. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6.(0.
Parameters unit number <0– 5> Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter the number of the member stack unit. The range is from 0 to 5. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6.(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command is supported on the M I/O, FN410S, and FN410T Aggregators.
Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Command History stack Enable stack mode. standalone Enable stand-alone mode. vlt Enable virtual link trunking mode. full-switch Enable full-switch mode. standalone • CONFIGURATION All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6.(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command is supported on the M I/O, FN410S, and FN410T Aggregators.
Defaults 0 Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6.(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.3(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command is supported on the M I/O, FN410S, and FN410T Aggregators. Related Commands • reload – reboots Dell Networking Operating System (OS). • show system – displays the status of all stack members or a specific member.
stack-unit renumber Change the stack member ID of any stack member or a stand-alone unit. Syntax Parameters stack-unit 0-5 renumber 0-5 0-5 Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History The first instance of this value is the stack member unit identifier, from 0 to 5, of the switch that you want add to the stack. The range is from 0 to 5. The second instance of this value is the desired new unit identifier number. Version Description 9.9(0.
Storm Control 57 The Dell Networking operating software storm control feature allows you to limit or suppress traffic during a traffic storm. Important Points to Remember • Interface commands can only be applied on physical interfaces (virtual local area networks [VLANs] and link aggregation group [LAG] interfaces are not supported). • An INTERFACE-level command only supports storm control configuration on ingress.
To disable storm control, use the no io-aggregator broadcast stormcontrol command. Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes Enabled • CONFIGURATION Standalone-Mux (SMUX) Full–Switch Mode Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information This command is not available in PMUX mode.
show storm-control unknown-unicast Display the storm control unknown-unicast configuration. Syntax Parameters show storm-control unknown-unicast [interface] interface (OPTIONAL) Enter the following interface to display the interface specific storm control configuration: • Defaults Command Modes Supported Modes For a 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface, enter the keyword TenGigabitEthernet then the slot/port information.
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show storm-control broadcast tengigabitethernet 3/8 Broadcast storm control configuration Interface Direction Packets/Second ---------------------------------------TenGig 3/8 Ingress 1000 Dell# show storm-control multicast Display the storm control multicast configuration.
storm-control multicast (Interface) Configure the percentage of multicast traffic allowed on the interface. Syntax storm-control multicast packets_per_second in To disable multicast storm control on the interface, use the no storm-control multicast packets_per_second in command. Parameters packets_per_seco nd Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed into the network. The range is from 0 to 33554368.
Usage Information Broadcast storm control is valid on Layer 2/Layer 3 interfaces only. Layer 2 broadcast traffic is treated as unknown-unicast traffic. storm-control broadcast (Interface) Configure the percentage of broadcast traffic allowed on an interface. Syntax storm-control broadcast [packets_per_second in] To disable broadcast storm control on the interface, use the no storm-control broadcast [packets_per_second in] command.
9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Broadcast traffic (all 0xFs) should be counted against the broadcast storm control meter, not against the multicast storm control meter. It is possible, however, that some multicast control traffic may get dropped when storm control thresholds are exceeded. storm-control PFC/LLFC Shut down the port if it receives the PFC/LLFC frames more than the configured rate.
To disable storm control for unknown-unicast traffic, use the no storm-control unknown-unicast [packets_per_second in] command. Parameters packets_per_seco nd Defaults none Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Enter the packets per second of broadcast traffic allowed into the network. The range is from 0 to 33554368. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) 58 The commands in this chapter configure and monitor the IEEE 802.1d spanning tree protocol (STP). bridge-priority Set the bridge priority of the switch in an IEEE 802.1D spanning tree. Syntax bridge-priority {priority-value | primary | secondary} To return to the default value, use the no bridge-priority command. Parameters priority-value Enter a number as the bridge priority value. The range is from 0 to 65535. The default is 32768.
To disable debugging, use the no debug spanning-tree command. Parameters stp-id Enter zero (0). The switch supports one spanning tree group with a group ID of 0. protocol Enter the keyword for the type of STP to debug, either mstp, pvst, or rstp. all (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword all to debug all spanning tree operations. bpdu (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword bpdu to debug bridge protocol data units. events (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword events to debug STP events.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. portfast bpdufilter default — enters SPANNING TREE mode on the switch. disable Disable the spanning tree protocol globally on the switch. Syntax disable To enable Spanning Tree Protocol, use the no disable command. Defaults Enabled (that is, the spanning tree protocol is disabled.
Supported Modes Command History Related Commands Full–Switch Mode Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. max-age — changes the wait time before STP refreshes protocol configuration information. hello-time — changes the time interval between BPDUs. hello-time Set the time interval between generation of the spanning tree bridge protocol data units (BPDUs).
max-age To maintain configuration information before refreshing that information, set the time interval for the spanning tree bridge. Syntax max-age seconds To return to the default values, use the no max-age command. Parameters seconds Defaults 20 seconds Command Modes SPANNING TREE Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Related Commands Enter a number of seconds the system waits before refreshing configuration information. The range is from 6 to 40. The default is 20 seconds.
protocol spanning-tree To enable and configure the spanning tree group, enter SPANNING TREE mode. Syntax protocol spanning-tree stp-id To disable the Spanning Tree group, use the no protocol spanning-tree stp-id command. Parameters stp-id Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Mode Command History Enter zero (0). The system supports one spanning tree group, group 0. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.
no disable Dell(config-stp)# show spanning-tree 0 Display the spanning tree group configuration and status of interfaces in the spanning tree group. Syntax Parameters show spanning-tree 0 [active | brief | guard | interface interface | root | summary] 0 Enter 0 (zero) to display information about that specific spanning tree group. active (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword active to display only active interfaces in spanning tree group 0.
The following describes the show spanning-tree 0 command shown in the example. Example Field Description “Bridge Identifier...” Lists the bridge priority and the MAC address for this STP bridge. “Configured hello...” Displays the settings for hello time, max age, and forward delay. “We are...” States whether this bridge is the root bridge for the STG. “Current root...” Lists the bridge priority and MAC address for the root bridge. “Topology flag...
Port 2 (TenGigabitEthernet 1/1) is Forwarding Port path cost 4, Port priority 8, Port Identifier 8.26 Designated root has priority 32768, address 0001.e800.0a56 Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0001.e800.0a56 Designated port id is 8.
spanning-tree 0 Assigns a Layer 2 interface to STP instance 0 and configures a port cost or port priority, or enables loop guard, root guard, or the Portfast feature on the interface. Syntax spanning-tree stp-id {cost cost | {rootguard} | portfast [bpduguard [shutdown-on-violation]| bpdufilter] | priority priority} To disable Spanning Tree group on an interface, use the no spanning-tree stp-id {cost cost | {rootguard} | portfast [bpduguard [shutdown-on-violation] | bpdufilter] | priority priority} command.
8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.. Usage Information If you enable portfast bpduguard on an interface and the interface receives a BPDU, the software disables the interface and sends a message stating that fact. The port is in ERR_DISABLE mode, yet appears in the show interface commands as enabled. If you do not enable shutdown-on-violation, BPDUs still are sent to the RPM CPU.
59 System Time The commands in this chapter configure time values on the system, either using the Dell Networking OS, the hardware, or using the network time protocol (NTP). With NTP, the switch can act only as a client to an NTP clock host. For more information, refer to the Network Time Protocol section of the Management chapter in the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information You can change the order of the month and day parameters to enter the time and date as time day month year . You cannot delete the software clock. The software clock runs only when the software is up. The clock restarts, based on the hardware clock, when the switch reboots.
end-month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English. You can enter the name of a day to change the order of the display to time day month year. end-time Enter the time in hours:minutes. For the hour variable, use the 24-hour format; example, 17:15 is 5:15 pm. end-year Enter a four-digit number as the year. The range is from 1993 to 2035. offset (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of minutes to add during the summer-time period. The range is from 1 to1440. The default is 60 minutes.
• first: Enter this keyword to start daylight saving time in the first week of the month. • last: Enter this keyword to start daylight saving time in the last week of the month. Enter the name of the day that you want daylight saving time to begin. Use English three letter abbreviations; for example, Sun, Sat, Mon, and so on. The range is from Sun to Sat. start-month Enter the name of one of the 12 months in English. start-time Enter the time in hours:minutes.
Related Commands Version Description 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. clock summer-time date — sets a date (and time zone) on which to convert the switch to daylight saving time on a one-time basis. show clock — displays the current clock settings. debug ntp Display network time protocol (NTP) transactions and protocol messages for troubleshooting.
8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ntp offset-threshold Configure the threshold time interval before which the system generates an NTP audit log message if the time difference from the NTP server is greater than a threshold value (offset-threshold). Syntax ntp offset-threshold threshold-value To disable the threshold value, use the no ntp offset-threshold command.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information You can configure multiple time-serving hosts (up to 250). From these timeserving hosts, the operating system chooses one NTP host with which to synchronize. Because many polls to NTP hosts can impact network performance, Dell Networking recommends limiting the number of hosts configured.
Parameters number Specify a number for the authentication key. The range is from 1 to 4294967295. This number must be the same as the number parameter configured in the ntp trusted-key command. md5 Specify that the authentication key is encrypted using MD5 encryption algorithm. 0 Specify that authentication key is entered in an unencrypted format (default). 7 Specify that the authentication key is entered in DES encrypted format. key Enter the authentication key in the previously specified format.
ntp master Configure the switch as NTP Server. Syntax Parameters ntp master ntp master Enter the keyword stratum number to identify the NTP Server's hierarchy. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide.
Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.6(0.0) Added support for VRF. 8.3.11.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You can configure multiple time-serving hosts (up to 250). From these timeserving hosts, the system chooses one NTP host with which to synchronize. To determine which server was selected, use the show ntp associations command.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. ntp trusted-key Set a key to authenticate the system to which NTP synchronizes. Syntax ntp trusted-key number To delete the key, use the no ntp trusted-key number command. Parameters number Defaults Not configured. Command Modes CONFIGURATION Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Enter a number as the trusted key ID. The range is from 1 to 4294967295.
Parameters Command Modes Supported Modes Command History detail • EXEC • EXEC Privilege (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view the source information of the clock. All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Example Dell#show clock 12:30:04.402 pacific Tue May 22 2012 Dell# Example (Detail) Dell#show clock detail 12:30:26.
Usage Information The following describes the show ntp associations command shown in the following example. Field Description (none) One or more of the following symbols could be displayed: • * means synchronized to this peer. • # means almost synchronized to this peer. • + means the peer was selected for possible synchronization. • - means the peer is a candidate for selection. • ~ means the peer is statically configured. remote Displays the remote IP address of the NTP peer.
show ntp vrf associations Displays the NTP servers configured for the VRF instance . Syntax show ntp [vrf] associations. Command Modes EXEC EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History This guide is platform-specific. For command information about other platforms, refer to the relevant Dell Networking OS Command Line Reference Guide. The following is a list of the Dell Networking OS version history for this command. Version Description 9.9(0.
Field Description “frequency is...” Displays the frequency (in ppm), stability (in ppm) and precision (in Hertz) of the clock in this system. “reference time is...” Displays the reference time stamp. “clock offset is...” Displays the system offset to the synchronized peer and the time delay on the path to the NTP root clock. “root dispersion is...” Displays the root and path dispersion. “peer mode is...” State what NTP mode the switch is. This should be Client mode.
60 Tunneling Tunneling is supported on the Dell Networking OS. tunnel-mode Enable a tunnel interface. Syntax tunnel mode {ipip | ipv6 | ipv6ip}[decapsulate-any] To disable an active tunnel interface, use the no tunnel mode command. Parameters ipip Enable tunnel in RFC 2003 mode and encapsulate IPv4 and/or IPv6 datagrams inside an IPv4 tunnel. ipv6 Enable tunnel in RFC 2473 mode and encapsulate IPv4 and/or IPv6 datagrams inside an IPv6 tunnel.
configure any tunnel allow-remote entries, the tunnel—mode command fails unless the decapsulate-any option is included Configuration of IPv6 commands over decapsulate-any tunnel causes an error. tunnel source Set a source address for the tunnel. Syntax tunnel source {ip-address | ipv6–address | interface-typenumber} To delete the current tunnel source address, use the no tunnel source command. Parameters ip-address Enter the source IPv4 address in A.B.C.D format.
tunnel keepalive Configure the tunnel keepalive target, interval and attempts. Syntax tunnel keepalive {ip-address | ipv6-address}[interval {seconds}] [attempts {count | unlimited}] Use the no tunnel keepalive command to disable tunnel keepalive probes. Parameters ip-address ipv6 address Enter the IPv4 or IPv6 address of the peer to which the keepalive probes will be sent.
tunnel allow-remote Configure an IPv4 or IPv6 address or prefix whose tunneled packets will be accepted for decapsulation. If no allow-remote entries are configured, tunneled packets from any remote peer address will be accepted. Syntax tunnel allow-remote {ip-address | ipv6-address} [mask] Use the no tunnel allow-remote command to delete a configured allow-remote entry. Any specified address/mask values must match an existing entry for the delete to succeed.
tunnel dscp Configure the method to set the DSCP in the outer tunnel header. Syntax tunnel dscp {mapped | } To use the default tunnel mapping behavior, use the no tunnel dscp value command. Parameters mapped Enter the keyword mapped to map the original packet DSCP (IPv4)/Traffic Class (IPv6) to the tunnel header DSCP (IPv4)/ Traffic Class (IPv6) depending on the mode of tunnel. value Enter a value to set the DSCP value in the tunnel header. The range is from 0 to 63.
ipv6–address Enter the destination IPv6 address for the tunnel. Defaults none Command Modes INTERFACE TUNNEL (conf-if-tu) Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The tunnel interface is inoperable without a valid tunnel destination address for the configured Tunnel mode.
tunnel hop-limit Configure the method to set the IPv4 time-to-live or the IPv6 hop limit value in the outer tunnel header. Syntax tunnel hop-limit value To restore the default tunnel hop-limit, use the no tunnel hop-limit command. Parameters value Enter the hop limit (ipv6) or time-to-live (ipv4) value to include in the tunnel header. The range is from 0 to 255. The default is 64.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Introduced on the MXL. Usage Information The ip unnumbered command will fail in two condition: • If the logical ip address is configured. • If the tunnel mode is ipv6ip (where ip address over tunnel interface is not possible). To ping the unnumbered tunnels the logical address route information should be present in both the ends.
• If the tunnel mode is ipv6ip (where ip address over tunnel interface is not possible). To ping the unnumbered tunnels the logical address route information should be present in both the ends. NOTE: The ipv6 unnumbered command can specify an interface name that does not yet exist, or does not yet have a configured IPv6 address. But the tunnel interface will not go operationally up until it has determined a logical address to use of at least one address family.
61 u-Boot All commands in this chapter are in u-Boot mode. These commands are supported on the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) FN IOM platform. To access this mode, press any key when the following line appears on the console during a system boot. Hit any key to stop autoboot: Enter u-Boot immediately, as the BOOT_USER# prompt. NOTE: This chapter describes only a few commands available in u-Boot mode. NOTE: You cannot use the Tab key to complete commands in this mode.
9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. boot show net config retries Show the number of retries for network boot configuration failure. Syntax boot show net config retries Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
boot zero Clears the primary, secondary, or default boot parameters. Syntax boot zero [primary | secondary | default] Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. default gateway Set the default gateway IP address. Syntax default-gateway Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.
help Display the help menu. Syntax help Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. BOOT_USER # help ***** Dell Force10 Boot Interface Help Information ***** Current access level: USER LEVEL Use "syntax help" for more information on syntax.
ignore startup config Ignore the system startup configuration. Syntax ignore startup-config Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. interface management ethernet ip address Set the management port IP address and mask.
no interface management ethernet ip address Clear the management port IP address and mask. Syntax no interface management ethernet ip address Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. reload Reload the FN IOM switch. Syntax reload Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.
Possible command list: show boot blc show the boot loop counter value BOOT_USER # show boot blc Boot Loop Counter : 10 BOOT_USER # show boot selection Display the ROM bootstrap bootflash partition. Syntax show boot selection Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Example BOOT_USER # show bootflash GENERAL BOOTFLASH INFO ====================== Bootflash Partition A: Dell Force10 Networks System Boot Official IOM_LP_IMG_BOOT_LOADER, BSP Release 4.0.1.0bt1 Created Tue May 1 10:56:16 2012 by build on login-sjc-01 Bootflash Partition B: Dell Force10 Networks System Boot Official IOM_LP_IMG_BOOT_LOADER, BSP Release 4.0.1.
file name Management Etherenet IP address Server IP address Default Gateway IP address Management Etherenet MAC address : : : : : FTOS-XL-8-3-16-99.bin 10.16.130.134/16 10.16.127.53 15.0.0.1 00:01:E8:43:DE:DF BOOT_USER # show default-gateway Display the default gateway IP address. Syntax show default-gateway Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
BOOT_USER # show interface management port config Show the management port boot characteristics. Syntax show interface management port config Command Modes uBoot Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
change operating system boot parameters boot selection [a|b] change the rom bootstrap bootflash partition boot show net config retries show number of retries for network boot config failure boot write net config retries write number of retries for network boot config failure boot zero [primary|secondary|default] zero operating system boot parameters default-gateway default-gateway - set the default gateway ip address enable [user|admin] change access privilege level help display help menu
Uplink Failure Detection (UFD) 62 Uplink failure detection (UFD) provides detection of the loss of upstream connectivity and, if you use this with network interface controller (NIC) teaming, automatic recovery from a failed link. NOTE: In Standalone, VLT, and Stacking modes, the UFD group number is 1 by default and cannot be changed. clear ufd-disable Re-enable one or more downstream interfaces on the switch/router that are in a UFD-Disabled Error state so that an interface can send and receive traffic.
Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. • downstream — assigns a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface. • uplink-state-group — creates an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links. debug uplink-state-group Enable debug messages for events related to a specified uplink-state group or all groups.
defer-timer Configure a timer that prevents unwanted flapping of downstream ports when the uplink port channel goes down and comes up. Syntax defer-timerseconds Defaults 10 (Standalone mode) Parameters seconds Specify the time (in seconds) to wait for the upstream port channel (LAG 128) to come back up before server ports are brought down. The range is from 1 to 120. Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Supported Modes Standalone, Stacking, VLT Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.
Version Description 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Example Dell(conf-uplink-state-group-16)# description test Dell(conf-uplink-state-group-16)# Related Commands uplink-state-group — creates an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links. downstream Assign a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as a downstream interface. Syntax downstream interface To delete an uplink-state group, enter the no downstream interface command.
You can assign an interface to only one uplink-state group. Configure each interface assigned to an uplink-state group as either an upstream or downstream interface, but not both. You can assign individual member ports of a port channel to the group. An uplinkstate group can contain either the member ports of a port channel or the port channel itself, but not both. Related Commands • upstream — assigns a port or port-channel to the uplink-state group as an upstream interface.
downstream disable links Configure the number of downstream links in the uplink-state group that are disabled if one upstream link in an uplink-state group goes down. Syntax downstream disable links {number | all} To revert to the default setting, use the no downstream disable links command. Parameters number Enter the number of downstream links to be brought down by UFD. The range is from 1 to 1024. all Brings down all downstream links in the group.
To disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group, use the no enable command. group-id Enables debugging on the specified uplink-state group. Valid group-id values are 1 to 16. Defaults Upstream-link tracking is automatically enabled in an uplink-state group. Command Modes UPLINK-STATE-GROUP Supported Modes All Modes Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.
downstream TengigabitEthernet 0/2,4,6,11 upstream TengigabitEthernet 0/8, 12 upstream PortChannel 1 ! uplink state track 2 downstream TengigabitEthernet 0/1,3,5 upstream TengigabitEthernet 0/9,10 Related Commands • show uplink-state-group — displays the status information on a specified uplink-state group or all groups. • uplink-state-group — creates an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links.
Uplink State Group Defer Timer Upstream Interfaces Downstream Interfaces 0/4(Dwn) Te 0/5(Up) : : : : 1 Status: Enabled, Up 10 sec Po 128(Up) Te 0/1(Dwn) Te 0/2(Dwn) Te 0/3(Up) Te Te 0/6(Dwn) Te 0/7(Up) Te 0/8(Up) Dell# Related Commands • show running-config uplink-state-group— displays the current configuration of one or more uplink-state groups. • uplink-state-group — create an uplink-state group and enables the tracking of upstream links.
An uplink-state group is considered to be operationally down if no upstream interfaces in the group are in the Link-Up state. No uplink-state tracking is performed when a group is disabled or in an operationally down state. To disable upstream-link tracking without deleting the uplink-state group, use the no enable command in uplink-state-group configuration mode.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. Usage Information You can assign physical port or port-channel interfaces to an uplink-state group. You can assign an interface to only one uplink-state group. Configure each interface assigned to an uplink-state group as either an upstream or downstream interface, but not both. You can assign individual member ports of a port channel to the group.
63 VLAN Stacking With the virtual local area network (VLAN)-stacking feature (also called stackable VLANs and QinQ), you can “stack” VLANs into one tunnel and switch them through the network transparently. For more information about basic VLAN commands, refer to the Virtual LAN (VLAN) Commands section in the Layer 2 chapter.
9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. dei honor Honor the incoming DEI value by mapping it to a system drop precedence. Enter the command once for 0 and once for 1. Syntax Parameters dei honor {0 | 1} {green | red | yellow} 0|1 Enter the bit value you want to map to a color. green | red | yellow Choose a color: • Green: High priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped.
• Green: High priority packets that are the least preferred to be dropped. • Yellow: Lower priority packets that are treated as besteffort. Defaults All the packets on egress are marked with DEI 0. Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You must first enable DEI for this configuration to take effect.
Version Description 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information You must enable the stackable VLAN (using the vlan-stack compatible command) on the VLAN prior to adding a member to the VLAN. Related Commands vlan-stack compatible — enables stackable VLAN on a VLAN. show interface dei-honor Display the dei honor configuration.
show interface dei-mark Display the dei mark configuration. Syntax Parameters show interface dei-mark [interface slot/port] interface slot/port Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Enter the interface type then the line card slot and port number. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Usage Information Prior to enabling this command, to place the interface in Layer 2 mode, enter the switchport command. To remove the access port designation, remove the port (using the no member interface command) from all stackable VLAN enabled VLANs. vlan-stack compatible Enable the stackable VLAN feature on a VLAN. Syntax vlan-stack compatible To disable the Stackable VLAN feature on a VLAN, use the no vlan-stack compatible command. Defaults Not configured.
vlan-stack dot1p-mapping Map C-Tag dot1p values to an S-Tag dot1p value. You can separate the C-Tag values by commas and dashed ranges are permitted. Dynamic mode CoS overrides any Layer 2 QoS configuration if there is conflicts. Syntax Parameters vlan-stack dot1p-mapping c-tag-dot1p values sp-tag-dot1p value c-tag-dot1p value Enter the keyword c-tag-dot1p then the customer dot1p value that is mapped to a service provider do1p value. The range is from 0 to 5.
Usage Information For specific interoperability limitations regarding the S-Tag TPID, refer to the Dell Networking OS Configuration Guide. Related Commands portmode hybrid — sets a port (physical ports only) to accept both tagged and untagged frames. A port configured this way is identified as a hybrid port in report displays. vlan-stack trunk — specifies a Layer 2 port or port channel as a trunk port to the Stackable VLAN network.
for VLAN 10, while also switching untagged traffic for VLAN 30 and tagged traffic for VLAN 40. (To allow VLAN 30 traffic, the native VLAN feature is required, by executing the portmode hybrid command. Refer to portmode hybrid in the Interfaces chapter.
Dell(conf-if-vlan)#exit Dell(config)#interface vlan 20 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#untagged TenGi 8/0 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#exit Dell(config)# Dell(config)#interface vlan 40 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#tagged TenGi 8/0 Dell(conf-if-vlan)#exit Dell(config)# VLAN Stacking 1513
64 Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) VLT allows physical links between two chassis to appear as a single virtual link to the network core. VLT eliminates the requirement for Spanning Tree protocols by allowing link aggregation group (LAG) terminations on two separate distribution or core switches, and by supporting a loop-free topology.
interval seconds Enter the keyword interval to specify the time interval to send hello messages. The range is from 1 to 5 seconds. The default is 1 second. Defaults 1 second Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. clear ip mroute Clear learned multicast routes on the multicast forwarding table.
clear ip pim tib Clear PIM tree information from the PIM database. Syntax Parameters clear ip pim tib [group] group Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group address in dotted decimal format (A.B.C.D). Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. VLT ARP Statistics ---------------ARP Tunnel Pkts sent:0 ARP Tunnel Pkts Rcvd:0 ARP-sync Pkts Sent:0 ARP-sync Pkts Rcvd:0 ARP Reg Request sent:19 ARP Reg Request rcvd:10 delay-restore abort-threshold Increase the Boot Up timer to some value (>60 seconds).
Usage Information To abort VLT delay restore timer as the maximum threshold, the maximum time interval is applied to hold down ICL peer-up in the start-up configurations during the reload. lacp ungroup member-independent Prevent possible loop during the bootup of a VLT peer switch or a device that accesses the VLT domain. Syntax Parameters lacp ungroup member-independent {vlt | port-channel} port-channel Force all LACP port-channel members to become switchports.
multicast peer-routing timeout Configure the time for a VLT node to retain synced multicast routes or synced multicast outgoing interface (OIF) after a VLT peer node failure. Syntax multicast peer-routing timeout value To restore the default value, use the no multicast peer-routing timeout command. Parameters value Enter the timeout value in seconds. The range is from 1 to 1200. The default is 150. Default Not configured.
Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information To configure the VLAN from where the VLT peer forwards packets received over the VLTi from an adjacent VLT peer that is down, use the peer-down-vlan parameter. To ensure that the DHCP discover packets are forwarded to the VLAN that has the DHCP server, use this configuration. peer-routing Enable L3 VLT peer-routing. This command is applicable for both IPV6/ IPV4.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Added the IPV6/IPV4 support on the MXL. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information When the timer expires, the software checks to see if the VLT peer is now available. If the VLT peer is not available, peer-routing is disabled on that peer. primary-priority Reconfigure the primary role of VLT peer switches.
Parameters Static (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword static to view static multicast routes. group-address [source-address] (OPTIONAL) Enter the multicast group-address to view only routes associated with that group. Enter the source-address to view routes with that groupaddress and source-address. count (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword count to view the number of multicast routes and packets.
Field Description (S, G) Displays the forwarding entry in the multicast route table. uptime Displays the amount of time the entry has been in the multicast forwarding table. Incoming interface Displays the reverse path forwarding (RPF) information towards the source for (S,G) entries and the RP for (*,G) entries.
Incoming interface: TenGigabitEthernet 3/2 Outgoing interface list: TenGigabitEthernet 3/4 utgoing interface l TenGigabitEthernet 3/3 show vlt backup-link Displays information on the backup link operation. Syntax show vlt backup-link Default Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Example (Brief) Version Description 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
128 Dell# 128 UP UP 1000 show vlt inconsistency Display deviations in VLT multicast traffic. Syntax show vlt inconsistency ip mroute Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.2(0.0) Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Dell#show vlt inconsistency ip mroute Spanned Multicast Routing IIF Inconsistency Multicast Route --------------(22.22.22.200, 225.1.1.2) (*, 225.1.1.
----------Parameters -----------Unit-ID Local ----------0 Peer --------15 Vlan-config -----------Vlan-ID Local Mode Peer Mode -------------------- ----------100 -- Vlan IPV4 Multicast Status -------------------------Vlan-ID Local Status ------------------4094 L3 Peer Status ----------- Active Inactive Dell# show vlt role Display the VLT peer status, role of the local VLT switch, VLT system MAC address and system priority, and the MAC address and priority of the locally-attached VLT device.
show vlt statistics Displays statistics on VLT operations. Syntax show vlt statistics Default Not configured. Command Modes EXEC Supported Modes All Modes Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
ARP Reg Request rcvd:1 VLT IOA Statistics ------------------------------IOA Info Pkts sent: 5 IOA Info Pkts Rcvd: 7 IOA Reg Request sent: 2 IOA Reg Request rcvd: 2 IOA Reg Response sent: 2 IOA Reg Response rcvd: 1 VLT NDP Statistics -------------------NDP NA VLT Tunnel Pkts sent:0 NDP NA VLT Tunnel Pkts Rcvd:0 NDP NA Non-VLT Tunnel Pkts sent:0 NDP NA Non-VLT Tunnel Pkts Rcvd:0 Ndp-sync Pkts Sent:0 Ndp-sync Pkts Rcvd:0 Ndp Reg Request sent:2 Ndp Reg Request rcvd:1 VLT multicast not enabled stack-unit iom-mo
system-mac Reconfigure the default MAC address for the domain. Syntax Parameters system-mac mac-address mac-address Enter the system MAC address for the VLT domain. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes VLT DOMAIN Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 9.2(0.0) Supported on the M I/O Aggregator. Usage Information When you create a VLT domain on a switch, Dell Networking OS automatically assigns a unique unit ID (0 or 1) to each peer switch. The unit IDs are used for internal system operations. Use the unit-id command to explicitly configure the unit ID of a VLT peer. Configure a different unit ID (0 or 1) on each peer switch.
vlt-peer-lag port-channel Associate the port channel to the corresponding port channel in the VLT peer for the VLT connection to an attached device. Syntax Parameters vlt-peer-lag port-channel id-number id-number Enter the respective vlt port-channel number of the peer device. Defaults Not configured. Command Modes INTERFACE PORT-CHANNEL Supported Modes Programmable-Mux (PMUX) Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.
Example Dell#Show vlt private-vlan vlan-id Codes: C- Community, I – Isolated, V – Internally tagged, T – tagged, * - VLT Pvlan Primary Secondary ICL Status 10 V (*) 20(C) V 30 (I) V 40 50(C) 60 (I) T T T Dell# Virtual Link Trunking (VLT) 1533
Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) 65 Virtual router redundancy protocol (VRRP) is supported by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS) for IPv4 and IPv6. The following commands apply to both VRRP IPv4 and IPv6: • advertise-interval • description • disable • hold-time • preempt • priority • show config • track • virtual-address VRRP Ipv6 are in the VRRP for IPv6 Commands section. advertise-interval Set the time interval between VRRP advertisements.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.5(0.0) Introduced the support for centisecs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch . 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information Dell Networking OS recommends keeping the default setting for this command. If you do change the time interval between VRRP advertisements on one router, change it on all routers. authentication-type Enable authentication of VRRP data exchanges.
clear counters vrrp Clear the counters maintained on VRRP operations. Syntax Parameters clear counters vrrp [vrrp-id] vrrp-id Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of the VRRP group ID. The range is from 1 to 255. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
all Enter the keyword all to enable debugging of all VRRP groups. packets Enter the keyword packets to enable debugging of VRRP control packets. state Enter the keyword state to enable debugging of VRRP state changes. timer Enter the keyword timer to enable debugging of the VRRP timer. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
disable Disable a VRRP group. Syntax disable To re-enable a disabled VRRP group, use the no disable command. Defaults Enabled. Command Modes VRRP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To enable VRRP traffic, assign an IP address to the VRRP group using the virtual-address command and enter no disable.
Version Description 9.5(0.0) Introduced the support for centisecs on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information If a switch is a MASTER and you change the hold timer, disable and re-enable VRRP for the new hold timer value to take effect. Related Commands disable — disables a VRRP group. preempt To preempt or become the MASTER router, permit a BACKUP router with a higher priority value.
Command Modes VRRP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information To guarantee that a VRRP group becomes MASTER, configure the VRRP group’s virtual address with same IP address as the interface’s primary IP address and change the priority of the VRRP group to 255.
show vrrp View the VRRP groups that are active. If no VRRP groups are active, the system returns No Active VRRP group. Syntax Parameters show vrrp [vrrp-id] [interface] [brief] vrrp-id (OPTIONAL) Enter the Virtual Router Identifier for the VRRP group to view only that group. The range is from 1 to 255.
Item Description • State Example (Brief) N = Preempt is not enabled. Displays the operational state of the interface by using one of the following: • NA/IF (the interface is not available). • MASTER (the interface associated with the MASTER router). • BACKUP (the interface associated with the BACKUP router). Master addr Displays the IP address of the MASTER router. Virtual addr(s) Displays the virtual IP addresses of the VRRP routers associated with the interface.
Item Example Description • Adv sent displays the number of VRRP advertisements sent on the interface. • Gratuitous ARP sent displays the number of gratuitous ARPs sent. Virtual MAC address Displays the virtual MAC address of the VRRP group. Virtual IP address Displays the virtual IP address of the VRRP router to which the interface is connected. Authentication:... States whether authentication is configured for the VRRP group. If it is, the authentication type and the password are listed.
track Monitor an interface and lower the priority value of the VRRP group on that interface if it is disabled. Syntax track interface [priority-cost cost] To disable monitoring, use the no track interface command. Parameters interface cost Defaults cost = 10 Command Modes VRRP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History (OPTIONAL) Enter the following keywords and slot/port or number information: • For a Loopback interface, enter the keyword loopback then a number from 0 to 16383.
Parameters ip-address1 Enter an IP address of the virtual router in dotted decimal format. The IP address must be on the same subnet as the interface’s primary IP address. ... ip-address12 (OPTIONAL) Enter up to 11 additional IP addresses of virtual routers in dotted decimal format. Separate the IP addresses with a space. The IP addresses must be on the same subnet as the interface’s primary IP address. Defaults Not configured.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information This command applies to a single interface. When used with the vrrp delay reload CLI, the later timer rules the VRRP enabling. For example, if vrrp delay reload is 600 and the vrrp delay minimum is 300: • When the system reloads, VRRP waits 600 seconds (10 minutes) to bring up VRRP on all interfaces that are up and configured for VRRP.
• When an interface comes up, whether as part of a system reload or an interface reload, the system waits 300 seconds (5 minutes) to bring up VRRP on that interface. Save the configuration and reload the system for the delay timers to take effect. Related Command vrrp delay minimum — sets the delay time for VRRP initialization after a line card reboot. vrrp-group Assign a VRRP ID to an interface. You can configure up to 12 VRRP groups per interface.
Parameters vrid (OPTIONAL) Enter the number of an IPv6 VRRP group. The range is from 1 to 255. vrf instance (OPTIONAL) Enter the name of a VRF instance (32 characters maximum) to clear the counters of all IPv6 VRRP groups in the specified VRF. Defaults Not configured Command Modes INTERFACE Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
packets Enter the keyword packets to enable debugging of VRRP control packets. state Enter the keyword state to enable debugging of VRRP state changes timer Enter the keyword timer to enable debugging of the VRRP timer. Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 8.3.16.1 Introduced on the MXL 10/40GbE Switch IO Module. Usage Information The following describes the show vrrp ipv6 command shown in the following example. Line Beginning Description with GigabitEthernet... Displays the Interface, the VRRP group ID, and the network address. If the interface is no sending VRRP packets, 0.0.0.0 appears as the network address. State: master...
Line Beginning Description with Example • Interface type and slot/port or object number, description, and time since the last change in the state of the tracked object. • Cost to be subtracted from the VRRP group priority if the state of the tracked interface/object goes DOWN.
• When VRF microcode is loaded in CAM, the VRID for a VRRP group is equal to 16 times the vrrp-group or vrrp-ipv6-group vrid number plus the ip vrf vrf-id number. For example, if VRF microcode is loaded and VRRP group 10 is configured in VRF 2, the VRID used for the VRRP group is (16 x 10) + 2, or 162. This VRID value is used in the lowest byte of the virtual MAC address of the VRRP group and is also used for VRF routing.
1. Set the switches with the lowest priority to both. 2. Set the switch with the highest priority to version 3. 3. Set all the switches from both to version 3. NOTE: Do not run VRRP version 2 and version 3 in the same group for an extended period of time.
66 SNMP Traps This chapter lists the traps sent by the Dell Networking Operating System (OS). Each trap is listed by the fields Message ID, Trap Type, and Trap Option. Table 4.
Message ID Trap Type Trap Option SNMP NONE SNMP NONE NONE NONE ENVMON TEMP ENVMON TEMP ENVMON TEMP ENVMON TEMP ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE %RPM0-P:CP %SNMP-4-RMON_FALLING_THRESHOLD: RMON falling threshold alarm from SNMP OID RMON_HC_RISHING_THRESHOLD %RPM0-P:CP %SNMP-4-RMON_HC_RISING_THRESHOLD: RMON high-capacity rising threshold alarm from SNMP OID RMON_HC_FALLING_THRESHOLD %RPM0-P:CP %SNMP-4-RMON_HC_FALLING_THRESHOLD: RMON high-capacit
Message ID Trap Type Trap Option ENVMON NONE ENVMON NONE PROTO NONE PROTO NONE PROTO NONE PROTO NONE PROTO NONE ETS NONE ETS NONE ETS NONE %CHMGR-5-MEM_THRESHOLD: Memory %s usage above threshold. MemUsage (%d) CHM_MEM_THRESHOLD_CLR %CHMGR-5-MEM_THRESHOLD_CLR: Memory %s usage drops below threshold.
Message ID Trap Type Trap Option ETS NONE PFC NONE PFC NONE PFC NONE PFC NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE %DIFFSERV-5-ETS_TRAP_TYPE_OPER_STATE_CHANGE: ETS Oper state changed to recommended for port %s %DIFFSERV-5-ETS_TRAP_TYPE_OPER_STATE_CHANGE: ETS Oper state changed to rxConfigSrc for port %s ETS_TRAP_TYPE_PEER_STATE_CHANGE %DIFFSERV-5-ETS_TRAP_TYPE_PEER_STATE_CHANGE : ETS Peer state changed to enabled for port %s %DIFFSERV-5-ETS_TRAP_TYPE_PEER_STATE_CHANGE : ETS Peer state changed to disabled fo
Message ID Trap Type Trap Option FIPS NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE FIPS NONE ENTITY NONE %FCOE-5-MAX_ENODE_LIMIT_RCH: Number of ENodes reached maximum allowed limit in the system FIPS_MAX_SESSION_LIMIT_RCH %FCOE-5-MAX_SESSION_LIMIT_RCH: Number of sessions reached maximum allowed limit in the system FIPS_FCF_DROP %FCOE-5-FCF_DROP: New FCF(%d,%s) discovered in Vlan %d is dropped as max-FCF-limit per VLAN is reached FIPS_ENODE_DROP %FCOE-5-ENODE_DROP: New ENode(%d,%s) discovered in interfa
FC Flex IO Modules 67 This part provides a generic, broad-level description of the operations, capabilities, and configuration commands of the Fiber Channel (FC) Flex IO module. FC Flex IO Module mentioned in this guide refers to FCF Port Combo Card. FC Flex IO Modules This part provides a generic, broad-level description of the operations, capabilities, and configuration commands of the Fiber Channel (FC) Flex IO module.
NPIV Proxy Gateway for FC Flex IO Modules The N-port identifier virtualization (NPIV) Proxy Gateway (NPG) feature provides FCoE-FC bridging capability on the system with the FC Flex IO module switch, allowing server CNAs to communicate with SAN fabrics over the FN IOM with the FC Flex IO module.
Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module. Usage Information An FCoE map is a template used to map FCoE and FC parameters in a converged fabric. An FCoE map is used to virtualize upstream FC ports on a switch with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway so that they appear to downstream server CNA ports as FCoE forwarder (FCF) ports on an FCoE network.
Command Modes FCOE MAP Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module. Usage Information In the fabric-id vlan command, the fabric and VLAN ID numbers must be the same. In each FCoE map, the fabric ID, FC-MAP value, and FCoE VLAN parameters must be unique. To remove a fabric-VLAN association from an FCoE map, enter the no fabric-id vlan command.
Version Description 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module. Usage Information The FCF priority you assign to the Switch with the FC Flex IO module is used by server CNAs to select an upstream FCF to use for a fabric login (FLOGI). To remove a configured FCF priority from an FCoE map, enter the no fcfpriority command.
In an FCoE map, the FC-MAP value, fabric ID, and FCoE VLAN parameters must be unique. To remove a configured FC-MAP value from an FCoE map, enter the no fc-map command. Related Commands fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric. show fcoe-map — displays the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps.
Usage Information An FCoE map is a template used to map FCoE and FC parameters in a converged fabric. An FCoE map is used to virtualize upstream FC ports on the switch with the FC Flex IO module NPIV proxy gateway so that they appear to downstream server CNA ports as FCoE forwarder (FCF) ports on an FCoE network.
Usage Information To delete the FIP keepalive time period from an FCoE map, enter the no fkaadv-erpiod command. Related Commands fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric. show fcoe-map — displays the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps.
Example (Single Range) FTOS(conf)#interface vlan 10 FTOS(conf-if-vl-3)# Related Commands fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric. show fcoe-map— displays the Fibre Channel and FCoE configuration parameters in FCoE maps. keepalive In an FCoE map, enable the monitoring of FIP keepalive messages (if it is disabled).
(FCoE) and FC ports to transmit FC storage traffic to a specified fabric. Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • EXEC • EXEC Privilege Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.3(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and MXL 10/40GbE Switch with the FC Flex IO module.
Field Description (either the FC-MAP value, fabric ID, or VLAN ID are not correctly configured). Oper-State Operational status of link to the fabric: Up (link is up and transmitting FC traffic), Down (link is down and not transmitting FC traffic), Link-wait (link is up and waiting for FLOGI to complete on peer FC port), or Removed (port has been shut down). The following table describes the show fcoe-map map-name output shown in the example below.
State Oper-State test 16 ACTIVE UP cnatest 1003 ACTIVE UP sitest 1004 ACTIVE DOWN 16 0efc02 1003 1004 128 0efc03 0efc04 128 128 FTOS#show fcoe-map si Fabric Name Fabric Id Vlan Id Vlan priority FC-MAP FKA-ADV-Period Fcf Priority Config-State Oper-State Members Related Commands si 1004 1004 3 0efc04 8 128 ACTIVE DOWN fcoe-map — creates an FCoE map which contains the parameters used in the communication between servers and a SAN fabric.
The following table describes the show npiv devices brief output shown in the example below. Field Description ENode-Intf A switch with the FC Flex IO module Ethernet interface (slot/port) to which a server CNA is connected. ENode-WWPN Worldwide port name (WWPN) of a server CNA port. FCoE-Vlan VLAN ID of the dedicated VLAN used to transmit FCoE traffic to and from the fabric. Fabric-Intf Fabric-facing Fibre Channel port (slot/port) on which FC traffic is transmitted to the specified fabric.
Example Related Commands 1572 Field Description FCoE VLAN ID of the dedicated VLAN used to transmit FCoE traffic from a server CNA to a fabric and configured on both the server-facing the switch with the FC Flex IO module port and server CNA port. Fabric Map Name of the FCoE map containing the FCoE/FC configuration parameters for the server CNA-fabric connection. Enode WWPN Worldwide port name of the server CNA port. Enode WWNN Worldwide node name of the server CNA.
Debugging and Diagnostics 68 This chapter contains the following sections: • Offline Diagnostic Commands • Hardware Commands Offline Diagnostic Commands The offline diagnostics test suite is useful for isolating faults and debugging hardware. While tests are running, the Dell Networking OS results are saved as a text file (TestReport-SU-X.txt) in the flash directory. The show file command is available only on Master and Standby.
clear hardware stack-unit Clear statistics from selected hardware components. Syntax Parameters clear hardware stack-unit 0–5 {counters | unit 0–1 counters | cpu data-plane statistics | stack-port 9–12} stack-unit 0–5 Enter the keywords stack-unit then 0 to 5 to select a particular stack member and then enter one of the following command options to clear a specific collection of data. counters Enter the keyword counters to clear the counters on the selected stack member.
Parameters stack-unit 0–5 Enter the keywords stack-unit then 0 to 5 to select a particular stack member and then enter one of the following command options to clear a specific collection of data. port-set 0–0 counters Enter the keywords port-set along with a port-pipe number, then the keyword counters to clear the systemflow counters on the selected port-pipe. Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Full–Switch Command History Related Commands Version Description 9.9(0.
show hardware layer3 Display Layer 3 ACL or QoS data for the selected stack member and stack member port-pipe. Syntax Parameters show hardware layer3 {acl | qos} stack-unit 0–5 port-set 0–0 acl | qos Enter either the keyword acl or the keyword qos to select between ACL or QoS data. stack-unit 0–5 Enter the keywords stack-unit then a numeral from 0 to 5 to select a stack ID. port-set 0–0 Enter the keyword port-set with a port-pipe number.
on 10G links. At this level, stack ports are shut down automatically. level2 Enter the keyword level2 to run Level 2 diagnostics. Level 2 diagnostics are a full set of diagnostic tests with no support for automatic partitioning. Level 2 diagnostics are used primarily for on-board loopback tests and more extensive component diagnostics. Various components on the board are put into Loopback mode and test packets are transmitted through those components.
hardware watchdog Set the watchdog timer to trigger a reboot and restart the system. Syntax hardware watchdog Defaults Enabled Command Modes Supported Modes Command History • CONFIGURATION All Modes Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
offline stack-unit Place a stack unit in the offline state. Syntax Parameters offline stack-unit number number Defaults none Command Modes EXEC Privilege Supported Modes All Modes Command History Enter the stack-unit number. The range is from 0 to 5. Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator. 8.3.17.0 Supported on the M I/O Aggregator.
stack-unit unit-id Enter the keyword stack-unit followed by the unit-id to display information on a specific stack member. The range is from 0 to 5. detail (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword detail to view detailed diagnostics information. summary (OPTIONAL) Enter the keyword summary to view a summary of the diagnostics information. By default, the summary is displayed. testcase Enter the keyword testcase to view the list of all the diag tests available.
Example 3 (show diag testcase stack-unit Command) Dell#show diag testcase stack-unit 0 ******** Blade IOM Diagnostics Test ********** Test ID ------1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 16 17 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 113 114 117 123 124 201 203 204 205 206 207 208 Test Description ---------------POWERRAILSTATUSTEST TSENSORACCESSTEST RTCPRESENCETEST CPUSDRAMPRESENCETEST CPUSDRAMSIZETEST USBAACCESSTEST USBHOSTCONTROLLERACCESSTEST SDFLASHACCESSTEST CPLDPRESENCETEST FLASHACCESSTEST BOARDREVTEST MGMTP
409 410 SERVERPORTPHYEXTLINKTEST CPUSNAKESFPPEXTLPBKTEST Interactive Interactive Total Diagnostic Testcases in Interactive: 8 ************** END *********************** Dell# show hardware stack-unit Display the data plane or management plane input and output statistics of the designated component of the designated stack member.
identify a 10G port that was in the same place in one of the rear modules. NOTE: You can identify stack port numbers by physical inspection of the rear modules. The numbering is the same as for the 10G ports. You can also inspect the output of the show system stack-ports command.
txRequested noTxDesc txError txReqTooLarge txInternalError txDatapathErr txPkt(COS0) txPkt(COS1) txPkt(COS2) txPkt(COS3) txPkt(COS4) txPkt(COS5) txPkt(COS6) txPkt(COS7) txPkt(COS8) txPkt(COS9) txPkt(COS10) txPkt(COS11) txPkt(UNIT0) Dell# :4353 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 :0 Example Dell#show hardware stack-unit 1 cpu party-bus statistics Input Statistics: 8189 packets, 8076608 bytes 0 dropped, 0 errors Output Statistics: 366 packets, 133100 bytes 0 errors Dell# Example (drop count
RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX Debugging and Diagnostics - Fragment Counter VLAN Tagged Packets Ingress Dropped Packet MTU Check Error Frame Counter PFC Frame Priority 0 PFC Frame Priority 1 PFC Frame Priority 2 PFC Frame Priority 3 PFC Frame Priority 4 PFC Frame Priority 5 PFC Frame Priority 6 PFC Frame Priority 7 Debug Counter 0 Debug Counter 1
TX - Debug Counter 11 0 --------------------unit: 0 port: 61 (interface Fo 1/60) Description RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX RX TX TX TX TX TX 1586 - Value IPV4 L3 Unicast Frame Counter IPV4 L3 Routed Multicast Packets IPV6 L3 Unicast Frame Counter IPV6 L3 Routed Multicast Packets Unicast Packet Counter 64 Byte Frame Counter 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter 256 to 5
TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX TX Example (portstatistics) - 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter Good Packet Counter Packet/Frame Counter Unicast Frame Counter Multicast Frame Counter Broadcast Frame Counter Byte Counter Control Frame Counter Pause Control Frame Counter Oversized Frame Counte
FA FA FA Dell# xe9 down SFI 11996 xe10 up SFI 11996 xe11 up SFI 11996 10G FD SW No Block RX None 10G FD SW No Forward None 10G FD SW No Forward None Example (register) Dell#show hardware stack-unit 0 unit 0 register 0x0f180d34 ALTERNATE_EMIRROR_BITMAP_PARITY_CONTROL.ipipe0 = 0x00000001 0x0f180d35 ALTERNATE_EMIRROR_BITMAP_PARITY_STATUS_INTR.ipipe0 = 0x00000000 0x0f180d36 ALTERNATE_EMIRROR_BITMAP_PARITY_STATUS_NACK.ipipe0 = 0x00000000 0x0018070c ARB_EOP_DEBUG.
bcmLinkMonStatusShow: The Current Link Status Is Front End Link Status 0xea3000000000000000000000 Front End Port Present Status 0x000000000000000000000000 Back Plane Link Status 0x00000000 ****************************************************** Link Status of all the ports in the Device - 0 The linkStatus of Front End Port 42 is TRUE The linkStatus of Front End Port 43 is TRUE The linkStatus of Front End Port 44 is TRUE The linkStatus of Front End Port 45 is FALSE The linkStatus of Front End Port 46 is TRUE
Used Packet Buffer: 0 ----- Buffer Stats for Interface Te 1/4 Queue 6 ----Maximum Shared Limit: 7667 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue: 8 Used Packet Buffer: 0 ----- Buffer Stats for Interface Te 1/5 Queue 6 ----Maximum Shared Limit: 7667 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue: 8 Used Packet Buffer: 0 ----- Buffer Stats for Interface Te 1/6 Queue 6 ----Maximum Shared Limit: 7667 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue: 8 Used Packet Buffer: 0
Command History Example Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.4(0.0) Supported on the FN I/O Aggregator.
Dell# Example (noncounters) 769 L2BCASTPackets 0 Dell#show hardware system-flow layer2 stack-unit 0 port-set 0 ############## FP Entry for redirecting STP BPDU to CPU Port ################ EID 2048: gid=1, slice=15, slice_idx=0x00, prio=0x800, flags=0x82, Installed tcam: color_indep=0, higig=0, higig_mask=0, KEY=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 0180c200 00000000 00000000 00000000 , FPF4=0x00 MASK=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 ffffffff ffff0000 00000000 00000000 , 0x00 action={act=Drop, param0=0(0x00), param
action={act=CopyToCpu, param0=0(0x00), param1=0(0x00)}, action={act=UpdateCounter, param0=1(0x01), param1=0(0x00)}, meter=NULL, counter={idx=3, mode=0x01, entries=1} ################# FP Entry for redirecting ARP Replies to RSM ############# EID 2043: gid=1, slice=15, slice_idx=0x04, prio=0x7fb, flags=0x82, Installed tcam: color_indep=0, higig=0, higig_mask=0, KEY=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000806 00001600 , FPF4=0x00 MASK=0x00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 0000ffff 0000160
Version Description 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and FN I/O Aggregator.
Used Packet Buffer: 0 ----- Buffer Stats for Interface Te 1/1 Queue 11 ----Maximum Shared Limit: 29514 Default Packet Buffer allocate for the Queue: 8
RX - 64 Byte Frame Counter RX - 65 to 127 Byte Frame Counter RX - 128 to 255 Byte Frame Counter RX - 256 to 511 Byte Frame Counter RX - 512 to 1023 Byte Frame Counter RX - 1024 to 1518 Byte Frame Counter RX - 1519 to 1522 Byte Good VLAN Frame Counter RX - 1519 to 2047 Byte Frame Counter RX - 2048 to 4095 Byte Frame Counter RX - 4096 to 9216 Byte Frame Counter RX - Good Packet Counter RX - Packet/Frame Counter RX - Unicast Frame Counter RX - Multicast Frame Counter RX - Broadcast Frame Counter RX - Byte Coun
drops Command Modes Enter the keyword drops to display internal drops. EXEC EXEC Privilege Supported Modes Command History Full–Switch Version Description 9.9(0.0) Introduced on the FN IOM. 9.8(0.0) Introduced on the M I/O Aggregator and the FN I/O Aggregator.
IPv4 L3UC Aged & Drops TTL Threshold Drops INVALID VLAN CNTR Drops L2MC Drops PKT Drops of ANY Conditions Hg MacUnderflow TX Err PKT Counter --- Error counters--Internal Mac Transmit Errors Unknown Opcodes Internal Mac Receive Errors 1598 : : : : : : : 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : 0 : 0 : 0 Debugging and Diagnostics
A Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) Message Types This chapter lists and describes the possible ICMP message type resulting from a ping. The first three columns list the possible symbol or type/code. For example, you would receive a ! or 03 as an echo reply from your ping. Table 5. ICMP Messages and Their Definitions Symbol Type Code . Query Error Timeout (no reply) ! 0 U 3 C Description 4 3 echo reply . destination unreachable: 0 network unreachable . 1 host unreachable .
Symbol & Type Code Description 2 redirect for type-of-service and network . 3 redirect for type-of-service and host . 8 0 echo request . 9 0 router advertisement . 10 0 router solicitation . 11 Error time exceeded: 0 time-to-live equals 0 during transit . 1 time-to-live equals 0 during reassembly . 12 1600 Query parameter problem: 1 IP header bad (catchall error) . 2 required option missing . 13 0 timestamp request . 14 0 timestamp reply .
